WO2025237348A1 - Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing - Google Patents
Method, apparatus, and medium for video processingInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025237348A1 WO2025237348A1 PCT/CN2025/094979 CN2025094979W WO2025237348A1 WO 2025237348 A1 WO2025237348 A1 WO 2025237348A1 CN 2025094979 W CN2025094979 W CN 2025094979W WO 2025237348 A1 WO2025237348 A1 WO 2025237348A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- mode
- candidate
- block
- candidates
- intra
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
- H04N19/10—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
- H04N19/102—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or selection affected or controlled by the adaptive coding
- H04N19/103—Selection of coding mode or of prediction mode
- H04N19/11—Selection of coding mode or of prediction mode among a plurality of spatial predictive coding modes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
- H04N19/10—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
- H04N19/102—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or selection affected or controlled by the adaptive coding
- H04N19/103—Selection of coding mode or of prediction mode
- H04N19/105—Selection of the reference unit for prediction within a chosen coding or prediction mode, e.g. adaptive choice of position and number of pixels used for prediction
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
- H04N19/10—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
- H04N19/169—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding
- H04N19/17—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being an image region, e.g. an object
- H04N19/176—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being an image region, e.g. an object the region being a block, e.g. a macroblock
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
- H04N19/50—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding
- H04N19/593—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding involving spatial prediction techniques
Definitions
- Embodiments of the present disclosure relates generally to video processing techniques, and more particularly, to video coding.
- video compression technologies such as motion picture expert group (MPEG) -2, MPEG-4, international telecommunication union -telecommunication standardization sector (ITU-T) H. 263, ITU-T H. 264/MPEG-4 Part 10 advanced video coding (AVC) , ITU-T H. 265 high efficiency video coding (HEVC) standard, versatile video coding (VVC) standard, have been proposed for video encoding/decoding.
- MPEG motion picture expert group
- MPEG-4 international telecommunication union -telecommunication standardization sector
- AVC advanced video coding
- HEVC high efficiency video coding
- VVC versatile video coding
- coding efficiency and/or coding quality of video coding techniques is generally expected to be further improved.
- Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a solution for video processing.
- a method for video processing comprises: determining, for a conversion between a current block of a current picture of a video and a bitstream of the video, a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for the current block, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream; and performing the conversion based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates.
- MVP motion vector prediction
- the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates for the current block are determined without being indicated in the bitstream.
- the proposed method can advantageously save the bits for signaling such a pair of bi-directional MVP candidates, and thus the coding efficiency can be improved.
- another method for video processing comprises: obtaining, for a conversion between a current block of a video and a bitstream of the video, an AMVP motion vector candidate for the current block; refining the AMVP motion vector candidate based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate; and performing the conversion based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate.
- the AMVP motion vector candidate is refined based on a cost metric.
- the proposed method can advantageously improve a quality of the AMVP motion vector candidate that is finally used for coding the current block, and thus the coding quality can be improved.
- another method for video processing comprises: obtaining, for a conversion between a current block of a video and a bitstream of the video, a set of candidates for the current block; applying a reordering process or a pruning process on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates, a distance metric for a candidate indicating a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined; and performing the conversion based on the applying.
- the set of candidate is reordered or pruned based on a distance metric.
- the proposed method can advantageously improve a quality of the candidate that is finally used for coding the current block, and thus the coding quality can be improved.
- an apparatus for video processing comprises a processor and a non-transitory memory with instructions thereon.
- the instructions upon execution by the processor cause the processor to perform a method in accordance with the first, second, or third aspect of the present disclosure.
- a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores instructions that cause a processor to perform a method in accordance with the first, second, or third aspect of the present disclosure.
- non-transitory computer-readable recording medium stores a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing.
- the method comprises: determining a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for a current block of a current picture of the video, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream; and generating the bitstream based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates.
- MVP motion vector prediction
- the non-transitory computer-readable recording medium stores a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing.
- the method comprises: determining a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for a current block of a current picture of the video, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream; generating the bitstream based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates; and storing the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
- MVP motion vector prediction
- the non-transitory computer-readable recording medium stores a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing.
- the method comprises: obtaining an AMVP motion vector candidate for a current block of the video; refining the AMVP motion vector candidate based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate; and generating the bitstream based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate.
- a method for storing a bitstream of a video comprises: obtaining an AMVP motion vector candidate for a current block of the video; refining the AMVP motion vector candidate based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate; generating the bitstream based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate; and storing the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
- a method for storing a bitstream of a video comprises: obtaining a set of candidates for a current block of the video; applying a reordering process or a pruning process on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates, a distance metric for a candidate indicating a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined; and generating the bitstream based on the applying.
- a method for storing a bitstream of a video comprises: obtaining a set of candidates for a current block of the video; applying a reordering process or a pruning process on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates, a distance metric for a candidate indicating a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined; generating the bitstream based on the applying; and storing the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
- Fig. 1 illustrates a block diagram of an example video coding system in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure
- Fig. 2 illustrates a block diagram of an example video encoder in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure
- Fig. 3 illustrates a block diagram of an example video decoder in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure
- Fig. 4 illustrates an illustration of the effect of the slope adjustment parameter “u” ;
- Fig. 5 illustrates neighboring blocks (L, A, BL, AR, AL) used in the derivation of a general MPM list
- Fig. 6 illustrates neighboring reconstructed samples used for DIMD chroma mode
- Fig. 7 illustrates intra template matching search area used
- Fig. 8 illustrates the use of IntraTMP block vector for IBC block
- Fig. 9A and Fig. 9B illustrates the division method for angular modes
- Fig. 10 illustrates extended MRL candidate list
- Fig. 11 illustrates an illustration of the template area
- Fig. 12 illustrates spatial part of the convolutional filter
- Fig. 13 illustrates reference area (with its paddings) used to derive the filter coefficients
- Fig. 14 illustrates four Sobel based gradient patterns for GLM
- Fig. 15 illustrates non-downsampled luma samples
- Fig. 16 illustrates reference area for BVG-CCCM
- Fig. 17 illustrates spatial samples used for GL-CCCM
- Fig. 18 illustrates various downsampling filters used in cross-component models
- Fig. 19 illustrates filter on samples of MM-CCLM/MM-CCCM
- Fig. 20 illustrates the template adjacent to the current chroma CU
- Fig. 21 illustrates spatial GPM candidates
- Fig. 22 illustrates a GPM template
- Fig. 23 illustrates a GPM blending
- Fig. 24 illustrates a transform selection process for directional planar modes
- Fig. 25 illustrates luma blocks used to derive direct block vector
- Fig. 26 illustrates three EIP filter shapes
- Fig. 27 illustrates three types of reconstructed area for EIP filter
- Fig. 28 illustrates L shaped neighborhood for a given predicted block
- Fig. 29 illustrates spatial neighboring blocks used to derive the spatial merge candidates
- Fig. 30 illustrates subblock templates generation of SbTMVP
- Fig. 31A to Fig. 31C illustrate possible MVs of the proposed mode
- Fig. 32 illustrates template matching performs on a search area around initial MV
- Fig. 33 illustrates diamond regions in the search area
- Fig. 34 illustrates a template
- Fig. 35A and Fig. 35B illustrate the first HPT and the second HPT, respectively;
- Fig. 36A and Fig. 36B illustrate spatial neighbors for deriving affine merge/AMVP candidates
- Fig. 37 illustrates from non-adjacent neighbors to the first type of constructed affine merge/AMVP candidates
- Fig. 38 illustrates frequency responses of the interpolation filter and the VVC interpolation filter at half-pel phase
- Fig. 39 illustrates template and reference samples of the template in reference pictures
- Fig. 40 illustrates template and reference samples of the template for block with sub-block motion using the motion information of the subblocks of the current block
- Fig. 41 illustrates additional directions along k ⁇ /8 diagonal angles
- Fig. 42 illustrates the neighboring 4 x 4 subblocks that are used for RMVF parameter derivation
- Fig. 43 illustrates the ramp function for the weights for GPM blending
- Fig. 44A-Fig. 44C illustrate an example GPM with inter and intra prediction, respectively;
- Fig. 44D illustrates an example of GPM with intra and intra prediction
- Fig. 45 illustrates the edge on templates
- Fig. 46 illustrates an example of how to derive AR-BVP
- Fig. 47 illustrates the five positions in Bn
- Fig. 48 illustrates padding candidates for the replacement of the zero-vector in the IBC list
- Fig. 49 illustrates IBC candidate clustering based on the L2 distance and the TM cost
- Fig. 50 illustrates IBC reference region depending on current CU position
- Fig. 51 illustrates reference area for IBC
- Fig. 52 illustrates prediction of BVD
- Fig. 53 illustrates motion compensated boundary padding method
- Fig. 54 illustrates an example of deriving a M ⁇ 4 padding block with a left padding direction
- Fig. 55A and Fig. 55B illustrates BV adjustment
- Fig. 56 illustrates the InterCCCM method on the decoder
- Fig. 57 illustrates luma samples L0 to L5 in relation to the chroma sample C
- Fig. 58A illustrates an example of pre-defined positions
- Fig. 58B illustrates an example of pre-defined positions
- Fig. 58C illustrates an example of pre-defined positions
- Fig. 58D illustrates an example of pre-defined positions
- Fig. 59A and Fig. 59B illustrates example of possible positions of adjacent and non-adjacent neighboring blocks relative to the current or collocated block, respectively;
- Fig. 60 illustrates a flowchart of a method for video processing in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure
- Fig. 61 illustrates a flowchart of a method for video processing in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure
- Fig. 62 illustrates a flowchart of a method for video processing in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure.
- Fig. 63 illustrates a block diagram of a computing device in which various embodiments of the present disclosure can be implemented.
- references in the present disclosure to “one embodiment, ” “an embodiment, ” “an example embodiment, ” and the like indicate that the embodiment described may include a particular feature, structure, or characteristic, but it is not necessary that every embodiment includes the particular feature, structure, or characteristic. Moreover, such phrases are not necessarily referring to the same embodiment. Further, when a particular feature, structure, or characteristic is described in connection with an example embodiment, it is submitted that it is within the knowledge of one skilled in the art to affect such feature, structure, or characteristic in connection with other embodiments whether or not explicitly described.
- first and second etc. may be used herein to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first element could be termed a second element, and similarly, a second element could be termed a first element, without departing from the scope of example embodiments.
- the term “and/or” includes any and all combinations of one or more of the listed terms.
- Fig. 1 is a block diagram that illustrates an example video coding system 100 that may utilize the techniques of this disclosure.
- the video coding system 100 may include a source device 110 and a destination device 120.
- the source device 110 can be also referred to as a video encoding device, and the destination device 120 can be also referred to as a video decoding device.
- the source device 110 can be configured to generate encoded video data and the destination device 120 can be configured to decode the encoded video data generated by the source device 110.
- the source device 110 may include a video source 112, a video encoder 114, and an input/output (I/O) interface 116.
- I/O input/output
- the video source 112 may include a source such as a video capture device.
- a source such as a video capture device.
- the video capture device include, but are not limited to, an interface to receive video data from a video content provider, a computer graphics system for generating video data, and/or a combination thereof.
- the video data may comprise one or more pictures.
- the video encoder 114 encodes the video data from the video source 112 to generate a bitstream.
- the bitstream may include a sequence of bits that form a coded representation of the video data.
- the bitstream may include coded pictures and associated data.
- the coded picture is a coded representation of a picture.
- the associated data may include sequence parameter sets, picture parameter sets, and other syntax structures.
- the I/O interface 116 may include a modulator/demodulator and/or a transmitter.
- the encoded video data may be transmitted directly to destination device 120 via the I/O interface 116 through the network 130A.
- the encoded video data may also be stored onto a storage medium/server 130B for access by destination device 120.
- the destination device 120 may include an I/O interface 126, a video decoder 124, and a display device 122.
- the I/O interface 126 may include a receiver and/or a modem.
- the I/O interface 126 may acquire encoded video data from the source device 110 or the storage medium/server 130B.
- the video decoder 124 may decode the encoded video data.
- the display device 122 may display the decoded video data to a user.
- the display device 122 may be integrated with the destination device 120, or may be external to the destination device 120 which is configured to interface with an external display device.
- the video encoder 114 and the video decoder 124 may operate according to a video compression standard, such as the High Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC) standard, Versatile Video Coding (VVC) standard and other current and/or further standards.
- HEVC High Efficiency Video Coding
- VVC Versatile Video Coding
- Fig. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a video encoder 200, which may be an example of the video encoder 114 in the system 100 illustrated in Fig. 1, in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure.
- the video encoder 200 may be configured to implement any or all of the techniques of this disclosure.
- the video encoder 200 includes a plurality of functional components.
- the techniques described in this disclosure may be shared among the various components of the video encoder 200.
- a processor may be configured to perform any or all of the techniques described in this disclosure.
- the video encoder 200 may include a partition unit 201, a prediction unit 202 which may include a mode select unit 203, a motion estimation unit 204, a motion compensation unit 205 and an intra-prediction unit 206, a residual generation unit 207, a transform unit 208, a quantization unit 209, an inverse quantization unit 210, an inverse transform unit 211, a reconstruction unit 212, a buffer 213, and an entropy encoding unit 214.
- a partition unit 201 may include a mode select unit 203, a motion estimation unit 204, a motion compensation unit 205 and an intra-prediction unit 206, a residual generation unit 207, a transform unit 208, a quantization unit 209, an inverse quantization unit 210, an inverse transform unit 211, a reconstruction unit 212, a buffer 213, and an entropy encoding unit 214.
- the video encoder 200 may include more, fewer, or different functional components.
- the prediction unit 202 may include an intra block copy (IBC) unit.
- the IBC unit may perform prediction in an IBC mode in which at least one reference picture is a picture where the current video block is located.
- the partition unit 201 may partition a picture into one or more video blocks.
- the video encoder 200 and the video decoder 300 may support various video block sizes.
- the mode select unit 203 may select one of the coding modes, intra or inter, e.g., based on error results, and provide the resulting intra-coded or inter-coded block to a residual generation unit 207 to generate residual block data and to a reconstruction unit 212 to reconstruct the encoded block for use as a reference picture.
- the mode select unit 203 may select a combined inter and intra prediction (CIIP) mode in which the prediction is based on an inter prediction signal and an intra prediction signal.
- CIIP inter and intra prediction
- the mode select unit 203 may also select a resolution for a motion vector (e.g., a sub-pixel or integer pixel precision) for the block in the case of inter-prediction.
- the motion estimation unit 204 may generate motion information for the current video block by comparing one or more reference frames from buffer 213 to the current video block.
- the motion compensation unit 205 may determine a predicted video block for the current video block based on the motion information and decoded samples of pictures from the buffer 213 other than the picture associated with the current video block.
- the motion estimation unit 204 and the motion compensation unit 205 may perform different operations for a current video block, for example, depending on whether the current video block is in an I-slice, a P-slice, or a B-slice.
- an “I-slice” may refer to a portion of a picture composed of macroblocks, all of which are based upon macroblocks within the same picture.
- P-slices and B-slices may refer to portions of a picture composed of macroblocks that are not dependent on macroblocks in the same picture.
- the motion estimation unit 204 may perform uni-directional prediction for the current video block, and the motion estimation unit 204 may search reference pictures of list 0 or list 1 for a reference video block for the current video block. The motion estimation unit 204 may then generate a reference index that indicates the reference picture in list 0 or list 1 that contains the reference video block and a motion vector that indicates a spatial displacement between the current video block and the reference video block. The motion estimation unit 204 may output the reference index, a prediction direction indicator, and the motion vector as the motion information of the current video block. The motion compensation unit 205 may generate the predicted video block of the current video block based on the reference video block indicated by the motion information of the current video block.
- the motion estimation unit 204 may perform bi-directional prediction for the current video block.
- the motion estimation unit 204 may search the reference pictures in list 0 for a reference video block for the current video block and may also search the reference pictures in list 1 for another reference video block for the current video block.
- the motion estimation unit 204 may then generate reference indexes that indicate the reference pictures in list 0 and list 1 containing the reference video blocks and motion vectors that indicate spatial displacements between the reference video blocks and the current video block.
- the motion estimation unit 204 may output the reference indexes and the motion vectors of the current video block as the motion information of the current video block.
- the motion compensation unit 205 may generate the predicted video block of the current video block based on the reference video blocks indicated by the motion information of the current video block.
- the motion estimation unit 204 may output a full set of motion information for decoding processing of a decoder.
- the motion estimation unit 204 may signal the motion information of the current video block with reference to the motion information of another video block. For example, the motion estimation unit 204 may determine that the motion information of the current video block is sufficiently similar to the motion information of a neighboring video block.
- the motion estimation unit 204 may indicate, in a syntax structure associated with the current video block, a value that indicates to the video decoder 300 that the current video block has the same motion information as the another video block.
- the motion estimation unit 204 may identify, in a syntax structure associated with the current video block, another video block and a motion vector difference (MVD) .
- the motion vector difference indicates a difference between the motion vector of the current video block and the motion vector of the indicated video block.
- the video decoder 300 may use the motion vector of the indicated video block and the motion vector difference to determine the motion vector of the current video block.
- video encoder 200 may predictively signal the motion vector.
- Two examples of predictive signaling techniques that may be implemented by video encoder 200 include advanced motion vector prediction (AMVP) and merge mode signaling.
- AMVP advanced motion vector prediction
- merge mode signaling merge mode signaling
- the intra prediction unit 206 may perform intra prediction on the current video block.
- the intra prediction unit 206 may generate prediction data for the current video block based on decoded samples of other video blocks in the same picture.
- the prediction data for the current video block may include a predicted video block and various syntax elements.
- the residual generation unit 207 may generate residual data for the current video block by subtracting (e.g., indicated by the minus sign) the predicted video block (s) of the current video block from the current video block.
- the residual data of the current video block may include residual video blocks that correspond to different sample components of the samples in the current video block.
- the residual generation unit 207 may not perform the subtracting operation.
- the transform unit 208 may generate one or more transform coefficient video blocks for the current video block by applying one or more transforms to a residual video block associated with the current video block.
- the quantization unit 209 may quantize the transform coefficient video block associated with the current video block based on one or more quantization parameter (QP) values associated with the current video block.
- QP quantization parameter
- the inverse quantization unit 210 and the inverse transform unit 211 may apply inverse quantization and inverse transforms to the transform coefficient video block, respectively, to reconstruct a residual video block from the transform coefficient video block.
- the reconstruction unit 212 may add the reconstructed residual video block to corresponding samples from one or more predicted video blocks generated by the prediction unit 202 to produce a reconstructed video block associated with the current video block for storage in the buffer 213.
- loop filtering operation may be performed to reduce video blocking artifacts in the video block.
- the entropy encoding unit 214 may receive data from other functional components of the video encoder 200. When the entropy encoding unit 214 receives the data, the entropy encoding unit 214 may perform one or more entropy encoding operations to generate entropy encoded data and output a bitstream that includes the entropy encoded data.
- Fig. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a video decoder 300, which may be an example of the video decoder 124 in the system 100 illustrated in Fig. 1, in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure.
- the video decoder 300 may be configured to perform any or all of the techniques of this disclosure.
- the video decoder 300 includes a plurality of functional components.
- the techniques described in this disclosure may be shared among the various components of the video decoder 300.
- a processor may be configured to perform any or all of the techniques described in this disclosure.
- the video decoder 300 includes an entropy decoding unit 301, a motion compensation unit 302, an intra prediction unit 303, an inverse quantization unit 304, an inverse transform unit 305, a reconstruction unit 306 and a buffer 307.
- the video decoder 300 may, in some examples, perform a decoding pass generally reciprocal to the encoding pass described with respect to video encoder 200.
- the entropy decoding unit 301 may retrieve an encoded bitstream.
- the encoded bitstream may include entropy coded video data (e.g., encoded blocks of video data) .
- the entropy decoding unit 301 may decode the entropy coded video data, and from the entropy decoded video data, the motion compensation unit 302 may determine motion information including motion vectors, motion vector precision, reference picture list indexes, and other motion information.
- the motion compensation unit 302 may, for example, determine such information by performing the AMVP and merge mode.
- AMVP is used, including derivation of several most probable candidates based on data from adjacent PBs and the reference picture.
- Motion information typically includes the horizontal and vertical motion vector displacement values, one or two reference picture indices, and, in the case of prediction regions in B slices, an identification of which reference picture list is associated with each index.
- a “merge mode” may refer to deriving the motion information from spatially or temporally neighboring blocks.
- the motion compensation unit 302 may produce motion compensated blocks, possibly performing interpolation based on interpolation filters. Identifiers for interpolation filters to be used with sub-pixel precision may be included in the syntax elements.
- the motion compensation unit 302 may use the interpolation filters as used by the video encoder 200 during encoding of the video block to calculate interpolated values for sub-integer pixels of a reference block.
- the motion compensation unit 302 may determine the interpolation filters used by the video encoder 200 according to the received syntax information and use the interpolation filters to produce predictive blocks.
- the motion compensation unit 302 may use at least part of the syntax information to determine sizes of blocks used to encode frame (s) and/or slice (s) of the encoded video sequence, partition information that describes how each macroblock of a picture of the encoded video sequence is partitioned, modes indicating how each partition is encoded, one or more reference frames (and reference frame lists) for each inter-encoded block, and other information to decode the encoded video sequence.
- a “slice” may refer to a data structure that can be decoded independently from other slices of the same picture, in terms of entropy coding, signal prediction, and residual signal reconstruction.
- a slice can either be an entire picture or a region of a picture.
- the intra prediction unit 303 may use intra prediction modes for example received in the bitstream to form a prediction block from spatially adjacent blocks.
- the inverse quantization unit 304 inverse quantizes, i.e., de-quantizes, the quantized video block coefficients provided in the bitstream and decoded by entropy decoding unit 301.
- the inverse transform unit 305 applies an inverse transform.
- the reconstruction unit 306 may obtain the decoded blocks, e.g., by summing the residual blocks with the corresponding prediction blocks generated by the motion compensation unit 302 or intra-prediction unit 303. If desired, a deblocking filter may also be applied to filter the decoded blocks in order to remove blockiness artifacts.
- the decoded video blocks are then stored in the buffer 307, which provides reference blocks for subsequent motion compensation/intra prediction and also produces decoded video for presentation on a display device.
- This disclosure is related to video coding technologies. Specifically, it is about temporal candidates and non-adjacent candidates in image/video coding. It may be applied to the existing video coding standard like HEVC, VVC, and etc. It may be also applicable to future video coding standards or video codec.
- Video coding standards have evolved primarily through the development of the well-known ITU-T and ISO/IEC standards.
- the ITU-T produced H. 261 and H. 263, ISO/IEC produced MPEG-1 and MPEG-4 Visual, and the two organizations jointly produced the H. 262/MPEG-2 Video and H. 264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding (AVC) and H. 265/HEVC standards.
- AVC H. 264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding
- H. 265/HEVC High Efficiency Video Coding
- VVC Versatile Video Coding
- VTM VVC test model
- MMLM Multi-model LM
- CCLM included in VVC is extended by adding three Multi-model LM (MMLM) modes.
- MMLM Multi-model LM
- the reconstructed neighboring samples are classified into two classes using a threshold which is the average of the luma reconstructed neighboring samples.
- the linear model of each class is derived using the Least-Mean-Square (LMS) method.
- LMS Least-Mean-Square
- the LMS method is also used to derive the linear model.
- a slope adjustment to is applied to cross-component linear model (CCLM) and to Multi-model LM prediction. The adjustment is tilting the linear function which maps luma values to chroma values with respect to a center point determined by the average luma value of the reference samples.
- CCLM cross-component linear model
- Multi-model LM Multi-model LM
- CCLM uses a model with 2 parameters to map luma values to chroma values.
- mapping function is tilted or rotated around the point with luminance value y r .
- Picture below illustrates the process.
- Fig. 4 illustrates an illustration of the effect of the slope adjustment parameter “u” .
- Left model created with the current CCLM.
- Right model updated as proposed.
- Slope adjustment parameter is provided as an integer between -4 and 4, inclusive, and signaled in the bitstream.
- the unit of the slope adjustment parameter is 1/8 th of a chroma sample value per one luma sample value (for 10-bit content) .
- Adjustment is available for the CCLM models that are using reference samples both above and left of the block ( “LM_CHROMA_IDX” and “MMLM_CHROMA_IDX” ) , but not for the “single side” modes. This selection is based on coding efficiency vs. complexity trade-off considerations.
- the proposed encoder approach performs an SATD based search for the best value of the slope update for Cr and a similar SATD based search for Cb. If either one results as a non-zero slope adjustment parameter, the combined slope adjustment pair (SATD based update for Cr, SATD based update for Cb) is included in the list of RD checks for the TU. 2.1.1.3. Gradient PDPC
- PDPC may not be applied due to the unavailability of the secondary reference samples.
- a gradient based PDPC extended from horizontal/vertical mode, is applied.
- the PDPC weights (wT /wL) and nScale parameter for determining the decay in PDPC weights with respect to the distance from left/top boundary are set equal to corresponding parameters in horizontal/vertical mode, respectively.
- bilinear interpolation is applied.
- the existing primary MPM (PMPM) list consists of 6 entries and the secondary MPM (SMPM) list includes 16 entries.
- a general MPM list with 22 entries is constructed first, and then the first 6 entries in this general MPM list are included into the PMPM list, and the rest of entries form the SMPM list.
- the first entry in the general MPM list is the Planar mode.
- the remaining entries are composed of the intra modes of the left (L) , above (A) , below-left (BL) , above-right (AR) , and above-left (AL) neighbouring blocks as shown in Fig. 5, and DIMD modes which are sorted in ascending order of SAD cost. Up to 5 modes with the smallest SAD cost are added.
- the SAD cost is computed between the prediction and the reconstruction samples of the template.
- the sorted directional modes with added offset are added into the general MPM list, and then the default modes, until the general MPM list with 22 entries is constructed.
- a CU block is vertically oriented, the order of neighbouring blocks is A, L, BL, AR, AL; otherwise, it is L, A, BL, AR, AL.
- MPM list is equally divided into four groups and the group index is parsed first. Then, a mode index is further parsed to indicate which mode in the selected group is used. 2.1.1.5. Reference sample interpolation and smoothing for intra-prediction
- the 4-tap cubic interpolation is replaced with a 6-tap cubic interpolation filter, for the derivation of predicted samples from the reference samples.
- DIMD IntraTMP or IBC
- SBA block vector based predictor
- weights derived from the histogram of gradients.
- the decision between for the non-directional modes is taken according to the template cost. Specifically, the block vectors of all adjacent and non-adjacent merge candidates (coded in IntraTMP or IBC) are compared to planar prediction on the reconstructed template.
- the template cost (SATD) is used to select the best predictor among them.
- the division operations in weight derivation are performed utilizing the same lookup table (LUT) based integerization scheme used by the CCLM.
- LUT lookup table
- the weight for each of the five derived modes is modified if the one the above or left histogram magnitudes is twice larger than the other one.
- the weights are location dependent and computed as follows.
- wDimd i is the unmodified uniform weight of the DIMD selected
- ⁇ i is pre-defined and set to 10.
- Derived intra modes are included into the primary list of intra most probable modes (MPM) , so the DIMD process is performed before the MPM list is constructed.
- the primary derived intra mode of a DIMD block is stored with a block and is used for MPM list construction of the neighboring blocks.
- the DIMD chroma mode uses the DIMD derivation method to derive the chroma intra prediction mode of the current block based on the neighboring reconstructed Y, Cb and Cr samples in the second neighboring row and column. Specifically, a horizontal gradient and a vertical gradient are calculated for each collocated reconstructed luma sample of the current chroma block, as well as the reconstructed Cb and Cr samples, to build a HoG. Then the intra prediction mode with the largest histogram amplitude values is used for performing chroma intra prediction of the current chroma block.
- Fig. 6 illustrates neighboring reconstructed samples used for DIMD chroma mode.
- the intra prediction mode derived from the DIMD chroma mode is the same as the intra prediction mode derived from the DM mode, the intra prediction mode with the second largest histogram amplitude value is used as the DIMD chroma mode.
- a CU level flag is signaled to indicate whether the proposed DIMD chroma mode is applied.
- the luma region of reconstructed samples used for computing the histogram of gradients for chroma DIMD mode is modified.
- the pairs of a vertical gradient and a horizontal gradient are extracted from the second and third lines in this luma CB instead of being extracted from the regular set of DIMD decoded reference samples around this luma CB.
- two chroma intra prediction signals can be fused together.
- One of the two chroma intra prediction signals is predicted using one of the DM mode, DIMD chroma mode and the four default modes (non-LM mode) .
- the other chroma intra prediction signal is predicted using cross-component linear prediction modes (LM mode) . Two different methods are supported.
- the two weights, w0 and w1 are determined by the intra prediction mode of adjacent chroma blocks and shift is set equal to 2.
- the LM mode can be either MMLM or CCLM mode
- pred0 (i, j) is the predictor obtained by applying the non-LM mode
- rec′ L (i, j) is the set of downsampled reconstructed luma samples at co-located positions
- pred C (i, j) is the final predictor of the current chroma block.
- ⁇ is a fixed value and is set equal to 512 for 10-bit content.
- the three weights, ⁇ 0 , ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 are derived from the adjacent luma and chroma samples using the same LDL derivation method as in CCCM.
- the non-LM mode can be DM mode, DIMD chroma mode and the four default modes.
- DIMD chroma mode is allowed to be fused with LM modes.
- Intra template matching prediction is a special intra prediction mode that copies the best prediction block from the reconstructed part of the current frame, whose L-shaped template matches the current template. For a predefined search range, the encoder searches for the most similar template to the current template in a reconstructed part of the current frame and uses the corresponding block as a prediction block. The encoder then signals the usage of this mode, and the same prediction operation is performed at the decoder side.
- the prediction signal is generated by matching the L-shaped, Top-only or Left-Only causal neighbor of the current block with another block in a predefined search area.
- a predefined search area There are 6 predefined search areas, i.e., R1 to R6 in Fig. 7 which contain the reconstructed samples from the top and left CTUs as well as part of the reconstructed samples within the current CTU that are located above, left, bottom-left and top-right to the current block.
- IntraTMP employs an implicit merge mode, where merge candidates are considered without signaling a merge flag or index. Specifically, the reference positions pointed by the block vectors of all the adjacent and non-adjacent merge candidates (coded in IntraTMP or IBC mode) are used as additional candidates beyond the default search areas. The same template matching cost is used to compare the merge positions and the defaults ones. For bi-directional IBC merge candidate, two candidates are retained corresponding to each reference frame. Similarly, for IntraTMP, two candidates are considered corresponding to the best candidate by template search and the coded candidate.
- Sum of absolute differences (SAD) is used as a cost function.
- a given search order of the 6 regions is utilized, i.e., R4, R5, R6, R1, R2, and R3.
- the decoder constructs a candidate list of up to “19” template matching block vectors that are ranked in ascending order according to the template cost (SAD) .
- SAD template cost
- the following modes are supported: 1-Single predictor: A single predictor is selected from the candidate list. 2-Fusion of multiple predictors: multiple predictors are blended multiple to derive the final prediction block.
- the blending weights are either computed from the template matching cost of each predictor, or with Wiener-filter based weight derivation method.
- 3-Sub-pel precision When single predictor is used, sub-pel precision can be used with 1/2-pel precision, 1/4-pel precision and 3/4-pel precision, each with 8 possible directions.
- 4-linear filter model A linear filter can be learned between the reference template and current template and be applied the linear model to reference block. This mode can be used for single predictor when sub-pel precision is not used.
- IntraTMP with local illumination compensation is allowed.
- the following considerations are taken: 1-Usages of LIC and FLM (CCCM-like filtering) are mutually exclusive for a given CU.
- 2-Usages of LIC together with fusion in intra TMP is allowed.
- 3-Top-only and Left-only template usage for LIC model determination is allowed for screen content coding. For camera-captured coding, only the top-left template is employed.
- 4-Multi Mode Linear Model (MMLM) is supported similarly to IBC-LIC, for screen content coding.
- the Intra TMP search process employs MRSAD rather than SAD distortion function.
- SearchRange_w min (64, a*BlkW)
- SearchRange_h min (64, a*BlkH)
- ‘a’ is a constant that controls the gain/complexity trade-off. In practice, ‘a’ is equal to 5.
- the search range of all search regions is subsampled by a factor of 4. .
- a refinement process is performed. The refinement is done via a second template matching search around the best match with a reduced range.
- the Intra template matching tool is enabled for CUs with size less than or equal to 64 in width and height. This maximum CU size for Intra template matching is configurable.
- Intra template matching prediction mode is signaled at CU level through a dedicated flag when DIMD is not used for current CU. 2.1.1.8.1. IntraTMP derived block vector candidates for IBC
- block vector (BV) derived from the intra template matching prediction (IntraTMP) is used for intra block copy (IBC) .
- IntraTMP BV of the neighbouring blocks along with IBC BV are used as spatial BV candidates in IBC candidate list construction.
- IntraTMP block vector is stored in the IBC block vector buffer and, the current IBC block can use both IBC BV and IntraTMP BV of neighbouring blocks as BV candidate for IBC BV candidate list as shown in Fig. 8.
- IntraTMP block vectors are added to IBC block vector candidate list as spatial candidates. IntraTMP block vectors are stored in quarter-pel resolution for coding of IBC block vectors and HMVP. 2.1.1.9. Fusion for template-based intra mode derivation (TIMD)
- TIMD modes For each intra prediction mode in MPMs, as well as the wide-angle modes if the above-right and/or bottom-left reference samples are available, SATD between the prediction and reconstruction samples of the template is calculated. First two intra prediction modes with the minimum SATD and one non-angular intra prediction mode (i.e. DC or Planar) with the lowest SATD cost are selected as the TIMD modes. These three TIMD modes are fused with the weights after applying PDPC process, and such weighted intra prediction is used to code the current CU. Position dependent intra prediction combination (PDPC) is included in the derivation of the TIMD modes.
- PDPC Position dependent intra prediction combination
- the non-angular intra prediction mode is different from the two selected intra prediction modes.
- - costMode3 ⁇ 1.5*costMode1
- costMode3 is the SATD cost of the non-angular intra prediction mode
- costMode1 is the SATD cost of the first intra prediction mode. If both of the conditions are true, three intra prediction modes are used to generate the prediction. And the weights of each intra prediction mode are computed from SATD cost:
- the non-angular intra prediction mode is not used in prediction.
- the costs of the two selected modes are compared with a threshold, in the test the cost factor of 2 is applied as follows: costMode2 ⁇ 2*costMode1.
- the division operations are conducted using the same lookup table (LUT) based integerization scheme used by the CCLM.
- LUT lookup table
- location-dependent sample-based fusion used in DIMD fusion process is used for the TIMD fusion but the location-dependent criterion applying to amplitudes of the selected predictors is replaced by a SATD cost-based criteria.
- the location-dependent criterion is determined from a ratio of the normalized SATD of the selected TIMD predictors computed in above and left template area. 2.1.1.10. Intra prediction fusion
- This intra prediction method derives predicted samples as a weighted combination of multiple predictors generated from different reference lines. In this process multiple intra predictors are generated and then fused by weighted averaging.
- the number of predictors selected for a weighted average is increased from 3 to 6.
- the angular intra prediction fusion method is applied to luma blocks when angular intra mode has non-integer slope (required reference samples interpolation) and the block size is greater than 16, it is used with MRL and not applied for ISP coded blocks.
- PDPC is applied for the intra prediction mode using the closest to the current block reference line.
- the TIMD mode with blending method is applied when all the following conditions are satisfied: - both the first and second modes are angular prediction mode. - the current block is not ISP coded block. - all of the following conditions are false: ⁇ abs (predModeIntra 1 –predModeIntra 2 ) is greater than Threshold. The value of Threshold is set to 8 or 4 depending on block size. ⁇ (predModeIntra 1 -EXT_HOR_IDX) * (predModeIntra 2 -EXT_HOR_IDX) is less than 0.
- a subblock-based merge candidate may be used to generate the inter signal of CIIP, where the same subblock-based merge candidate list used by affine and sbTMVP is utilized.
- CIIP flag When CIIP flag is true and CIIP-TM flag is false, a subblock-based CIIP flag is signalled. If subblock-based CIIP flag is true, an index indicating specific candidate in the subblock-based merge list is signalled, and TIMD is used to generate intra signal by default thus no CIIP-PDPC flag signalled any more. 2.1.1.11.2. Combination of CIIP with TIMD and TM merge
- the prediction samples are generated by weighting an inter prediction signal predicted using CIIP-TM merge candidate and an intra prediction signal predicted using TIMD derived intra prediction mode.
- the method is only applied to coding blocks with an area less than or equal to 1024.
- the TIMD derivation method is used to derive the intra prediction mode in CIIP. Specifically, the intra prediction mode with the smallest SATD values in the TIMD mode list is selected and mapped to one of the 67 regular intra prediction modes.
- CIIP-TM a CIIP-TM merge candidate list is built for the CIIP-TM mode.
- the merge candidates are refined by template matching.
- the CIIP-TM merge candidates are also reordered by the ARMC method as regular merge candidates.
- the maximum number of CIIP-TM merge candidates is equal to two. 2.1.1.12. Extended multiple reference line (MRL) list
- MRL list in VVC is extended to include more reference lines for intra prediction.
- the extended reference line list consists of line indices ⁇ 1, 3, 5, 7, 12 ⁇ .
- TMD template-based intra mode derivation
- Fig. 10 illustrates extended MRL candidate list. 2.1.1.13. Template-based multiple reference line intra prediction
- Template-based multiple reference line intra prediction (TMRL) mode combines reference line and prediction mode together and uses a template matching method to construct a list of candidate combinations. An index to the candidate combination list is coded to indicate which reference line and prediction mode is used in coding the current block.
- the regular multiple reference line (MRL) for the non-TIMD part is replaced by TMRL mode.
- the TMRL mode extends reference line candidate list and the intra-prediction-mode candidate list.
- the extended reference line candidate list is ⁇ 1, 3, 5, 7, 12 ⁇ .
- the restriction on the top CTU row is unchanged.
- the size of the intra-prediction-mode candidate list is 10.
- the construction of the intra-prediction-mode candidate list is similar to MPM except the PLANAR mode is excluded from the intra-prediction-mode candidate list, DC mode is added after 5 neighboring PUs’ modes and DIMD modes if its not included and the angular modes with delta angles from ⁇ 1 to ⁇ 4 (compared the existing angular modes in the intra-prediction-mode candidate list) are added.
- the precision of angular prediction is extended from 65 to 129. Additionally non-adjacent positions are added as candidates in constructing the intra candidate list. If the neighbouring or non-adjacent blocks are coded with SGPM or GPM modes, the intra modes of the blocks are replaced by the partitioning angles.
- Fig. 11 illustrates an illustration of the template area.
- an index to the TMRL candidate list is coded to indicate which combination of reference line and prediction mode is used for coding the current block.
- convolutional cross-component model (CCCM) is applied to predict chroma samples from reconstructed luma samples in a similar spirit as done by the current CCLM modes.
- CCLM convolutional cross-component model
- the reconstructed luma samples are down-sampled to match the lower resolution chroma grid when chroma sub-sampling is used.
- left or top and left reference samples are used as templates for model derivation.
- Multi-model CCCM mode can be selected for PUs which have at least 128 reference samples available.
- the convolutional 7-tap filter consist of a 5-tap plus sign shape spatial component, a nonlinear term and a bias term.
- the input to the spatial 5-tap component of the filter consists of a center (C) luma sample which is collocated with the chroma sample to be predicted and its above/north (N) , below/south (S) , left/west (W) and right/east (E) neighbors as illustrated below.
- Fig. 12 illustrates spatial part of the convolutional filter.
- the bias term B represents a scalar offset between the input and output (similarly to the offset term in CCLM) and is set to middle chroma value (512 for 10-bit content) .
- the filter coefficients c i are calculated by minimising MSE between predicted and reconstructed chroma samples in the reference area.
- Fig. 13 illustrates the reference area which consists of 2 or 6 lines of chroma samples above and left of the PU. Whether to use 6 lines or 2 lines of neighbouring samples to derive the CCCM model parameters in the single model CCCM is determined by a template cost. Similarly, for the multi-model CCCM mode, the two candidates use 6 lines neighbouring luma samples or luma samples collocated to the current chroma block to derive mean values which separate samples into two groups. The cost is derived by applying the candidate CCP (either 2 or 6 lines) on a template, calculating the sum of absolute difference (SAD) between CCP predicted samples and reconstructed samples in the template.
- SAD sum of absolute difference
- Reference area extends one PU width to the right and one PU height below the PU boundaries. Area is adjusted to include only available samples. The extensions to the area shown in blue are needed to support the “side samples” of the plus shaped spatial filter and are padded when in unavailable areas.
- the MSE minimization is performed by calculating autocorrelation matrix for the luma input and a cross-correlation vector between the luma input and chroma output.
- Autocorrelation matrix is LDL decomposed and the final filter coefficients are calculated using back-substitution. The process follows roughly the calculation of the ALF filter coefficients in ECM, however LDL decomposition was chosen instead of Cholesky decomposition to avoid using square root operations.
- the autocorrelation matrix is calculated using the reconstructed values of luma and chroma samples. These samples are full range (e.g. between 0 and 1023 for 10-bit content) resulting in relatively large values in the autocorrelation matrix. This requires high bit depth operation during the model parameters calculation. It is proposed to remove fixed offsets from luma and chroma samples in each PU for each model. This is driving down the magnitudes of the values used in the model creation and allows reducing the precision needed for the fixed-point arithmetic. As a result, 16-bit decimal precision is proposed to be used instead of the 22-bit precision of the original CCCM implementation.
- the luma offset is removed during the luma reference sample interpolation. This can be done, for example, by substituting the rounding term used in the luma reference sample interpolation with an updated offset including both the rounding term and the offsetLuma.
- the chroma offset can be removed by deducting the chroma offset directly from the reference chroma samples. As an alternative way, impact of the chroma offset can be removed from the cross-component vector giving identical result. In order to add the chroma offset back to the output of the convolutional prediction operation the chroma offset is added to the bias term of the convolutional model.
- CCCM model parameter calculation requires division operations. Division operations are not always considered implementation friendly. The division operation are replaced with multiplication (with a scale factor) and shift operation, where scale factor and number of shifts are calculated based on denominator similar to the method used in calculation of CCLM parameters. 2.1.1.14.3. Gradient Linear Model
- a gradient linear model (GLM) method can be used to predict the chroma samples from luma sample gradients.
- Two modes are supported: a two-parameter GLM mode and a three-parameter GLM mode.
- the two-parameter GLM utilizes luma sample gradients to derive the linear model. Specifically, when the two-parameter GLM is applied, the input to the CCLM process, i.e., the down-sampled luma samples L, are replaced by luma sample gradients G. The other parts of the CCLM (e.g., parameter derivation, prediction sample linear transform) are kept unchanged.
- C ⁇ G+ ⁇
- a chroma sample can be predicted based on both the luma sample gradients and down-sampled luma values with different parameters.
- the model parameters of the three-parameter GLM are derived from 6 rows and columns adjacent samples by the LDL decomposition based MSE minimization method as used in the CCCM.
- C ⁇ 0 ⁇ G+ ⁇ 1 ⁇ L+ ⁇ 2 ⁇
- CCLM mode when the CCLM mode is enabled to the current CU, one flag is signaled to indicate whether GLM is enabled for both Cb and Cr components; if the GLM is enabled, another flag is signaled to indicate which of the two GLM modes is selected and one syntax element is further signaled to select one of 4 gradient filters for the gradient calculation.
- ⁇ Four gradient filters are enabled for the GLM.
- Fig. 14 illustrates four Sobel based gradient patterns for GLM. 2.1.1.14.4.
- CCCM Usage of the mode is signalled with a CABAC coded PU level flag.
- CABAC context was included to support this.
- CCCM is considered a sub-mode of CCLM. That is, the CCCM flag is only signalled if intra prediction mode is LM_CHROMA. 2.1.1.14.5.
- CCCM mode with 3x2 filter using non-downsampled luma samples which consists of 6-tap spatial terms, four nonlinear terms and a bias term.
- the 6-tap spatial terms correspond to 6 neighboring luma samples (i.e., L 0 , L 1 , ..., L 5 ) around the chroma sample (i.e., C) to be predicted, the four non-linear terms are derived from the samples L 0 , L 1 , L 2 , and L 3 .
- Fig. 15 illustrates non-downsampled luma samples. where ⁇ i is the coefficient, ⁇ is the offset.
- the BVG-CCCM mode can be used.
- the block vectors of the co-located luma blocks, coded in IBC or intraTMP modes, are used to determine the reference area for calculating the CCCM parameters.
- the prediction is performed using uses the calculated model parameters and co-located luma samples.
- Fig. 16 illustrates the reference area in BVG-CCCM method.
- the input to the spatial 5-tap component of the filter consists of a center (C) luma sample which is collocated with the chroma sample to be predicted and its above/north (N) , below/south (S) , left/west (W) and right/east (E) neighbors as illustrated in Fig. 12.
- the nonlinear term P is represented as power of two of the corresponding luma sample and B is the bias term.
- GL-CCCM Gradient and Location based convolutional cross-component model
- This method maps luma values into chroma values using a filter with inputs consisting of one spatial luma sample, two gradient values, two location information, a nonlinear term, and a bias term.
- the GL-CCCM method uses gradient and location information instead of the 4 spatial neighbor samples used in the CCCM filter.
- the Y and X are the spatial coordinates of the center luma sample.
- the rest of the parameters are the same as CCCM tool.
- the reference area for the parameter calculation is the same as CCCM method.
- GL-CCCM is considered a sub-mode of CCCM. That is, the GL-CCCM flag is only signalled if original CCCM flag is true.
- GL-CCCM tool has 6 modes for calculating the parameters: ⁇ Single-model GL-CCCM from above and left templates, ⁇ Single-model GL-CCCM from above template, ⁇ Single-model GL-CCCM from left template, ⁇ Multi-model GL-CCCM from above and left templates, ⁇ Multi-model GL-CCCM from above template, ⁇ Multi-model GL-CCCM from left template.
- the encoder performs SATD search for the 6 GL-CCCM modes along with the existing CCCM modes to find the best candidates for full RD tests. 2.1.1.14.8. CCCM with Multiple Downsampling Filters
- C denotes the current chroma sample position
- N S, W, E, NE, SW are the positions around C
- c i filter coefficients
- P and B are nonlinear term and bias term
- X and Y are the horizontal and vertical locations of the center luma sample with respect to the top-left coordinates of the block.
- Prediction samples of MM-CCLM/MM-CCCM can be filtered with neighbouring samples. As shown in Fig. 19, a 3 ⁇ 3 low-pass filter is applied to filter prediction samples generated by MM-CCLM/MM-CCCM. For a sample at a top/left boundary, the filtering window may involve neighbouring reconstructed samples. For inner samples, the filtering window only involves prediction samples, which may be padded. A flag is signaled to indicate whether filtering is applied or not for a block coded with MM-CCLM/MM-CCCM. 2.1.1.16.
- Cross-Component Prediction (CCP) merge (a. k. a., non-local CCP) mode
- a flag is signalled to indicate whether CCP mode (including the CCLM, CCCM, GLM and their variants) or non-CCP mode (conventional chroma intra prediction mode, fusion of chroma intra prediction mode) is used. If the CCP mode is selected, one more flag is signalled to indicate how to derive the CCP type and parameters, i.e., either from a CCP merge list or signalled/derived on-the-fly.
- a CCP merge candidate list is constructed from the spatial adjacent, temporal, spatial non-adjacent, history-based m or shifted temporal candidates. After including these candidates, default models are further included to fill the remaining empty positions in the merge list.
- Temporal candidates are selected from the collocated picture.
- the position and inclusion order of the temporal candidates are the same as those defined in ECM for regular inter merge prediction candidates.
- the shifted temporal candidates are also selected from the collocated picture.
- the position of temporal candidates is shifted by a selected motion vector which is derived from motion vectors of neighboring blocks. History-based candidates
- a history-based table is maintained to include the recently used CCP models, and the table is reset at the beginning of each CTU row. If the current list is not full after including spatial adjacent and non-adjacent candidates, the CCP models in the history-based table are added into the list. Default candidates
- CCLM candidates with default scaling parameters are considered, only when the list is not full after including the spatial adjacent, spatial non-adjacent, or history-based candidates. If the current list has no candidates with the single model CCLM mode, the default scaling parameters are ⁇ 0, 1/8, -1/8, 2/8, -2/8, 3/8, -3/8, 4/8, -4/8, 5/8, -5/8, 6/8 ⁇ . Otherwise, the default scaling parameters are ⁇ 0, the scaling parameter of the first CCLM candidate + ⁇ 1/8, -1/8, 2/8, -2/8, 3/8, -3/8, 4/8, -4/8, 5/8, -5/8, 6/8 ⁇ .
- the LB-CCP flag is inherited from a CCP candidate in the CCP merge candidate list.
- a flag is signaled to indicate whether the CCP merge mode is applied or not. If CCP merge mode is applied, an index is signaled to indicate which candidate model is used by the current block. In addition, CCP merge mode is not allowed for the current chroma coding block when the current CU is coded by intra sub-partitions (ISP) with single tree, or the current chroma coding block size is less than or equal to 16.
- ISP intra sub-partitions
- one CCP-merge fusion flag is further signalled to indicate whether a fusion mode is applied. In the fusion mode, the final prediction is generated by a weighted sum of the CCP-merge prediction and either the MM-CCCM prediction or the DIMD prediction.
- a CCP-merge fusion type flag is further signalled if the CCP-merge fusion flag is true, to indicate whether the MM-CCCM prediction or the DIMD prediction is selected and fused with the CCP-merge prediction.
- a candidate list of cross-component prediction (CCP) modes is constructed, and to select the best candidate from the list a template cost is calculated to compare the reconstructed samples and the prediction values generated by the evaluated CCP mode.
- the template is shown in Fig. 20.
- the CCP mode list is constructed from the already existed in ECM modes by single model CCLM, single model CCCM, multi-model CCCM, single model GLCCCM, single model CCCM applied with LBCCP, and multi-model CCCM applied with LBCCP.
- a fusion candidate is the combination of two CCP modes selected from the existing CCP mode lists reordered by template costs. Mode flag and a fusion flag are signalled to indicate the mode usage. 2.1.1.18. Spatial Geometric partitioning mode (SGPM)
- SGPM is an intra mode that resembles the inter coding tool of GPM, where the two prediction parts are generated from intra predicted process.
- a candidate list is built with each entry containing one partition split and two intra prediction modes as shown in Fig. 21.26 partition modes and 9 of intra prediction modes are used to form the combinations.
- the length of the candidate list is set equal to 16.
- the selected candidate index is signalled.
- Fig. 22 illustrates an GPM template.
- an IPM list is derived for each part using the same intra-inter GPM list derivation.
- the IPM list size is set to 3.
- TIMD derived mode is replaced by 2 derived modes with horizontal and vertical orientations.
- the list is further augmented with block-vector based prediction candidates obtained from the adjacent and non-adjacent merge candidates coded in IntraTMP or IBC mode.
- the template cost is employed to select the up to 6 block vectors.
- the final list contains up to 9 predictors: 3 regular intra modes and up to 6 block vectors based predictors.
- a PPS flag is coded to indicate whether no blending of two intra predictions is allowed.
- the transform kernel selection for planar horizontal and planar vertical mode is shown in Fig. 24. If an intra prediction mode of a current block is the planar vertical mode, the horizontal intra prediction mode is used to derive a transform kernel in MTS set and LFNST set. Also, if an intra prediction mode of a current block is the planar horizontal mode, the vertical intra prediction mode is used to derive a transform kernel in MTS set and LFNST set. 2.1.1.20. Direct block vector (DBV) for chroma block
- the direct block vector is used for chroma blocks.
- a flag is signaled to indicate whether a chroma block is coded using IBC mode. If one of the luma blocks in five locations shown in Fig. 25 is coded with IBC or intraTMP mode, its block vector is scaled and is used as block vector for the chroma block. Template matching is used to perform block vector scaling. 2.1.1.21. Extrapolation filter-based intra prediction (EIP) mode
- the samples in a CU are predicted from the top-left position to the bottom-right position by applying an extrapolation filter to neighboring reconstructed samples or predicted samples.
- the EIP mode uses a 15-tap filter for prediction as below: where pred (x, y) is the predicted value at position (x, y) in the CU, c i is the filter coefficient, and the is the reconstructed samples or predicted samples.
- the EIP filter can be derived from the neighboring reconstructed samples or be inherited from the previous EIP coded blocks.
- Fig. 26 illustrates three EIP filter shapes
- Fig. 27 illustrates three types of reconstructed area for EIP filter.
- an EIP merge flag is signaled to indicate whether the EIP filter is inherited from previous blocks coded in EIP mode.
- an EIP merge list is constructed from the spatial adjacent, spatial non-adjacent, temporal and history candidates. The position and inclusion order of these candidates are the same as those used in CCP merge candidate list.
- An EIP merge index is further signaled to indicate which EIP merge candidate is selected. The filter shape and the filter coefficients of the selected candidate are then inherited to code the CU.
- the EIP filter is derived from the neighboring reconstructed samples and the relevant syntax element is signaled to indicate which one of the three types of reconstructed area and which one of the three filter shapes are used for the CU.
- the selected filter moves in the selected reconstructed area either horizontally or vertically with a one-pixel step to construct the auto-correlation matrix and the cross-correlation vector.
- the calculation of coefficients from the auto-correlation matrix and the cross-correlation vector is the same as that in CCCM.
- an intra prediction mode is derived by applying the DIMD process to the prediction samples. Specifically, a horizontal gradient and a vertical gradient are calculated for each predicted sample to build a histogram of gradient. Then the intra prediction mode corresponding to the largest histogram count is used to determine the LFNST, NSPT or MTS transform set. 2.1.1.22. Matrix based position dependent intra prediction (PDP) replacing conventional intra modes
- weights which are defined for a block shape and intra mode, is introduced, those weights are multiplied by the neighbour reference template to derive the prediction samples replacing conventional intra prediction.
- the weights are applied to the reference samples of the L shaped causal neighborhood template as shown in the Fig. 28.
- the reference samples in the causal neighborhood are denoted as r, and F (x, y) is the matrix of weights.
- this prediction is used for block size with both width and height up to 32 (except for 4x32, 32x4, 8x32 and 32x8) .
- the template size is 2 for blocks with both width and height up to 16 and it is only used for mode 0, 1, and (2+2*k) .
- template size is set to 1; is used for mode 0, 1, and (2+4*k) ; prediction is only performed for 16x16 positions, and the rest of the samples are generated by bilinear interpolation.
- block shape and mode-based symmetry is used for Reference length is set to W and H for modes greater than 18 and less than 50 and set to 2*W and 2*H otherwise.
- LIC is an inter prediction technique to model local illumination variation between current block and its prediction block as a function of that between current block template and reference block template.
- the parameters of the function can be denoted by a scale ⁇ and an offset ⁇ , which forms a linear equation, that is, ⁇ *p [x] + ⁇ to compensate illumination changes, where p [x] is a reference sample pointed to by MV at a location x on reference picture.
- the MV shall be clipped with wrap around offset taken into consideration. Since ⁇ and ⁇ can be derived based on current block template and reference block template, no signaling overhead is required for them, except that an LIC flag is signaled for AMVP mode to indicate the use of LIC.
- the LIC flag is not inherited from a merge candidate, instead, it is derived on-the-fly. More specifically, of a merge candidate is derived by comparing two template costs: a SAD-based template cost, denoted as C0, and a Mean Removal SAD (MRSAD) -based template cost, denoted as C1.
- C0 SAD-based template cost
- MRSAD Mean Removal SAD
- C0 is multiplied by ⁇ if the inherited LIC flag is false while C1 is multiplied by ⁇ if the inherited LIC flag is true, where ⁇ ⁇ 1.
- the local illumination compensation is used for inter CUs with the following modifications.
- ⁇ Intra neighbor samples can be used in LIC parameter derivation.
- ⁇ LIC is disabled for blocks with less than 32 luma samples.
- LIC parameter derivation is performed based on the template block samples corresponding to the current CU, instead of partial template block samples corresponding to first top-left 16x16 unit.
- Samples of the reference block template are generated by using MC with the block MV without rounding it to integer-pel precision.
- the LIC parameters could be adjusted instead of directly using the derived values. Similar to the slope adjustment of CCLM, an adjustment parameter for the uni-predicted LIC coded block is used to modify parameters of LIC.
- the adjustment parameter is signalled for AMVP mode.
- L0 LIC parameters are separately derived for L0 and L1 prediction samples.
- An iterative manner to derive the L0 and L1 LIC parameters is applied. Specifically, L0 LIC parameters are firstly derived by minimizing difference between L0 template prediction T 0 and the template T and the samples in T are updated by subtracting the corresponding samples in T 0 . Then, the L1 parameters are calculated that minimizes the difference between L1 template prediction T 1 and the updated template. Finally, the L0 parameter is refined again in the same way.
- the LIC flag value could be either signalled for regular merge mode, affine merge mode and TM merge mode or inherited from a merge candidate.
- the signalled flag indicates if the original inherited LIC flag or the reverse LIC flag value is used for a merge candidate.
- LIC is enabled with PU level BDMVR and BDOF.
- Non-local illumination compensation is applied in ECM wherein the linear model is derived from the previously coded inter CUs by minimizing the difference between their reconstruction and prediction samples.
- NLIC Non-local illumination compensation
- the non-adjacent spatial merge candidates are inserted after the temporal motion vector prediction (TMVP) in the regular merge candidate list.
- the pattern of spatial merge candidates is shown in Fig. 29.
- the distances between non-adjacent spatial candidates and current coding block are based on the width and height of current coding block.
- the line buffer restriction is not applied.
- the Temporal Motion Vector Prediction (TMVP) for the AMVP and merge mode is derived by fetching the motion information from the center or the bottom-right of the collocated block in a signaled collocated picture.
- TMVP Temporal Motion Vector Prediction
- SBTMVP Subblock-based Temporal Motion Vector Prediction
- two collocated pictures are utilized which are the two reference frames with the least POC distance relative to the to-be-coded frame.
- the motion shift to locate TMVP is adaptively determined from multiple locations according to template costs. More specifically, two motion shift candidate lists are constructed respectively for the two collocated frames. The motion shifts with the minimum template matching cost are used to derive SbTMVP or TMVP candidates. At most 4 SbTMVP candidates are included in the sub-block-based merge list. The SbTMVP candidate with the least template matching cost derived from the first collocated frame is placed in the first entry without reordering, while other SbTMVP candidates are sorted together with affine candidates.
- each subblock template is determined based on the center subblock. As illustrated in Fig. 30, if the center subblock is uni-predicted, then all the subblock templates are uni-predicted, and vice versa. If the motion vector of corresponding adjacent subblock at the determined reference list is not available for a subblock template, zero MV is used for that subblock template. 2.1.2.4. AMVP with SbTMVP mode
- SbTMVP mode is extended to AMVP.
- the CU is predicted in a similar way as that of SbTMVP in merge mode except that the motion shift is signaled in the bitstream instead of being derived from neighboring blocks
- the motion shift is obtained using MVP with a signaled MVD.
- the number of MVDs is determined according to the percentage of the area of the blocks coded in the the AMVP with SbTMVP mode in the previous coded picture with the same temporal layer as follows: - If the current picture is the first coded picture in a temporal layer, the number of MVD is set to 8.
- the number of MVD is set to 4. - Otherwise, if the percentage of the area of the proposed mode is smaller than 7%, the number of MVD is set to 8. - Otherwise, the number of MVD is set to 12.
- Fig. 31A to Fig. 31C illustrate possible MVs of the proposed mode.
- the CU is split into 4x4 subblocks, and each subblock derives its own motion from a corresponding subblock in the collocated picture.
- One collocated picture is used for non-low delay pictures, whereas two collocated pictures are used for low delay pictures.
- the reference pictures are fixed to the one with the reference picture index equal to 0.
- AMVP with SbTMVP mode When the AMVP with SbTMVP mode is applied to the CU, LIC and MHP are always disabled, and OBMC is always enabled for the CU. Besides, the AMVR is enabled for picture resolution larger than or equal to 3840x2160 luma samples. When the AMVR is enabled for a AMVP with SbTMVP coded block, the MVD magnitudes are increased from ⁇ 4, 8, 12 ⁇ -pel to ⁇ 16, 24, 32 ⁇ -pel. 2.1.2.5. Template matching (TM)
- Template matching is a decoder-side MV derivation method to refine the motion information of the current CU by finding the closest match between a template (i.e., top and/or left neighbouring blocks of the current CU) in the current picture and a block (i.e., same size to the template) in a reference picture. As illustrated in Fig. 32, a better MV is searched around the initial motion of the current CU within a [–8, +8] -pel search range.
- the template matching method is used with the following modifications: search step size is determined based on AMVR mode and TM can be cascaded with bilateral matching process in merge modes.
- an MVP candidate is determined based on template matching error to select the one which reaches the minimum difference between the current block template and the reference block template, and then TM is performed only for this particular MVP candidate for MV refinement.
- TM refines this MVP candidate, starting from full-pel MVD precision (or 4-pel for 4-pel AMVR mode) within a [–8, +8] -pel search range by using iterative 16-point diamond search.
- the AMVP candidate may be further refined by using cross search with full-pel MVD precision (or 4-pel for 4-pel AMVR mode) , followed sequentially by half-pel and quarter-pel ones depending on AMVR mode. This search process ensures that the MVP candidate still keeps the same MV precision as indicated by the AMVR mode after TM process. In the search process, if the difference between the previous minimum cost and the current minimum cost in the iteration is less than a threshold that is equal to the area of the block, the search process terminates. Table 2. Search patterns of AMVR and merge mode with AMVR.
- TM may perform all the way down to 1/8-pel MVD precision or skipping those beyond half-pel MVD precision, depending on whether the alternative interpolation filter (that is used when AMVR is of half-pel mode) is used according to merged motion information.
- template matching may work as an independent process or an extra MV refinement process between block-based and subblock-based bilateral matching (BM) methods, depending on whether BM can be enabled or not according to its enabling condition check.
- TM When TM is applied to bi-predictive blocks, an iterative process is used. Specifically, the initial motion vectors of L0 and L1 are firstly refined and TM costs Cost 0 and Cost 1 are calculated for L0 and L1, respectively. When Cost 0 is larger than Cost 1 , the refined motion vector of L1 (MV’1) is used to derive a further refined motion vector of L0 (MV’0) . Then, the MV’1 is further refined using MV’0. Similarly, when Cost 0 is not larger than Cost 1 , the refined motion vector of L0 (MV’0) is used to derive a further refined motion vector of L1 (MV’1) , and the MV’0 is further refined using MV’1. Besides, TM for bi-prediction is enabled when DMVR condition is satisfied. 2.1.2.5.1. TM-based subblock motion refinement
- CPMVs control point motion vectors
- TM cost the TM cost of the affine candidate.
- the initial motion shift can be refined with TM, and then the refined motion shift will be utilized to derive subblock temporal motion information.
- a multi-pass decoder-side motion vector refinement is applied.
- bilateral matching (BM) is applied to the coding block.
- BM is applied to each 16x16 subblock within the coding block.
- MV in each 8x8 subblock is refined by applying bi-directional optical flow (BDOF) .
- BDOF bi-directional optical flow
- a refined MV is derived by applying BM to a coding block. Similar to decoder-side motion vector refinement (DMVR) , in bi-prediction operation, a refined MV is searched around the two initial MVs (MV0 and MV1) in the reference picture lists L0 and L1. The refined MVs (MV0_pass1 and MV1_pass1) are derived around the initiate MVs based on the minimum bilateral matching cost between the two reference blocks in L0 and L1.
- DMVR decoder-side motion vector refinement
- BM performs local search to derive integer sample precision intDeltaMV.
- the local search applies a 3 ⁇ 3 square search pattern to loop through the search range [–sHor, sHor] in horizontal direction and [–sVer, sVer] in vertical direction, wherein, the values of sHor and sVer are determined by the block dimension, and the maximum value of sHor and sVer is 8.
- MRSAD mean-removal SAD
- the existing fractional sample refinement is further applied to derive the final deltaMV.
- a refined MV is derived by applying BM to a 16 ⁇ 16 grid subblock. For each subblock, a refined MV is searched around the two MVs (MV0_pass1 and MV1_pass1) , obtained on the first pass, in the reference picture list L0 and L1.
- the refined MVs (MV0_pass2 (sbIdx2) and MV1_pass2 (sbIdx2) ) are derived based on the minimum bilateral matching cost between the two reference subblocks in L0 and L1.
- BM For each subblock, BM performs full search to derive integer sample precision intDeltaMV.
- the full search has a search range [–sHor, sHor] in horizontal direction and [–sVer, sVer] in vertical direction, wherein, the values of sHor and sVer are determined by the block dimension, and the maximum value of sHor and sVer is 8.
- the search area (2*sHor + 1) * (2*sVer +1) is divided up to 5 diamond shape search regions. Each search region is assigned a costFactor, which is determined by the distance (intDeltaMV) between each search point and the starting MV, and each diamond region is processed in the order starting from the center of the search area. In each region, the search points are processed in the raster scan order starting from the top left going to the bottom right corner of the region.
- Fig. 33 illustrates diamond regions in the search area.
- the existing VVC DMVR fractional sample refinement is further applied to derive the final deltaMV (sbIdx2) .
- a refined MV is derived by applying BDOF to an 8 ⁇ 8 grid subblock. For each 8 ⁇ 8 subblock, BDOF refinement is applied to derive scaled Vx and Vy without clipping starting from the refined MV of the parent subblock of the second pass.
- the derived bioMv (Vx, Vy) is rounded to 1/16 sample precision and clipped between -32 and 32.
- MV0_pass3 MV0_pass2 (sbIdx2) + bioMv
- MV1_pass3 MV0_pass2 (sbIdx2) –bioMv. 2.1.2.6.4.
- a refined MV is derived by applying BDOF to a 4 ⁇ 4 or 8 ⁇ 8 or 16x16 grid subblock.
- the 4 ⁇ 4 grid subblock is used. Otherwise, 8 ⁇ 8 grid subblock is used.
- the MV of each subblock is refined in the same way as that used in third pass.
- Adaptive decoder side motion vector refinement method is an extension of multi-pass DMVR which consists of the two new merge modes to refine MV only in one direction, either L0 or L1, of the bi-prediction for the merge candidates that meet the DMVR conditions.
- the multi-pass DMVR process is applied for the selected merge candidate to refine the motion vectors, however either MVD0 or MVD1 is set to zero in the 1 st pass (i.e., PU level) DMVR.
- the merge candidates for the new merge mode are derived from spatial neighboring coded blocks, TMVPs, non-adjacent blocks, HMVPs, pair-wise candidate, similar as in the regular merge mode. The difference is that only those meet DMVR conditions are added into the candidate list. The same merge candidate list is used by the two new merge modes. If the list of BM candidates contains the inherited BCW weights and DMVR process is unchanged except the computation of the distortion is made using MRSAD or MRSATD if the weights are non-equal and the bi-prediction is weighted with BCW weights. Merge index is coded as in regular merge mode. 2.1.2.8. OBMC
- top and left boundary pixels of a CU are refined using neighboring block’s motion information with a weighted prediction.
- Conditions of not applying OBMC are as follows: ⁇ When OBMC is disabled at SPS level. ⁇ When current block has intra mode or IBC mode. ⁇ When current luma block area is smaller or equal to 32.
- OBMC is adaptively controlled on a block level as follows: ⁇ OBMC flag is inherited from a neighboring affine block for affine merge mode. ⁇ OBMC is not applied to a block if there is a neighbor block coded with IBC, palette, or BDPCM modes. ⁇ When applying OBMC to a block, block boundary check whether OBMC is applied to the boundary is further made based on the reference samples of the current block. If any absolute difference between the prediction sample and non-interpolated (integer pel) reference sample is greater than a threshold, the OBMC is not applied to that boundary.
- a subblock-boundary OBMC is performed by applying the same blending to the top, left, bottom, and right subblock boundary pixels using neighboring subblocks’ motion information. It is enabled for the subblock based coding tools: ⁇ Affine AMVP modes; ⁇ Affine merge modes and subblock-based temporal motion vector prediction (SbTMVP) ; ⁇ Subblock-based bilateral matching.
- Inter predY represents the samples predicted by the motion of current block in the original domain
- Intra predY represents the samples predicted in the mapped domain
- OBMC predY represents the samples predicted by the motion of neighboring blocks in the original domain
- w 0 and w 1 are the weights.
- the LIC parameters are applied to generate the corresponding prediction samples for the OBMC of the LIC coded block.
- the OBMC is only applied to the top and left CU boundaries while being always disabled for the boundaries of the internal sub-blocks of the LIC coded block.
- the prediction value of CU boundary samples derivation approach is decided according to the template matching costs, including using current block’s motion information only, or using neighboring block’s motion information as well with one of the blending modes.
- the above template size equals to 4 ⁇ 1. If N adjacent blocks have the same motion information, then the above template size is enlarged to 4N ⁇ 1 since the MC operation can be processed at one time. For each left block with a size of 4 ⁇ 4 at the left CU boundary, the left template size equals to 1 ⁇ 4 or 1 ⁇ 4N.
- Fig. 34 illustrates a template.
- the prediction value of boundary samples is derived following the below steps.
- Cost1 is calculated according to A’s motion information.
- Cost2 is calculated according to AboveNeighbor_A’s motion information.
- Cost3 is calculated according to weighted prediction of A’s and AboveNeighbor_A’s motion information with weighting factors as 3/4 and 1/4 respectively.
- the original MC result using current block’s motion information is denoted as Pixel1, and the MC result using neighboring block’s motion information is denoted as Pixel2.
- NewPixel (i, 0) (15 ⁇ Pixel1 (i, 0) +Pixel2 (i, 0) +8) >>4
- NewPixel (i, 1) (31 ⁇ Pixel1 (i, 1) +Pixel2 (i, 1) +16) >>5
- NewPixel (i, 0) (15 ⁇ Pixel1 (i, 0) +Pixel2 (i, 0) +8) >>4 - Otherwise, blending mode 3 is used.
- NewPixel (i, 0) (7 ⁇ Pixel1 (i, 0) +Pixel2 (i, 0) +4) >>3 2.1.2.10. History-parameter-based affine model inheritance and non-adjacent affine mode
- HAMI History-parameter-based affine model inheritance
- NA-AFF non-adjacent affine mode
- a first history-parameter table (HPT) is established.
- An entry of the first HPT stores a set of affine parameters: a, b, c and d, each of which is represented by a 16-bit signed integer.
- Entries in HPT is categorized by reference list and reference index. Five reference indices are supported for each reference list in HPT.
- Fig. 35A and Fig. 35B illustrate the first HPT and the second HPT, respectively.
- a history-affine-parameter-based candidate is derived from one of the seven neighbouring 4 ⁇ 4 blocks denoted as A0, A1, A2, B0, B1, B2 or B3 in Fig. 35A and a set of affine parameters stored in a corresponding entry in the first HPT.
- the MV of a neighbouring 4 ⁇ 4 block served as the base MV.
- the MV of the current block at position (x, y) is calculated as: where (mv h base , mv v base ) represents the MV of the neighbouring 4 ⁇ 4 block, (x base , y base ) represents the center position of the neighbouring 4 ⁇ 4 block.
- (x, y) can be the top-left, top-right and bottom-left corner of the current block to obtain the corner-position MVs (CPMVs) for the current block, or it can be the center of the current block to obtain a regular MV for the current block.
- CPMVs corner-position MVs
- a second history-parameter table (HPT) with base MV information is also appended.
- An additional merge HAPC can be generated from the second HPT with the base MV information the corresponding affine models stored in an entry.
- pair-wised affine merge candidates are generated by two affine merge candidates which are history-derived or not history-derived.
- a pair-wised affine merge candidates is generated by averaging the CPMVs of existing affine merge candidates in the list.
- sub-block-based merge candidate list is increased from five to fifteen, which are all involved in the ARMC process.
- NA-AFF the pattern of obtaining non-adjacent spatial neighbors is shown in Fig. 36A and Fig. 36B. Same as the existing non-adjacent regular merge candidates, the distances between non-adjacent spatial neighbors and current coding block in the NA-AFF are also defined based on the width and height of current CU.
- the motion information of the non-adjacent spatial neighbors in Fig. 36A and Fig. 36B is utilized to generate additional inherited and constructed affine merge/AMVP candidates.
- inherited candidates the same derivation process of the inherited affine merge/AMVP candidates in the VVC is kept unchanged except that the CPMVs are inherited from non-adjacent spatial neighbors.
- the non-adjacent spatial neighbors are checked based on their distances to the current block, i.e., from near to far. At a specific distance, only the first available neighbor (that is coded with the affine mode) from each side (e.g., the left and above) of the current block is included for inherited candidate derivation.
- the checking orders of the neighbors on the left and above sides are bottom-to-up and right-to-left, respectively.
- the positions of one left and above non-adjacent spatial neighbors are firstly determined independently; After that, the location of the top-left neighbor can be determined accordingly which can enclose a rectangular virtual block together with the left and above non-adjacent neighbors. Then, the motion information of the three non-adjacent neighbors is used to form the CPMVs at the top-left (A) , top-right (B) and bottom-left (C) of the virtual block, which is finally projected to the current CU to generate the corresponding constructed candidates.
- Affine merge mode 1. SbTMVP candidate, if available 2. Inherited from adjacent neighbors 3. Inherited from non-adjacent neighbors 4. Constructed from adjacent neighbors 5. The first type of constructed affine candidates from non-adjacent neighbors 6.
- Zero MVs Affine AMVP mode 1. Inherited from adjacent neighbors 2. Constructed from adjacent neighbors 3. Translational MVs from adjacent neighbors 4. Translational MVs from temporal neighbors 5. Inherited from non-adjacent neighbors 6. The first type of constructed affine candidates from non-adjacent neighbors 7. Zero MVs
- Fig. 36A and Fig. 36B illustrates spatial neighbors for deriving affine merge/AMVP candidates
- Fig. 37 illustrates from non-adjacent neighbors to the first type of constructed affine merge/AMVP candidates.
- NA-AFF 1.
- the area from where the non-adjacent neighbors come is restricted to be within the current CTU (i.e., no additional storage requirements for line buffer) .
- the storage granularity for affine motion information, including CPMVs and reference indexes, is reduced from 8x8 to 16x16 (i.e., only the affine motion from the top-left 8x8 block is saved) . Additionally, the saved CPMVs are projected to each 16x16 block before storage, such that the position and size information are not needed. 3.
- Only the top-left and top-right CPMVs are stored i.e., always using 4-parameter affine model for NA- AFF) .
- 2.1.2.11 Sample-based BDOF
- the coding block is divided into 8 ⁇ 8 subblocks. For each subblock, whether to apply BDOF or not is determined by checking the SAD between the two reference subblocks against a threshold. If decided to apply BDOF to a subblock, for every sample in the subblock, a sliding 5 ⁇ 5 window is used and the existing BDOF process is applied for every sliding window to derive Vx and Vy. The derived motion refinement (Vx, Vy) is applied to adjust the bi-predicted sample value for the center sample of the window. 2.1.2.12. Interpolation
- the 8-tap interpolation filter used in VVC is replaced with a 12-tap filter.
- the interpolation filter is derived from the sinc function of which the frequency response is cut off at Nyquist frequency and cropped by a cosine window function.
- Fig. 38 illustrates frequency responses of the interpolation filter and the VVC interpolation filter at half-pel phase. Table 3. Filter coefficients of the 12-tap interpolation filter
- one or more additional motion-compensated prediction signals are signaled, in addition to the conventional bi-prediction signal.
- the resulting overall prediction signal is obtained by sample-wise weighted superposition.
- the weighting factor ⁇ is specified by the new syntax element add_hyp_weight_idx, according to the following mapping:
- more than one additional prediction signal can be used.
- the resulting overall prediction signal is accumulated iteratively with each additional prediction signal.
- the resulting overall prediction signal is obtained as the last p n (i.e., the p n having the largest index n) .
- n is limited to 2 .
- the motion parameters of each additional prediction hypothesis can be signaled either explicitly by specifying the reference index, the motion vector predictor index, and the motion vector difference, or implicitly by specifying a merge index.
- a separate multi-hypothesis merge flag distinguishes between these two signalling modes.
- MHP is only applied if non-equal weight in BCW is selected in bi-prediction mode.
- the minimum affine subblock size is changed from 4x4 to 1x1 for both luma and chroma components, 1x1 subblock size allows pixel based affine MC.
- affine subblock width or height is smaller than 4, PROF is disabled. 2.1.2.15.
- BDOF subblock MV refinement and sample adjustment is applied to an affine or SbTMVP coded block with subblock MC when BDOF condition is satisfied.
- An affine coded block e.g. affine regular merge mode, affine BM merge mode, affine AMVP mode, derives MVs for each 4 ⁇ 4 subblock from the affine model.
- the BDOF process starts with the 4 ⁇ 4 subblocks grouping with identical MVs.
- the first iteration of BDOF MV refinement is processed in 8x8 subblock grid as in ECM-10.0.
- the second iteration of BDOF MV refinement is processed in 4 ⁇ 4 subblock grid, and otherwise in 8 ⁇ 8 subblock grid.
- the grouped subblock size is 4xN or Nx4, the first iteration of BDOF MV refinement is bypassed. 2.1.2.16.
- the merge candidates are adaptively reordered with template matching (TM) .
- TM template matching
- the reordering method is applied to regular merge mode, TM merge mode, and affine merge mode (excluding the SbTMVP candidate) .
- TM merge mode merge candidates are reordered before the refinement process.
- An initial merge candidate list is firstly constructed according to given checking order, such as spatial, TMVPs, non-adjacent, HMVPs, pairwise, virtual merge candidates. Then the candidates in the initial list are divided into several subgroups.
- TM template matching
- each merge candidate in the initial list is firstly refined by using TM/multi-pass DMVR.
- Merge candidates in each subgroup are reordered to generate a reordered merge candidate list and the reordering is according to cost values based on template matching.
- the index of selected merge candidate in the reordered merge candidate list is signalled to the decoder. For simplification, merge candidates in the last but not the first subgroup are not reordered. All the zero candidates from the ARMC reordering process are excluded during the construction of Merge motion vector candidates list.
- the subgroup size is set to 5 for regular merge mode and TM merge mode.
- the subgroup size is set to 3 for affine merge mode. ⁇ Cost calculation
- the template matching cost of a merge candidate during the reordering process is measured by the SAD between samples of a template of the current block and their corresponding reference samples.
- the template comprises a set of reconstructed samples neighboring to the current block. Reference samples of the template are located by the motion information of the merge candidate.
- the reference samples of the template of the merge candidate are also generated by bi-prediction.
- TM When multi-pass DMVR is used to derive the refined motion to the initial merge candidate list only the first pass (i.e., PU level) of multi-pass DMVR is applied in reordering.
- the template size is set equal to 1. Only the above or left template is used during the motion refinement of TM when the block is flat with block width greater than 2 times of height or narrow with height greater than 2 times of width. TM is extended to perform 1/16-pel MVD precision. The first four merge candidates are reordered with the refined motion in TM merge mode.
- Fig. 39 illustrates template and reference samples of the template in reference pictures.
- the above template comprises several sub-templates with the size of Wsub ⁇ 1
- the left template comprises several sub-templates with the size of 1 ⁇ Hsub.
- the motion information of the subblocks in the first row and the first column of current block is used to derive the reference samples of each sub-template.
- a candidate is considered as redundant if the cost difference between a candidate and its predecessor is inferior to a lambda value e.g.
- the proposed algorithm is defined as the following: - Determine the minimum cost difference between a candidate and its predecessor among all candidates in the list ⁇ If the minimum cost difference is superior or equal to ⁇ , the list is considered diverse enough and the reordering stops. ⁇ If this minimum cost difference is inferior to ⁇ , the candidate is considered as redundant, and it is moved at a further position in the list. This further position is the first position where the candidate is diverse enough compared to its predecessor. - The algorithm stops after a finite number of iterations (if the minimum cost difference is not inferior to ⁇ ) .
- This algorithm is applied to the Regular, TM, BM and Affine merge modes.
- a similar algorithm is applied to the Merge MMVD and sign MVD prediction methods which also use ARMC for the reordering.
- the value of ⁇ is set equal to the ⁇ of the rate distortion criterion used to select the best merge candidate at the encoder side for low delay configuration and to the value ⁇ corresponding to a another QP for Random Access configuration.
- a set of ⁇ values corresponding to each signaled QP offset is provided in the SPS or in the Slice Header for the QP offsets which are not present in the SPS.
- the ARMC design is also applicable to the AMVP mode wherein the AMVP candidates are reordered according to the TM cost.
- AMVP advanced motion vector prediction
- an initial AMVP candidate list is constructed, followed by a refinement from TM to construct a refined AMVP candidate list.
- an MVP candidate with a TM cost larger than a threshold is skipped.
- MV candidate when wrap around motion compensation is enabled, the MV candidate shall be clipped with wrap around offset taken into consideration.
- Fig. 40 illustrates template and reference samples of the template for block with sub-block motion using the motion information of the subblocks of the current block. 2.1.2.17. MV candidate type based ARMC
- Merge candidates of one single candidate type e.g., TMVP or non-adjacent MVP (NA-MVP)
- the reordered candidates are then added into the merge candidate list.
- the TMVP candidate type adds more TMVP candidates with more temporal positions and different inter prediction directions to perform the reordering and the selection.
- NA-MVP candidate type is further extended with more spatially non-adjacent positions.
- the target reference picture of the TMVP candidate can be selected from any one of reference picture in the list according to scaling factor.
- the selected reference picture is the one whose scaling factor is the closest to 1. 2.1.2.18.
- the MMVD offsets are extended for MMVD and affine MMVD modes. Additional refinement positions along k ⁇ /8 diagonal angles are added, thus increasing the number of directions from 4 to 16. Second, based on the SAD cost between the template (one row above and one column left to the current block) and its reference for each refinement position, all the possible MMVD refinement positions (16 ⁇ 6) for each base candidate are reordered. Finally, the top 1/8 refinement positions with the smallest template SAD costs are kept as available positions, consequently for MMVD index coding. The MMVD index is binarized by the rice code with the parameter equal to 2. The affine MMVD reordering is extended, in which additional refinement positions along k ⁇ /4 diagonal angles are added. After reordering top 1/2 refinement positions with the smallest template SAD costs are kept.
- N is equal to 3 for MMVD, and [1, 3] depending on the neighboring block affine flags for affine MMVD.
- Two ways of adding MMVD offsets are allowed, including the ‘two-side’ and ‘one-side’ , depending on whether the offset of the other reference picture list is mirrored or directly set to zero. Which way is applied to one block is dependent on the TM cost.
- Fig. 41 illustrates additional directions along k ⁇ /8 diagonal angles. 2.1.2.19. Regression based affine candidate derivation
- the Regression based Motion Vector Field (RMVF) derivation method provides a new variety of subblock-based merge candidate.
- the motion vectors and center positions from the neighboring subblocks of the current CU, are used as the input to the linear regression process to derive a set of linear model parameters.
- Fig. 42 illustrates the neighboring 4 x 4 subblocks that are used for RMVF parameter derivation.
- the subblock motion field from a previous coded affine CU and the motion vectors from the adjacent subblocks of current CU are used as the input for the regression process.
- the predicted CPMVs for current block are derived as output.
- the regression based affine merge candidates are derived and added to the affine merge list.
- Subblock motion field from a previously coded affine CU and motion information from adjacent subblocks of a current CU are used as the input to the regression process to derive proposed affine candidates.
- the previously coded affine CU can be identified from scanning through non-adjacent positions and the affine HMVP table.
- Adjacent subblock information of current CU is fetched from 4x4 sub-blocks. For each sub-block, given a reference list, the corresponding motion vector and center coordinate of the sub-block may be used.
- affine candidates For each affine CU, up to 2 affine candidates can be derived. One with adjacent subblock information and one without. All the linear-regression-generated candidates are pruned and collected into one candidate sub-group, TM cost based ARMC process is applied when ARMC is enabled. Afterwards, up to N linear-regression-generated candidates are added to the affine merge list when N affine CUs are found. The number of affine candidates for ARMC is 30, the output list size is 15. 2.1.2.20. Geometric partitioning mode (GPM) 2.1.2.20.1. Geometric partitioning mode (GPM) with merge motion vector differences (MMVD)
- GPM in VVC is extended by applying motion vector refinement on top of the existing GPM uni-directional MVs.
- a flag is first signalled for a GPM CU, to specify whether this mode is used. If the mode is used, each geometric partition of a GPM CU can further decide whether to signal MVD or not. If MVD is signalled for a geometric partition, after a GPM merge candidate is selected, the motion of the partition is further refined by the signalled MVDs information. All other procedures are kept the same as in GPM.
- the MVD is signaled as a pair of distance and direction, similar as in MMVD.
- GPS-MMVD MMVD
- pic_fpel_mmvd_enabled_flag is equal to 1
- the MVD is left shifted by 2 as in MMVD.
- Geometric partitioning mode GPS with adaptive blending
- the final prediction samples are generated with by blending the prediction of the two prediction signals using weighted average.
- Two integer blending matrices (W 0 and W 1 ) are used.
- the weights in the GPM blending matrices are derived from the ramp function based on the displacement from a predicted sample position to the GPM partitioning boundary.
- the blending area size is fixed to two (2 samples on each side of the GPM partition split boundary) .
- the blending process in ECM is improved by adding four extra blending area sizes (quarter, half, double, and quadrupole of the existing area size) .
- a CU level flag is coded to signal the selected blending area size is signalled.
- the extended weighting precision is utilized, in which the maximum value of the weighs is changed from 8 (in VVC) to 32 to accommodate the extended blending area sizes.
- Fig. 43 illustrates the ramp function for the weights for GPM blending. 2.1.2.20.2.
- Template matching is applied to GPM.
- GPM mode When GPM mode is enabled for a CU, a CU-level flag is signaled to indicate whether TM is applied to both geometric partitions.
- Motion information for each geometric partition is refined using TM.
- TM When TM is chosen, a template is constructed using left, above or left and above neighboring samples according to partition angle. The motion is then refined by minimizing the difference between the current template and the template in the reference picture using the same search pattern of merge mode with half-pel interpolation filter disabled. Table 5.
- Template for the 1st and 2nd geometric partitions where A represents using above samples, L represents using left samples, and L+A represents using both left and above samples.
- a GPM candidate list is constructed as follows: 1. Interleaved List-0 MV candidates and List-1 MV candidates are derived directly from the regular merge candidate list, where List-0 MV candidates are higher priority than List-1 MV candidates. A pruning method with an adaptive threshold based on the current CU size is applied to remove redundant MV candidates. 2. Interleaved List-1 MV candidates and List-0 MV candidates are further derived directly from the regular merge candidate list, where List-1 MV candidates are higher priority than List-0 MV candidates. The same pruning method with the adaptive threshold is also applied to remove redundant MV candidates. 3. Zero MV candidates are padded until the GPM candidate list is full.
- the GPM-MMVD and GPM-TM are exclusively enabled to one GPM CU. This is done by firstly signaling the GPM-MMVD syntax. When both two GPM-MMVD control flags are equal to false (i.e., the GPM-MMVD are disabled for two GPM partitions) , the GPM-TM flag is signaled to indicate whether the template matching is applied to the two GPM partitions. Otherwise (at least one GPM-MMVD flag is equal to true) , the value of the GPM-TM flag is inferred to be false. 2.1.2.20.3. GPM with inter and intra prediction
- the final prediction samples are generated by weighting inter predicted samples and intra predicted samples for each GPM-separated region.
- the inter predicted samples are derived by inter GPM whereas the intra predicted samples are derived by an intra prediction mode (IPM) candidate list and an index signaled from the encoder.
- IPM candidate list size is pre-defined as 3.
- the available IPM candidates are the parallel angular mode against the GPM block boundary (Parallel mode) , the perpendicular angular mode against the GPM block boundary (Perpendicular mode) , and the Planar mode.
- GPM with intra and intra prediction is restricted to reduce the signalling overhead for IPMs and avoid an increase in the size of the intra prediction circuit on the hardware decoder.
- Fig. 44A-Fig. 44C illustrate an example GPM with inter and intra prediction, respectively; and Fig. 44D illustrates an example of GPM with intra and intra prediction.
- DIMD and neighboring mode based IPM derivation Parallel mode is registered first. Therefore, max two IPM candidates derived from the decoder-side intra mode derivation (DIMD) method and/or the neighboring blocks can be registered if there is not the same IPM candidate in the list.
- the neighboring mode derivation there are five positions for available neighboring blocks at most, but they are restricted by the angle of GPM block boundary, which are already used for GPM with template matching (GPM-TM) .
- GPM-TM template matching
- GPM-intra can be combined with GPM with merge with motion vector difference (GPM-MMVD) .
- TIMD is used for on IPM candidates of GPM-intra to further improve the coding performance.
- the Parallel mode can be registered first, then IPM candidates of TIMD, DIMD, and neighboring blocks. 2.1.2.20.4. Template matching based reordering for GPM split modes
- the reordering method for GPM split modes is a two-step process performed after the respective reference templates of the two GPM partitions in a coding unit are generated, as follows: ⁇ extending GPM partition edge into the reference templates of the two GPM partitions, resulting in 64 reference templates and computing the respective TM cost for each of the 64 reference templates; ⁇ reordering GPM split modes based on their TM cost values in ascending order and marking the best 32 split modes as available split modes.
- Fig. 45 illustrates the edge on templates. After ascending reordering using TM cost, an index is signaled. 2.1.2.20.5. Bi-predictive GPM
- the GPM design in VVC relies on uni-predictive motion vectors to generate motion compensated prediction samples for each inter GPM partition.
- ECM such a design has been extended to allow usage of bi-predictive motion vectors.
- the extraction process that extracts uni-predictive motion vectors from the initial merge list is invoked only for small blocks 8x8, 16x8 and 8x16.
- the extraction process is bypassed, so the initial merge list (which may contain merged Bi-MVs) is directly used as the final GPM merge list.
- the generation of the initial merge list is the same as before (i.e., the normal merge list generation without any candidate reordering) except that when generating the initial merge list for larger blocks (i.e., blocks with the extraction process bypassed) , the motion vector difference threshold for controlling whether a candidate can be added into the list is increased to be one full sample distance.
- BDOF based motion vector refinement as in the multi-pass DMVR is used when generating motion compensated prediction samples.
- GPM-MMVD When GPM-MMVD is used for a GPM partition and its base motion vector is bi-predictive, for low-delay pictures, the signalled MVD is applied on top of the L0 and L1 motion vector as in the existing merge MMVD design. For non-low-delay pictures, the bi-predictive motion vector is converted into a uni-predictive motion vector first and then the MVD is applied on top. 2.1.2.20.6.
- a GPM partition can be predicted by AMC inter-prediction, non-AMC inter-prediction or intra-prediction.
- a GPM partition predicted by AMC can be combined with the other GPM partition predicted by AMC, non-AMC, or intra-prediction.
- a uni-prediction affine merge candidate list is constructed from the subblock-based merge candidate list after discarding sub-TMVP candidates, similar to the uni-prediction merge candidate list construction for GPM in VVC.
- AMC is performed for a GPM partition using the control point motion vectors (CPMVs) of a merge candidate in the uni-prediction affine merge candidate list.
- the length of the uni-prediction affine merge candidate list is signalled in SPS.
- ARMC is applicable, the uni-prediction affine merge candidate list is reordered according to the template costs.
- a gpm_affine_flag is signaled for each GPM partition to indicate whether AMC is applied for the GPM partition.
- a merge candidate index for the GPM partition is signaled using individual arithmetic context models depending on whether AMC or non-AMC is applied.
- the two integer blending matrices (W 0 and W 1 ) are derived from the template (1 line above, 1 column left) .
- the parameters (a, b, c) are derived from the reference template using the same solver (MSE minimization) as the one used for CCCM, GLM or GL-CCCM.
- MSE minimization the solver for CCCM, GLM or GL-CCCM.
- a list of pair of candidates is built from the regular GPM candidates and re-ordered with the template cost.
- the GPM implicit mode is signaled by a CU-level flag (gpm_implicit_flag) . If gpm_implicit_flag is true, a merge-idx is coded to signal the pair of GPM candidates to be used. If gpm_implicit_flag is false, the regular GPM syntax elements are signaled. 2.1.2.21. Bilateral matching AMVP-merge mode
- the bi-directional predictor is composed of an AMVP predictor in one direction and a merge predictor in the other direction.
- the mode can be enabled to a coding block when the selected merge predictor and the AMVP predictor satisfy DMVR condition, where there is at least one reference picture from the past and one reference picture from the future relatively to the current picture and the distances from two reference pictures to the current picture are the same, the bilateral matching MV refinement is applied for the merge MV candidate and AMVP MVP as a starting point. Otherwise, if template matching functionality is enabled, template matching MV refinement is applied to the merge predictor or the AMVP predictor which has a higher template matching cost.
- AMVP part of the mode is signaled as a regular uni-directional AMVP, i.e. reference index and MVD are signaled, and it has a derived MVP index if template matching is used or MVP index is signaled when template matching is disabled.
- AMVP direction LX X can be 0 or 1
- the merge part in the other direction (1 –LX) is implicitly derived by minimizing the bilateral matching cost between the AMVP predictor and a merge predictor, i.e., for a pair of the AMVP and a merge motion vectors.
- the bilateral matching cost is calculated using the merge candidate MV and the AMVP MV.
- the merge candidate with the smallest cost is selected.
- the bilateral matching refinement is applied to the coding block with the selected merge candidate MV and the AMVP MV as a starting point.
- the third pass of multi pass DMVR which is sub-PU BDOF refinement of the multi-pass DMVR is enabled to AMVP-merge mode coded block.
- Sub-PU size of BDOF is adaptively selected depending on the width ⁇ height. For blocks smaller than 256, subblock size of 4 ⁇ 4, and otherwise 8 ⁇ 8 is used.
- Gx/Gy are the summation of the 2 horizontal/vertical gradients derived for each reference block. Summations ( ⁇ ) are weighted sums, where weights depend on the position in the target region ⁇ . The weights can also be applied to derive vx/vy in other cases.
- the mode is indicated by a flag, if the mode is enabled AMVP direction LX is further indicated by a flag.
- the IBC merge/AMVP list construction compared to VVC is modified as follows: ⁇ Only if an IBC merge/AMVP candidate is valid, it can be inserted into the IBC merge/AMVP candidate list. ⁇ Above-right, bottom-left, and above-left spatial candidates (belonging to the adjacent spatial candidate category) and one pairwise average candidate can be added into the IBC merge/AMVP candidate list. ⁇ Template based adaptive reordering (ARMC-TM) is applied to IBC merge list. ⁇ Candidates from non-adjacent spatial neighboring blocks (a. k. a., non-adjacent candidates) can be added to the candidate lists of IBC merge modes and IBC AMVP.
- Non-adjacent candidates are inserted between the adjacent spatial candidates and the HBVP candidates for both IBC merge and IBC AMVP.
- the same reference area of non-adjacent merge in regular inter mode is reused for the IBC.
- Auto-relocated block vector prediction (AR-BVP) candidates are added to the IBC merge and AMVP candidate list right after the HBVP candidates.
- a guiding block vector BV 0, 1 i.e., an existing BVP already in the candidate list
- a guiding block vector BV 0, 1 i.e., an existing BVP already in the candidate list
- B 1 has a BV denoted as BV 1, 2 pointing to a reference block B 2
- BV 0, 2 BV 0, 1 +BV 1, 2
- AR-BVP the AR-BVP, guided by BV 0, 1 .
- all five positions including top-left (e.g., LT) , top-right (e.g., RT) , center (e.g., Ctr) , bottom-left (e.g., LB) , and bottom-right (e.g., RB) positions of B n are checked to find BV n, n+1 .
- top-left e.g., LT
- top-right e.g., RT
- center e.g., Ctr
- bottom-left e.g., LB
- bottom-right (e.g., RB) positions of B n are checked to find BV n, n+1 .
- the HMVP table size for IBC is increased to 25. After up to 20 IBC merge candidates are derived with full pruning, they are reordered together. After reordering, the first 6 candidates with the lowest template matching costs are selected as the final candidates in the IBC merge list.
- the zero vectors’ candidates to pad the IBC Merge/AMVP list are replaced with a set of BVP candidates located in the IBC reference region.
- a zero vector is invalid as a block vector in IBC merge mode, and consequently, it is discarded as BVP in the IBC candidate list.
- Fig. 46 illustrates an example of how to derive AR-BVP
- Fig. 47 illustrates the five positions in Bn.
- a clustering of the BVP candidates may be applied when both BV candidate components are non-zero.
- the clustering method is applied in the candidate list order, and the candidates assigned to a group are removed from the list for the subsequent clusters.
- the BVP with a lowest TM cost is selected as the representative candidate of that group.
- the representative candidates of the two first groups are chosen as the candidates for the IBC AMVP list.
- BV candidate components are zero or block is coded in RRIBC
- a flag is signalled to indicate this case with a directional flag indicating horizontal or vertical component is non-zero.
- IBC AMVP list two new BVP candidates are derived, and the sign of the non-zero BV component is derived at decoder side.
- the AMVP BVP0 is set to the nearest valid location to the current block (-cbWidth or -cbHeight) , so the non-zero BVD is always negative, pointing to the left for a BV with a zero vertical component or to the above for a BV with a zero horizontal component.
- the AMVP BVP1 is set to the farthest position from the current block in the valid reference region, that is the left boundary or the top boundary of the IBC search region. Consequently, if the BVP1 is selected, the BVD is always positive, pointing to the right for BV with a zero vertical component or to the bottom for BV with a zero-horizontal component.
- Fig. 48 illustrates padding candidates for the replacement of the zero-vector in the IBC list
- Fig. 49 illustrates IBC candidate clustering based on the L2 distance and the TM cost.
- the optimal IBC AMVP index is signalled, which allows deriving the sign of the non-zero BVD component at the decoder side.
- the absolute magnitude of non-zero BVD component is further signalled.
- RRIBC the direction of the flipping mode is derived from the signalled directional flag. 2.1.2.23. IBC with Template Matching
- Template Matching is used in IBC for both IBC merge mode and IBC AMVP mode.
- the IBC-TM merge list is modified compared to the one used by regular IBC merge mode such that the candidates are selected according to a pruning method with a motion distance between the candidates as in the regular TM merge mode.
- the ending zero motion fulfillment is replaced by motion vectors to the left (-W, 0) , top (0, -H) and top-left (-W, -H) , where W is the width and H the height of the current CU.
- the selected candidates are refined with the Template Matching method prior to the RDO or decoding process.
- the IBC-TM merge mode has been put in competition with the regular IBC merge mode and a TM-merge flag is signaled.
- IBC-TM AMVP mode up to 3 candidates are selected from the IBC-TM merge list. Each of those 3 selected candidates are refined using the Template Matching method and sorted according to their resulting Template Matching cost. Only the 2 first ones are then considered in the motion estimation process as usual.
- IBC-TM merge and AMVP modes are quite simple since IBC motion vectors are constrained (i) to be integer and (ii) within a reference region. So, in IBC-TM merge mode, all refinements are performed at integer precision, and in IBC-TM AMVP mode, they are performed either at integer or 4-pel precision depending on the AMVR value. Such a refinement accesses only to samples without interpolation. In both cases, the refined motion vectors and the used template in each refinement step must respect the constraint of the reference region.
- Fig. 50 illustrates IBC reference region depending on current CU position. 2.1.2.24. IBC reference area
- the reference area for IBC is extended to two CTU rows above. Specifically, for CTU (m, n) to be coded, the reference area includes CTUs with index (m–2, n–2) ... (W, n–2) , (0, n–1) ... (W, n–1) , (0, n) ... (m, n) , where W denotes the maximum horizontal index within the current tile, slice or picture.
- W denotes the maximum horizontal index within the current tile, slice or picture.
- CTU size is 256
- the reference area is limited to one CTU row above. This setting ensures that for CTU size being 128 or 256, IBC does not require extra memory in the current ETM platform.
- the per-sample block vector search (or called local search) range is limited to [– (C ⁇ 1) , C >> 2] horizontally and [–C, C >> 2] vertically to adapt to the reference area extension, where C denotes the CTU size.
- Fig. 51 illustrates reference area for IBC. 2.1.2.25. Fractional pel IBC
- the option of block vector resolutions is extended to include quarter-pel resolution in additional to full-pel and 4-pel.
- the first bin is signalled to indicate whether BV is in quarter-pel resolution
- the second bin is signalled to switch between full-pel and 4-pel resolutions.
- a 2-tap bilinear interpolation filter is applied to generate template prediction blocks. Reference sample padding is performed when some of them are located outside IBC reference area. When needed, it performs in horizontal direction first and then vertical direction. 2.1.2.26. Filtered IBC prediction
- Additional filtered IBC mode is introduced, where a filter is applied to IBC predictor, which is derived by minimizing MSE between current and reference template.
- the bias term B represents a scalar offset between the input and output and is set to middle luma value (512 for 10-bit content) .
- This filtered mode is used as an additional mode for non-merge IBC blocks, and it is not used together with IBC-LIC, IBC-CIIP or RR-IBC.
- this filtering mode is inherited when merge mode list is constructed. The mode flag is signalled before the IBC-LIC flag. 2.1.2.27. MVD prediction
- possible MVD sign combinations and possible combinations of the first 6 most signification suffix bins of MVD magnitudes are sorted according to the template matching cost and index corresponding to the true MVD sign and MVD magnitudes is derived and context coded.
- the MVD are derived as following: 1. Parse the magnitude of MVD components, 2. Parse context coded MVD prediction index, 3. Build MV candidates by creating combination between possible signs and possible MVD magnitudes and add it to the MV predictor, 4. Derive MVD prediction cost for each derived MV based on template matching cost and sort, 5. Use the signaled index to pick the true MVD.
- MVD prediction is applied to inter AMVP, affine AMVP, MMVD and affine MMVD modes. Note, when wrap around motion compensation is enabled, the MV candidate shall be clipped with wrap around offset taken into consideration. 2.1.2.28. BVD prediction
- BVD sign combinations of IBC mode are sorted according to the template matching cost. Moreover, the first 4 most signification suffix bins of exponential Golomb code used to represent BVD magnitudes is also sorted according to the TM cost. Template matching operation is used to determine a BVD candidate with the best cost and indicate in the bitstream whether the best candidate is predicted correctly or not.
- Fig. 52 illustrates prediction of BVD. 2.1.2.29.
- the out of boundary (OOB) prediction samples are discarded and only the non-OOB predictors, when available, are used to generate the final predictor.
- Pos LeftBdry , Pos RightBdry , Pos TopBdry and Pos BottomBdry are the positions of four boundaries of the picture.
- One prediction sample is regarded as OOB when at least one of the following conditions is satisfied: where half_pixel is equal to 8 that represents the half-pel sample distance in the 1/16-pel sample precision.
- the samples outside of the picture boundary are derived by motion compensation instead of using only repetitive padding.
- the total padded area size is increased by 16 compared to repetitive padding. This is to keep MV clipping, which implements repetitive padding.
- Fig. 53 illustrates motion compensated boundary padding method.
- MV of a 4 ⁇ 4 boundary block is utilized to derive a M ⁇ 4 or 4 ⁇ M padding block.
- the value M is derived as the distance of the reference block to the picture boundary. Moreover, M is set at least equal to 4 as soon as the motion vector points to a position internal to the reference picture bounds. If boundary block is intra coded, then MV is not available, and M is set equal to 0. If M is less than 16, the rest of the padded area is filled with the repetitive padded samples.
- Fig. 54 illustrates an example of deriving a M ⁇ 4 padding block with a left padding direction.
- the pixels in MC padding block are corrected with an offset, which is equal to the difference between the DC values of the reconstructed boundary block and its corresponding reference block.
- a block level reference picture reordering method based on template matching is used.
- the reference pictures in List 0 and List 1 are interweaved to generate a joint list.
- template matching is performed to calculate the cost.
- the joint list is reordered based on ascending order of the template matching cost.
- the index of the selected reference picture in the reordered joint list is signaled in the bitstream.
- a list of pairs of reference pictures from List 0 and List 1 is generated and similarly reordered based on the template matching cost. The index of the selected pair is signaled. 2.1.2.32.
- Reference picture resampling is inherited from VVC. Compared to the filter lengths in VVC, e.g., 8, 6 and 4 taps for luma affine coded blocks, luma non-affine coded blocks and chroma respectively, the corresponding RPR filters in ECM are increased to 12, 10 and 6 taps.
- the LIC and template-based inter reordering tools including ARMC, MMVD and affine MMVD reordering, template-based BCW derivation, block level reference picture list reordering and MVD prediction, are enabled when any of reference pictures is in different resolution to the current picture.
- RR-IBC Reconstruction-Reordered IBC
- a Reconstruction-Reordered IBC (RR-IBC) mode is allowed for IBC coded blocks.
- RR-IBC Reconstruction-Reordered IBC
- the samples in a reconstruction block are flipped according to a flip type of the current block.
- the original block is flipped before motion search and residual calculation, while the prediction block is derived without flipping.
- the reconstruction block is flipped back to restore the original block.
- a syntax flag is firstly signalled for an IBC AMVP coded block, indicating whether the reconstruction is flipped, and if it is flipped, another flag is further signaled specifying the flip type.
- the flip type is inherited from neighbouring blocks, without syntax signalling. Considering the horizontal or vertical symmetry, the current block and the reference block are normally aligned horizontally or vertically. Therefore, when a horizontal flip is applied, the vertical component of the BV is not signaled and inferred to be equal to 0. Similarly, the horizontal component of the BV is not signaled and inferred to be equal to 0 when a vertical flip is applied.
- a flip-aware BV adjustment approach is applied to refine the block vector candidate.
- (x nbr , y nbr ) and (x cur , y cur ) represent the coordinates of the center sample of the neighbouring block and the current block, respectively
- BV nbr and BV cur denotes the BV of the neighbouring block and the current block, respectively.
- Fig. 55A and Fig. 55B illustrates BV adjustment. 2.1.2.34.
- Combination of IBC with other coding tools 2.1.2.34.1.
- Affine-MMVD and GPM-MMVD have been adopted to ECM as an extension of regular MMVD mode. It is natural to extend the MMVD mode to the IBC merge mode.
- the distance set is ⁇ 1-pel, 2-pel, 4-pel, 8-pel, 12-pel, 16-pel, 24-pel, 32-pel, 40-pel, 48-pel, 56-pel, 64-pel, 72-pel, 80-pel, 88-pel, 96-pel, 104-pel, 112-pel, 120-pel, 128-pel ⁇
- the BVD directions are two horizontal and two vertical directions.
- the base candidates are selected from the first five candidates in the reordered IBC merge list. And based on the SAD cost between the template (one row above and one column left to the current block) and its reference for each refinement position, all the possible MBVD refinement positions (20 ⁇ 4) for each base candidate are reordered. Finally, the top 8 refinement positions with the lowest template SAD costs are kept as available positions, consequently for MBVD index coding.
- the MBVD index is binarized by the rice code with the parameter equal to 1.
- the MBVD candidates search is a two-step process, which starts with checking template SAD costs of offsets added to BVP along each direction with the interval of 1-pel.
- the second step of the search checks template SAD costs with 1/4-pel interval for the candidates around the selected candidates from the first step. For the integer MBVD (when existed in ECM ph_fpel_mbvd_enabled_flag is 0) , those intervals are multiplied by 4.
- the candidates with the lowest TM cost are included into the final MBVD list.
- An IBC-MBVD coded block does not inherit flip type from a RR-IBC coded neighbor block. 2.1.2.34.2. Combined intra block copy and intra prediction
- IPM intra prediction mode
- Intra block copy with geometry partitioning mode is a coding tool which divides a CU into two sub-partitions geometrically.
- the prediction signals of the two sub-partitions are generated using IBC and intra prediction.
- IBC-GPM can be applied to regular IBC merge mode or IBC TM merge mode.
- An intra prediction mode (IPM) candidate list is constructed using the same method as GPM with inter and intra prediction for intra prediction, and the IPM candidate list size is pre-defined as 3.
- an IBC-GPM geometry partitioning mode set flag is signalled to indicate whether the first or the second geometry partitioning mode set is selected, followed by the geometry partitioning mode index.
- An IBC-GPM intra flag is signalled to indicate whether intra prediction is used for the first sub-partition.
- intra prediction mode index is signalled.
- a merge index is signalled.
- bi-predictive IBC GPM two flags are signalled to indicate the prediction modes of two partitions, the first flag indicates whether the first partition is intra predicted, and if not then the second flag is signalled to indicate whether intra prediction is used for the second partition. This method is applied to SCC only. 2.1.2.34.4. IBC BVP-merge and bi-predictive IBC merge
- IBC-BVP-merge is similar to AMVP-merge, derives one BV from IBC block vector prediction (BVP) and the second BV from IBC merge to form bi-prediction for IBC. Two different indices for the IBC BVP and the IBC merge candidates are signalled.
- BVP IBC block vector prediction
- Bi-predictive IBC merge is enabled together with MBVD and uni-merge.
- bi-predictive IBC merge two BVs from the existing IBC merge candidate list are derived, utilizing two different indices, which are signalled.
- Bi-predictive IBC merge is applied to IBC regular merge and IBC MBVD.
- Bi-predictive IBC merge, IBC MBVD, and IBC uni-merge are enabled for non-SCC classes. 2.1.2.34.5.
- the MBVD candidates search is a two-step process, which starts with checking template SAD costs of offsets added to BVP along each direction with the interval of 1-pel.
- the second step of the search checks template SAD costs with 1/4-pel interval for the candidates around the selected candidates from the first step. For the integer MBVD (when existed in ECM ph_fpel_mbvd_enabled_flag is 0) , those intervals are multiplied by 4.
- the candidates with the lowest TM cost are included into the final MBVD list.
- Intra block copy with local illumination compensation is a coding tool which compensates the local illumination variation within a picture between the CU coded with IBC and its prediction block with a linear equation.
- the parameters of the linear equation are derived same as LIC for inter prediction except that the reference template is generated using block vector in IBC-LIC.
- IBC-LIC can be applied to IBC AMVP mode and IBC merge mode. For IBC AMVP mode, an IBC-LIC flag is signalled to indicate the use of IBC-LIC.
- Top-only, left-only, or L-shape templates are allowed for deriving the single model parameters.
- MMLM is extended to IBC-LIC, which allows IBC-LIC to have two linear models in one CU.
- IBC-LIC MMLM And only L-shape template is used in IBC-LIC MMLM.
- a mode index is signalled.
- IBC merge mode the IBC-LIC flag is inferred from the merge candidate.
- the IBC-LIC flag is inherited from an IBC HMVP candidate to harmonize IBC HMVP and IBC-LIC similar to the inter LIC case. 2.1.2.35. Template matching based BCW index derivation for merge mode
- the BCW index for merge coded CUs is derived based on template matching cost instead of being derived from neighboring blocks. Given a selected merge candidate, the TM cost values are calculated with different bi-prediction weights, and then, the bi-prediction weight with minimum TM cost value is used to predict the merge CU.
- TM cost for bi-predicted weights the following rules are applied: - Since the inherited bi-predicted weight is likely to have higher accuracy than others, only the inherited bi- prediction weight and its two neighboring weights (i.e. ⁇ 1) are considered. For example, if the inherited bi-predicted weight is 4, then only three weights ⁇ 3, 4, 5 ⁇ are involved in TM cost calculation. - The TM cost of the inherited BCW index is multiplied with 0.90625, that is, the cost is reduced by 3/32. - The TM cost of the equal weight is multiplied with 0.90625 since bi-predicted samples are beneficial for BDOF and BDOF is only applied to CU with equal weights.
- the template matching based BCW index derivation is applied to CUs coded in regular merge, template matching, adaptive decoder-side motion vector refinement and MMVD modes.
- the bi-prediction weights for merge mode are extended from ⁇ -2, 3, 4, 5, 10 ⁇ to ⁇ 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 ⁇ .
- the negative bi-predicted weights for non-merge mode ⁇ -2, 10 ⁇ are replaced with positive weights ⁇ 1, 7 ⁇ . 2.1.2.36.
- DMVR is applied to affine merge coded blocks and affine MMVD coded blocks when DMVR condition is satisfied. It is also extended to adaptive BM merge mode.
- An affine motion field is modelized as follows (6-parameters affine case) : wherein (mv x , mv y ) is the motion vector at location (x, y) and (mv 0x , mv 0y ) is the base MV representing the translation motion of the affine model. Parameters and represent the non-translation parameters (rotation, scaling) .
- Motion vectors (mv 0x , mv 0y ) , (mv 1x , mv 1y ) and (mv 2x , mv 2y ) are called the control point motion vectors (CPMVs) of the considered affine coding unit.
- the bilateral matching cost is calculated per subblock.
- the subblock bilateral matching costs and refined subblock MVs are used to determine the overall best refined CPMVs for the affine block. More specific, the CPMVs are refined according to the following steps: 1) Perform integer-pel bilateral matching for subblocks. Accumulate the subblock bilateral matching cost to determine the best integer-pel MV offset.
- the non-translation parameters of affine model are refined after the base MV are determined.
- Each of CPMVs is fixed as base MV in turn, and an offset is added to the non-translation parameter of affine model by minimizing the bilateral matching cost, and then the other two CPMVs are calculated according to based MV and refined non-translation parameters.
- both CPMVs and non-translation parameters refinements are applied.
- the MMVD offset is added to the affine DMVR refined affine merge base candidate if the base candidate meets the affine DMVR refinement condition.
- an affine merge list that only contains affine merge candidates that meet the affine DMVR conditions are constructed and then CPMVs refinement and non-translation parameters refinment are applied.
- InterCCCM applies the CCCM method for predicting chroma samples from reconstructed luma samples when the CU uses inter prediction or intra block copy (IBC) .
- the cross-component filters are derived using the prediction blocks of luma and chroma.
- the derived filters are applied to the reconstructed luma block and blended with the prediction blocks of chroma to produce the final chroma prediction blocks.
- the filtered reconstructed luma blocks use blending weight of 0.75 and chroma prediction blocks use blending weight of 0.25.
- Fig. 56 illustrates the InterCCCM method on the decoder.
- the 8-tap filter consist of 6 spatial luma samples, a nonlinear term, and a bias term.
- the spatial luma samples (L0, ..., L5) are obtained from the luma grid selecting the 6 luma samples closest to the chroma position C without down sampling.
- the filter coefficients are derived using ECM’s division-free Gaussian elimination method and the necessary offsets are applied to samples prior to filter derivation.
- the offsets for division-free Gaussian elimination method are obtained using a four-point average of the luma and chroma prediction blocks, where the four points correspond to the top-left, top-right, bottom-left and bottom-right corners of the blocks.
- Fig. 57 illustrates luma samples L0 to L5 in relation to the chroma sample C.
- Usage of the mode is signalled with a CABAC coded TU level flag.
- CABAC context was included to support this.
- the InterCCCM flag is only signalled if the TU’s luma Cbf is non-zero and the CU’s predMode is either MODE_INTER or MODE_IBC.
- the encoder performs an RD decision in the transform selection loop for the chroma components when luma Cbf is non-zero and the CU’s predMode is either MODE_INTER or MODE_IBC. 2.1.2.38.
- CCP merge for chroma inter blocks
- the cross-component prediction merge mode is extended to chroma inter coding.
- the CCP models including CCLM, MMLM, CCCM, GLM, chroma fusion, CCP merge modes, and inter CCCM are stored and inherited for the following coding chroma intra and inter blocks. Similar to the CCP merge for chroma intra blocks, a flag is signaled to indicate whether a chroma inter block is coded using this mode. If the CCP merge mode is used, a CCP merge list is constructed in a similar way as that for chroma intra blocks except that additional shifted temporal candidate and on-the-fly derived candidates are included in the CCP merge list. The additional shifted temporal candidates are derived from the collocated picture.
- the position of these candidates are the same as those defined in ECM for regular inter merge prediction candidates with a shift obtained from the motion vector of the current block.
- the on-the-fly derived candidates are only used for low delay pictures and are obtained using the neighboring reconstructed samples of the current block.
- At most 1 on-the-fly derived candidates including single/multi-model CCCM and single/multi-model CCLM are added to the CCP merge list. After the CCP merge list is constructed, the candidate with the lowest template cost is selected for the chroma inter block. The chroma inter block is then predicted in the same way as that of inter CCCM. That is, the motion compensation predicted samples are blended with the cross-component predicted samples to form the final prediction. 3.
- video unit or “coding unit” or “block” may represent a picture, a slice, a tile, a coding tree block (CTB) , a coding tree unit (CTU) , a coding block (CB) , a CU, a PU, a TU, a PB, or a TB.
- CTB coding tree block
- CTU coding tree unit
- CB coding block
- prediction unit may represent a prediction block, or a prediction sample.
- chained motion vector may refer to a motion vector (or block vector) derived by at least one guided motion vector (or block vector) . It may also refer to an accumulated motion vector derived by adding up at least one motion vector (or block vector) and at least one guided motion vector (or block vector) .
- CCP may refer to any cross-component prediction method such as any kind of LM/intraCCLM/interCCCM/MMLM/CCCM/GLM/GL-CCCM/BVG-CCCM/intraCCPmerge/interCCPmerge. It could be used for an intra block, inter block, or IBC block. It could be a type of CCP based fusion mode.
- Intra/IBC prediction may be employed based on a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate.
- the Intra/IBC prediction may be employed in an inter slice.
- an intra luma mode may be derived based on a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non- adjacent candidate.
- a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an intraTMP mode list. 1. For example, it may be inserted to intraTMP merge candidate list. ii.
- a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an EIP mode list. 1. For example, it may be inserted to EIP merge candidate list. iii.
- a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an intra merge mode list. 1.
- the intra merge mode may be employed based on an intra mode list.
- a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an SGPM mode list.
- a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to a OBIC (i.e., occurrence based intra coding) mode list.
- OBIC i.e., occurrence based intra coding
- a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an TIMD/DIMD mode list. 1. For example, it may be inserted to TIMD candidate list. 2. For example, it may be inserted to TIMD merge candidate list. 3. For example, it may be inserted to DIMD merge candidate list. vii. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an intra MPM list. viii. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an IPM (intra prediction mode) list. c.
- IPM intra prediction mode
- an intra chroma mode may be derived based on a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non- adjacent candidate.
- a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to intra chroma mode list.
- a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to non- CCP based intra chroma mode list.
- a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to DBV mode list.
- a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to CCP mode list. 1.
- the CCP may refer to regular CCP mode, and/or CCP merge mode. 2.
- the CCP may refer to BVG-CCCM mode.
- the intra part of an intra fusion mode may be derived based on a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate.
- the intra fusion mode may be CIIP mode (and/or its variant) . 1.
- it may be regular CIIP mode. 2.
- it may be CIIP variant mode which blends intra prediction with IBC prediction.
- it may be CIIP variant mode which blends intra prediction with intraTMP prediction. 4.
- the intra fusion mode may be GPM mode (and/or its variant) . 1.
- GPM-inter-intra mode 2.
- GPM-IBC-intra mode 3.
- GPM-subblock-intra mode wherein the subblock based prediction may be derived by affine and/or sbTMVP. 4.
- sample based weighting method may be used for the GPM mode and/or its variant. 5.
- geometric partitioning may be used for the GPM mode and/or its variant mode to split a block into two sub-partitions and each partition has its own mode information.
- the intra fused mode may be DIMD blend mode.
- the intra fused mode may be TIMD blend mode.
- the intra fused mode may be intraTMP blend mode.
- a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be used for an intra/IBC prediction/mode in inter slice. i.
- the temporal candidate e.g., intra mode information, EIP mode information, intraTMP mode information, DBV mode information, UBC mode information, block vector, SGPM mode information, CCP model information, OBIC mode information, etc.
- a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be derived based on the coding information of a temporal block located in a reference picture. 1.
- the temporal block may be retrieved by a motion vector shift. a.
- the motion shift may be derived based on a motion vector of a neighboring block.
- the motion shift may be derived based on a motion vector of the current block. i.
- the current block is coded by a fusion mode containing an inter prediction part (e.g., as listed in bullet c. ) .
- a derived side block matching may be applied to get a motion shift and locate a temporal reference block in a reference picture.
- the motion shift may be derived based on a chained motion/block vector.
- the chained motion vector may be derived by accumulating at least two motion vectors.
- the chained motion vector may be derived by accumulating at least one motion vector and one block vector.
- the motion shift may be derived based on a motion/block vector of a chained block. i.
- the chained block used to derive the motion shift may be retrieved based on more than one motion vector, and the motion shift is associated with the chained block. ii.
- the motion shift may be derived without accumulating more than one motion/block vector.
- the spatial non-adjacent candidate may be retrieved by a block vector shift.
- the temporal block and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be retrieved by a pre-defined position.
- the pre-defined position may be defined based on the block width and/or height of the current block.
- the pre-defined position may be defined based on the CTU size.
- more than one pre-defined position may be defined.
- the pre-defined position may be used for spatial blocks in the current picture. i. For example, if a spatial block locates at the pre-defined position is inter coded, then a temporal block in a reference picture may be retrieved based on its motion vector. e. For example, the block at the pre-defined position in a reference picture may be used as a temporal block. f.
- the pre-defined position may be a position in a reference picture which is collocated to at least one sample inside or neighboring to the current block in the current picture. ii. For example, moreover, more than one temporal candidate and/or spatial non-adjacent candidate may be used. Figs.
- the temporal candidates and/or spatial non-adjacent candidates for an intra/inter/IBC/ccp mode may be defined based on pre-defined position (s) .
- the pre-defined position may be defined based on the block width and/or height of the current block.
- the pre-defined position may be defined based on the CTU size.
- more than one pre-defined position may be defined.
- the pre-defined position may be used to find a motion vector from spatial neighboring block (s) in the current picture.
- the spatial neighboring block (s) may be in one or more positions as illustrated in Fig. 58A, wherein the rectangle denoted with “CUR” represents the current block, the grids filled with black are spatial adjacent blocks, and the slashed grids and backslashed grids are spatial non-adjacent blocks.
- CUR the rectangle denoted with “CUR” represents the current block
- the grids filled with black are spatial adjacent blocks
- the slashed grids and backslashed grids are spatial non-adjacent blocks.
- sparse positions may be defined for the non-adjacent neighboring blocks.
- consecutive positions may be defined for the adjacent neighboring blocks.
- the block at the pre-defined position in a reference picture may be used as a temporal block.
- the temporal block (s) may be in one or more positions as illustrated in Fig. 58B, wherein rectangle denoted with “COL” represents the collocated temporal block corresponding to the current block, the grids filled with black are temporal adjacent blocks, and the slashed grids and backslashed grids are temporal non-adjacent blocks.
- the temporal block (s) may be in one or more positions as illustrated in Fig.
- the temporal block (s) may be in one or more positions as illustrated in Fig. 58D, wherein rectangle denoted with “COL” represents the collocated temporal block corresponding to the current block, the sparse dotted grids and dense dotted grids are temporal non-adjacent blocks.
- the temporal information may be derived based on the temporal block.
- sparse positions may be defined for the non-adjacent neighboring blocks.
- consecutive positions may be defined for the adjacent neighboring blocks.
- the pre-defined position may be a position in a reference picture which is collocated to at least one sample inside or neighboring to the current block in the current picture.
- an inter mode (such as GPM inter-inter motion candidate list, interCCP merge list, inter merge mode, subblock based inter mode, affine AMVP mode, regular AMVP mode, inter CCP mode, inter CCP merge mode, LIC mode, etc. ) may follow such pre-defined positions to derive a temporal candidate.
- an intra/IBC mode may follow such pre-defined positions to derive a temporal candidate.
- the temporal candidates for an intra/inter/IBC/CCP mode may be defined based on a motion vector shift. i) For example, the motion shift may be derived based on a motion vector of a neighboring block.
- the motion shift may be derived based on a motion vector of the current block.
- the current block is coded by a fusion mode containing an inter prediction part (e.g., as listed in bullet c. ) .
- a decoder derived block matching may be applied to get a motion shift and locate a temporal reference block in a reference picture.
- the motion shift may be derived based on a chained motion/block vector.
- the chained motion vector may be derived by accumulating at least two motion vectors.
- the chained motion vector may be derived by accumulating at least one motion vector and one block vector.
- the motion shift may be derived based on a motion/block vector of a chained block.
- the chained block used to derive the motion shift may be retrieved based on more than one motion vector, and the motion shift is associated with the chained block.
- the motion shift may be derived without accumulating more than one motion/block vector.
- an inter mode such as GPM inter-inter motion candidate list, affine AMVP mode, regular AMVP mode, affine merge mode, interCCP merge list, etc.
- an intra/IBC mode may follow such rule to derive a temporal candidate.
- the temporal candidate may be derived from a temporal block in a reference picture, wherein the reference picture may be any available reference picture in the reference picture list (e.g., not necessarily be the collocated picture) .
- the reference picture may be fixed to a collocated picture.
- the temporal candidate or a spatial non-adjacent candidate is a motion vector (or block vector)
- it may be based on a chained motion vector (or block vector) .
- the chained motion vector may be derived by accumulating at least two motion vectors.
- the chained motion vector may be derived by accumulating at least one motion vector and one block vector.
- an inter mode (such as GPM inter-inter motion candidate list, affine AMVP mode, regular AMVP mode, affine merge mode, interCCP merge list, etc. ) may follow such rule to derive a temporal candidate or a spatial non-adjacent candidate.
- the pre-defined positions to looking up temporal candidates and/or spatial non-adjacent candidates may be aligned/unified for all relevant intra and/or inter and/or IBC and/or CCP blocks in a codec.
- intra and/or inter and/or IBC and/or CCP blocks may follow different patterns to look up temporal candidates and/or spatial non-adjacent candidates.
- the pre-defined positions to looking up adjacent or non-adjacent spatial candidates may be aligned/unified for all relevant intra and/or inter and/or IBC and/or CCP blocks in a codec.
- intra and/or inter and/or IBC and/or CCP blocks may follow different patterns to look up adjacent or non-adjacent spatial candidates.
- the pre-defined positions of non-adjacent (and/or adjacent) spatial candidates and non-adjacent (and/or adjacent) temporal candidates may be aligned/unified for all relevant intra and/or inter and/or IBC and/or CCP blocks in a codec.
- the pre-defined positions of spatial candidates and temporal candidates may be different for different tools.
- an affine candidate may be derived from a non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) candidate.
- all the two or three CPMVs (depending on 4-parameters or 6-parameters affine type) of an affine candidate may be derived based on one non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) block.
- the MVs of the top-left corner, top-right corner (if applicable) , bottom-left corner of the non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) block may be used to construct one affine candidate.
- different CPMVs of the affine candidate may be derived based on different non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) blocks.
- the top-left CPMV of the affine candidate may be derived based on a first non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) block, while the top-right CPMV (if needed) of the affine candidate may be derived based on a second non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) block, and the bottom-left CPMV of the affine candidate may be derived based on a third non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) block.
- affine AMVP mode if a candidate (spatial adjacent, non-adjacent, temporal, chained MVP based, etc.
- such candidate may be scaled to the target reference picture and inserted to the affine AMVP list.
- the motion vector of the neighbor block may be scaled to the target reference picture, and the scaled motion vector may be inserted to the AMVP list as a motion candidate.
- such scheme may be applied to a regular inter AMVP based method.
- one or more temporal non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to the affine AMVP list.
- the temporal non-adjacent candidates may be reordered together with other candidates (e.g., adjacent candidates, history based candidates) , and output a reordered affine AMVP list.
- the temporal non-adjacent candidate in the affine AMVP list may be explicitly refined (e.g., with an explicit indicator syntax, motion offset syntax, etc. ) or implicitly refined (e.g., decoder derived motion offsets without signalling, etc. ) .
- e) For example, if a temporal candidate is affine coded, its affine coding information may be used for the affine candidate list construction of the current affine block.
- the affine coding information of an affine coded block may be stored in a (temporal) picture buffer and used for future block’s coding.
- the affine coding information contains affine type, subblock motion vectors, horizontal and vertical coordinators, width and height, of the temporal affine coded blocks, etc.
- such information may be stored at 8x8 granularity.
- such information may be stored at 4x4 granularity.
- the temporal candidate may refer to an affine coded block which contains the coordinators defined as the temporal candidate position.
- the motion vectors of the top-left, top-right, bottom-left (if applicable) corner of the temporal affine coded block may be scaled to a certain reference index and used for the affine candidate list construction of the current affine block.
- the certain reference index may refer to the target reference picture for an affine AMVP mode.
- the certain reference index may be a reference picture with reference index equal to 0.
- the certain reference index may be a reference picture closest to the current picture.
- the certain reference index may be a reference picture farthest to the current picture.
- the certain reference index may be determined based on a reference picture whose POC distance ⁇ current picture, reference picture ⁇ is similar to the POC distance ⁇ collocated reference frame, collocated picture ⁇ .
- the certain reference index may be an arbitrary reference picture in the RPL.
- the CPMV candidate of the current affine coded block may be calculated based on the scaled motion vectors (e.g., top-left, top-right, bottom-left (if applicable) corner) of the temporal affine coded block.
- the affine model may be constructed based on the ⁇ horizontal coordinator, vertical coordinator, width, height, the scaled motion vectors ⁇ of the temporal affine coded block, as well as the ⁇ horizontal coordinator, vertical coordinator, width, height ⁇ of the current affine coded block.
- the CPMV candidate of the current affine coded block may be computed based on the affine model.
- an affine candidate may be derived from a chained motion vector. a) For example, all the two or three CPMVs (depending on 4-parameters or 6-parameters affine type) of an affine candidate may be set based on a same chained motion vector.
- all CPMVs of the affine candidate may be set equal to the chained motion vector.
- different CPMVs of an affine candidate may be set based on different chained motion vectors.
- the top-left CPMV of the affine candidate may be set equal to a first chained motion vector
- the top-right CPMV (if needed) of the affine candidate may be set equal to a second chained motion vector
- the bottom-left CPMV of the affine candidate may be set equal to a third temporal block pointed by a third chained motion vector.
- a chained motion vector may be generated based on accumulating at least one BV.
- the BV may be derived from a BV list which is constructed by neighboring IBC/intraTMP coded blocks.
- the BV may be derived from the position displacement between the current block and a spatial neighbor (adjacent, or non-adjacent) block.
- the chained motion vector may be derived based on accumulating a BV and an MV.
- the chained motion vector may be derived based on accumulating two BVs.
- the disclosed method may be used for an AMVP based method (e.g., inter AMVP, affine AMVP, IBC AMVP, etc. ) .
- the disclosed method may be used for a merge based method (e.g., inter merge, affine mer, IBC merge, CCP merge, intra merge, etc. ) .
- At least one CPMV of a temporal affine candidate may be derived using the information of picture distance.
- at least one CPMV of a temporal affine candidate may be derived in a way same or similar to chained MV derivation.
- an affine candidate may be refined based on a decoder derived method (e.g., template matching based, or bilateral matching based, etc. ) .
- an affine AMVP candidate may be refined based on template matching or bilateral matching.
- the LIC flag is set to false when performing the affine AMVP candidate refinement.
- an affine merge candidate may be refined based on template matching or bilateral matching.
- a non-translation affine parameter refinement process may be applied to refine an affine candidate.
- different offset values may be added to top-left, top-right, bottom-left CPMV of an affine candidate.
- a translation affine parameter refinement process may be applied to refine the base MV of an affine candidate.
- a same offset may be added to all CPMVs of an affine candidate.
- An AMVP candidate may be refined by SAD or SATD or weighted SAD.
- a) Which cost function (metric) is used to refine a motion vector may be dependent on candidate index and/or prediction method.
- b) To refine an affine AMVP motion vector candidate i) For example, whether to use SAD or SATD may be dependent on the affine AMVP candidate index in the AMVP list.
- ii) For example, whether to use SAD or weighted SAD may be dependent on the affine AMVP candidate index in the AMVP list.
- c) To refine a regular inter AMVP motion vector candidate i) For example, whether to use SAD or SATD may be dependent on the inter AMVP candidate index in the AMVP list.
- whether to use SAD or weighted SAD may be dependent on the inter AMVP candidate index in the AMVP list.
- the determination may be based on the parity of the AMVP candidate index.
- the AMVP candidate index is an even number, the first cost function is selected for the refinement process, otherwise the second cost function is selected.
- the AMVP candidate index is a odd number, the first cost function is selected for the refinement process, otherwise the second cost function is selected. 13)
- the candidates in the list may be sorted/reordered/pruned based on the distance between the current block and the neighbor block (of which the candidate is derived from) .
- a penalty factor may be added to the decoder derived cost (e.g., template cost, bilateral cost, etc. ) of a candidate.
- the penalty factor may be determined based on the distance between the current block and the neighbor block which the candidate is derived from. (1)
- the decoder derived cost of a candidate father from the current block may be multiplied by a larger penalty factor.
- how to set the penalty factor may be determined based on the candidate type.
- larger penalty factor may be added to a certain type of candidate (e.g., temporal candidates, chained motion vector based candidates, etc. ) .
- the candidate with a larger distance may be put after another candidate with a smaller distance.
- the “distance” refers to the displacement between the current block and the candidate block, wherein the candidate block is a block whose motion/model/mode parameters are going to be inserted to the candidate list.
- the candidate list pruning criteria may be based on the distance.
- candidates with similar distance values may be treated as redundant candidates and may be pruned for the candidate list construction.
- pruning criteria may be based on a diversity check, wherein the diversity may be related to motion vector difference, reference indexes, POC distance, QP, lambda, etc.
- candidates who are close to each other may be clustered, so that sparse candidates that have enough distance from each other may be retained in the candidate list.
- the clustering process may be conducted based on discarding latter adjacent candidates which is close to a first one. In such case, only the first one of a group of adjacent candidates is retained in the list.
- the clustering process may be conducted based on an intermediate block who locates in-between those candidates who are close to each other.
- the sparse candidates may be used as guided motion vector to generate subsequent chained motion vector candidates.
- it may be used for an inter prediction mode (e.g., affine, regular inter, etc. ) .
- the distance may be defined based on a horizontal displacement and/or a vertical displacement between the coordination of the current block and the coordination of the neighbor block which the candidate is derived from.
- the candidates may refer to motion candidates, mode candidates, or CCP/filter model candidates, etc.
- the distance may refer to a distance between a spatial neighbor block (e.g., in the current picture) and the current block (e.g., in the current picture) .
- the distance may refer to a distance between a temporal neighbor block (e.g., in a reference picture) and a temporal collocated block (e.g., in a reference picture) which is collocated to the current block.
- a pair of bi-directional motion vector predictor candidates may be determined based on a decoder derived method (e.g., bilateral cost based, template cost based, etc. ) .
- a decoder derived method e.g., bilateral cost based, template cost based, etc.
- which motion vector predictors e.g., motion vector predictor index
- L1 may be determined based on bilateral cost (or template cost) .
- the claimed method may be by default used for a bi-directional AMVP coded block.
- a motion vector predictor index may be signalled for a uni-directional AMVP coded block.
- the bi-directional motion vector predictor candidates may be refined based on a decoder derived method.
- bilateral matching based method may be used to refine one or two of the bi-directional motion vector predictors. (1) For example, it may refine L0 or L1 only. (2) Alternatively, it may refine both L0 and L1 motion vector predictors.
- template matching based method may be used to refine one or two of the bi-directional motion vector predictors.
- whether to use bilateral matching or template matching to refine the bi-directional motion vector predictors may be determined based on the POC distance. (1) For example, template matching may be applied when the POC distance between L0 reference and the current picture is NOT equal to the POC distance between L1 reference and the current picture.
- bilateral matching may be applied when the POC distance between L0 reference and the current picture is equal to the POC distance between L1 reference and the current picture.
- bilateral matching may be applied when the POC distance between L0 reference and the current picture is NOT equal to the POC distance between L1 reference and the current picture.
- amvp-merge mode when amvp-merge mode is used, bilateral matching may be applied to refine the L0 and L1 motion vector pair.
- whether to refine both sides/directions or just one side/direction of the bi-directional motion vector predictors may be determined based on BCW weights or POC distance or template cost. (1) For example, the direction which has larger (or smaller) BCW weight may be refined.
- the claimed method may be used for an AMVP coded block (e.g., regular CU based AMVP, affine based AMVP, SMVD, etc. ) .
- the claimed method may be used for SMVD mode only.
- the claimed method may be signalled at block level.
- the claimed method may be by default applied without explicit signalling.
- the claimed method may be allowed to be applied in case that the L0 reference is coded prior to the current picture, and the L1 reference is coded after the current picture.
- the claimed method may be allowed to be applied in case that the POC distance between L0 reference and the current picture is equal to the POC distance between L1 reference and the current picture.
- the claimed method may be allowed to be applied in case that the POC distance between L0 reference and the current picture is NOT equal to the POC distance between L1 reference and the current picture.
- SMVD may be allowed in case that the POC distance between L0 reference and the current picture is NOT equal to the POC distance between L1 reference and the current picture.
- the claimed method may be allowed to be applied in case that BCW is used to the current block.
- SMVD may be allowed in case that BCW is used.
- a spatial/temporal non-adjacent candidate (e.g., for affine, regular inter, intra, IBC, CCP, merge, amvp, etc. ) may be fetched from one or more of the positions in Fig. 59A and Fig. 59B, in which the distance between the non-adjacent position and the current block (or collocated block regarding a temporal candidate) may be defined based on the block width and/or height of the current block.
- the candidate may refer to a spatial adjacent or non-adjacent candidate of the current block in the current picture.
- the candidate may refer to a temporal adjacent or non-adjacent candidate of the temporal collocated block in a reference picture.
- the reference picture could be an available reference picture in the RPL.
- the motion vector of the reference block (e.g., illustrated in Fig. 59A and Fig. 59B) may be scaled to a certain reference index.
- the certain reference index may be determined by the target reference picture of an AMVP based coding method.
- the certain reference index may be a reference picture with reference index equal to 0.
- the certain reference index may be a reference picture closest to the current picture.
- the certain reference index may be a reference picture farthest to the current picture.
- the certain reference index may be determined based on a reference picture whose POC distance ⁇ current picture, reference picture ⁇ is similar to the POC distance ⁇ collocated reference frame, collocated picture ⁇ .
- the certain reference index may be an arbitrary reference picture in the RPL.
- the following coding method may be implemented based on the candidate: i) affine amvp, ii) regular inter amvp, iii) sbtmvp based amvp, iv) affine merge, v) BM affine merge, vi) regular inter merge, CIIP, GPM, etc., vii) BM merge, viii) TM merge, ix) IBC merge, x) IBC amvp, xi) intraTMP (e.g., merge list) , xii) intra/inter CCP merge, xiii) OBIC, EIP, SGPM, DIMD merge, TIMD merge, etc.
- a separate non-adjacent candidate sub-group list may be constructed, and at least one candidate from the sub-group list may be merged to the final candidate list for a block coding.
- an index of the final candidate list may be signalled in the bitstream.
- a candidate in the final candidate list may be selected based on a decoder derive method (i.e., without signaling an index) and used for the current block coding.
- the non-adjacent candidates in the sub-group list may be reordered and the ones with lower template costs may be further merged to the final candidate list.
- the non-adjacent candidate may be refined based on a decoder derived method (e.g, , template matching based, bilateral matching based, etc. ) .
- the non-adjacent candidate may be refined based on a encoder selected method, and the output delta/difference may be signalled in the bitstream.
- Fig. 59A and Fig. 59B illustrate another example of possible positions of adjacent and non-adjacent neighboring blocks relative to the current or collocated block, respectively.
- the disclosed method may be used for a video unit coded with at least one of the following methods: a) An intra coded method i) For example, EIP, EIP merge, intraTMP, DBV, DIMD, DIMD merge, OBIC, TIMD, PDP, intra merge mode, MRL, TMRL, EMRL, intra luma fusion, intra chroma fusion, SGPM, IBC, fractional BV, bi-IBC, PDPC, etc. ii) For example, a variant mode of the above method.
- a CCLM/CCCM/CCP/LM/CCRM based method i) For example, LM, CCLM, MMLM, CCCM, GLM, NS-CCCM, MDF-CCCM, GL-CCCM, BVG- CCCM, inter CCCM, CCRM, LBCCP, inter CCP merge mode, intra CCP merge mode, a CCP fusion mode, etc.
- ii) For example, a variant mode of the above method.
- An inter coded method i) For example, an inter merge mode.
- ii) For example, an inter AMVP mode.
- iii) For example, AMVP-merge, Affine, sbTMVP, subblock merge, pixel affine, affine DMVR, ADMVR, DMVR, BDOF, GPM-MMVD, GPM-TM, GPM, GPM inter-intra, CIIP-PDPC, CIIP-TM, CIIP-TIMD, CIIP, CIIP with subblock based motion compensation, MMVD, affine MMVD, MHP, OBMC, TM-OBMC, LIC, bi-LIC, etc.
- An IBC coded method i) For example, an IBC merge mode.
- an IBC AMVP mode For example, RR-IBC, IBC-CIIP, IBC-GPM, IBC-LIC, IBC-MBVD, filtered IBC, IBC-TM, etc.
- iv) For example, a variant mode of the above method.
- Palette mode i) For example, a variant mode of Palette mode.
- a fusion/blending based method i) For example, an intra and inter blended method.
- an intra and intra blended method For example, intraTMP fusion, DIMD fusion, TIMD fusion, intra luma fusion, intra chroma fusion, SGPM intra-intra, etc. iii)
- an inter and inter blended method For example, bi-predictive inter, BCW, GPM-inter-inter, MHP, etc. iv)
- a CCP and intra/inter/IBC blended method For example, inter CCCM which blends inter and CCP.
- inter CCCM which blends inter and CCP.
- inter CCCM merge which blends inter and CCP.
- intra CCCM fusion which blends intra and CCP.
- intra chroma fusion which blends intra and CCP.
- a CCP and CCP blended method For example, intra CCCM fusion which blends one CCP and another CCP.
- intra and IBC blended method For example, CIIP-intra-IBC, GPM-intra-IBC, SGPM intra-IBC, etc. vii)
- an inter and IBC blended method For example, CIIP-IBC-inter, GPM-IBC-inter, etc. viii)
- an IBC and IBC blended method (1) For example, bi-IBC, GPM-IBC-IBC, etc. ix) For example, a variant mode of the above method.
- the disclosed method may be used for single tree coding. 18) The disclosed method may be used for dual tree coding. 19) The disclosed method may be used for chroma coding. 20) The disclosed method may be used for luma coding. 21) The disclosed method may be used for inter block coding. 22) The disclosed method may be used for intra block coding. 23) The disclosed method may be used for IBC/intraTMP/DBV block coding. 24) The disclosed method may be used in a intra (such as I) slice. 25) The disclosed method may be used in a inter (such as B or P or low-delay B) slice.
- Whether to and/or how to apply the disclosed methods above may be signalled at sequence level/group of pictures level/picture level/slice level/tile group level, such as in sequence header/picture header/SPS/VPS/DPS/DCI/PPS/APS/slice header/tile group header.
- 27) Whether to and/or how to apply the disclosed methods above may be signalled at PB/TB/CB/PU/TU/CU/VPDU/CTU/CTU row/slice/tile/sub-picture/other kinds of region contain more than one sample or pixel.
- Whether to and/or how to apply the disclosed methods above may be dependent on coded information, such as block size, colour format, single/dual tree partitioning, colour component, slice/picture type.
- block may represent a coding tree block (CTB) , a coding tree unit (CTU) , a coding block (CB) , a coding unit (CU) , a prediction unit (PU) , a transform unit (TU) , a prediction block (PB) , a transform block (TB) , a subblock, a tile, a slice, a subpicture, a video processing unit comprising multiple samples/pixels, and/or the like.
- a block may be rectangular or non-rectangular.
- an adjacent spatial candidate may also be referred to as a spatial adjacent candidate
- a non-adjacent spatial candidate may also be referred to as a spatial non-adjacent candidate
- an adjacent temporal candidate may also be referred to as a temporal adjacent candidate
- a non-adjacent temporal candidate may also be referred to as a temporal non-adjacent candidate.
- chained motion vector may refer to a motion vector or a block vector that is determined based on a guiding motion vector or a guiding block vector.
- the chained motion vector may also be referred to as a chained block vector.
- a motion vector or a block vector for a block that is pointed by the guiding motion vector (or the guiding block vector) may be determined to be the chained motion vector.
- a vector sum of the guiding motion vector (or the guiding block vector) and the motion vector or the block vector for the block that is pointed by the guiding motion vector (or the guiding block vector) may be determined to be the chained motion vector.
- such a tracing process may be iterated for several rounds so as to obtain a chained motion vector.
- the motion vector (or block vector) of the current block may be set as a guiding motion vector, and the following tracing process is performed iteratively: determining a chained motion vector of the current block based on the guiding motion vector and at least one motion vector (or block vector) of a reference block pointed by the guiding motion vector; and setting the determined chained motion vector as the guiding motion vector.
- the tracing process may be terminated when a terminating condition is met.
- the terminating condition may be that a predetermined number of iterations have been performed.
- An example for chained block vectors is shown in Fig. 46. It should be understood that the possible implementations of the chained motion vector described here are merely illustrative and therefore should not be construed as limiting the present disclosure in any way.
- Fig. 60 illustrates a flowchart of a method 6000 for video processing in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure.
- the method 6000 may be implemented during a conversion between a current block of a current picture of a video and a bitstream of the video.
- the method 6000 starts at 6002 where a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for the current block are determined, and the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates are not indicated in the bitstream.
- the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may be derived at an encoder and/or a decoder without being signaled in the bitstream.
- the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may be determined based on a decoder derived scheme, such as a template cost based scheme or a bilateral cost based scheme.
- the conversion is performed based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates.
- the conversion may include encoding the current block into the bitstream.
- the conversion may include decoding the current block from the bitstream.
- the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates for the current block are determined without being indicated in the bitstream.
- the proposed method can advantageously save the bits for signaling such a pair of bi-directional MVP candidates, and thus the coding efficiency can be improved.
- a first MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may be determined based on a first reference picture list (RPL) for the current block, and a second MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may be determined based on a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL.
- RPL reference picture list
- the first RPL may be RPL0
- the second RPL may be RPL1.
- the first RPL may be RPL1
- the second RPL may be RPL0.
- the first MVP candidate and the second MVP candidate may be determined based on a cost metric, such as a bilateral cost, a template cost, or the like.
- the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may be one of all possible combinations of MVP candidates based on the first RPL and MVP candidates based on the second RPL that has a minimum value of the cost metric. For example, assume that there are M MVP candidates from RPL0, and N MVP candidates from RPL1, where M and N are integers. In this case, one MVP candidate pair ⁇ mvp-L0, mvp-L1 ⁇ among the M ⁇ N possible MVP candidate pairs may be selected for the bi-directional AMVP prediction, based on the pair which has the minimum bilateral cost (or template cost) . In this case, indexes of the first and second MVP candidates among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may be not indicated in the bitstream, so as to save the bits for signaling such a pair of MVP candidates.
- the method may be by default used for a bi-directional advanced motion vector prediction (AMVP) coding mode.
- AMVP advanced motion vector prediction
- an MVP index may be indicated in the bitstream for a uni-directional AMVP coded block.
- a first reference picture used for a first RPL for the current block and a second reference picture used for a second RPL for the current block may be determined based on a cost metric, such as a bilateral cost, a template cost, or the like.
- a pair of the first reference picture and the second reference picture may be one of all possible combinations of reference pictures from the first RPL and reference pictures from the second RPL that has a minimum value of the cost metric. For example, assume there are M reference pictures from RPL0, and N reference pictures from RPL1, where M and N are integers.
- one reference picture pair ⁇ refIdx-L0, refIdx-L1 ⁇ among the M ⁇ N possible reference picture pairs may be selected for the bi-directional AMVP prediction, based on the pair which has the minimum bilateral cost (or template cost) .
- an index of the first reference picture and an index of the second reference picture may be not indicated in the bitstream, so as to save the bits for signaling such a pair of reference pictures.
- At least one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may be refined based on a decoder derived scheme, such as a bilateral matching based scheme, a template matching based scheme or the like.
- the at least one MVP candidate may only comprise a first MVP candidate based on a first RPL for the current block.
- the at least one MVP candidate may only comprise a second MVP candidate based on a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL.
- the at least one MVP candidate may comprise both the first MVP candidate and the second MVP candidate.
- the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may comprise a first MVP candidate based on a first reference picture from a first RPL for the current block and a second MVP candidate based on a second reference picture from a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL.
- Information regarding whether to apply the bilateral matching based scheme or the template matching based scheme to refine the at least one MVP candidate may be determined based on at least one of the following: a first picture order count (POC) distance between the current picture and the first reference picture or a second POC distance between the current picture and the second reference picture. For example, if the first POC distance is not equal to the second POC distance, the template matching based scheme may be applied to refine the at least one MVP candidate. If the first POC distance is equal to the second POC distance, the bilateral matching based scheme may be applied to refine the at least one MVP candidate.
- POC picture order count
- the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may comprise a first MVP candidate based on a first reference picture from a first RPL for the current block and a second MVP candidate based on a second reference picture from a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL, and if a POC distance between the current picture and the first reference picture is not equal to a POC distance between the current picture and the second reference picture, a bilateral matching may be applied to the current block. In some embodiments, if an AMVP-merge mode is applied to the current block, bilateral matching may be applied to refine a pair of bi-directional motion vector (MV) candidates for the current block.
- MV bi-directional motion vector
- whether to refine both of the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates or only one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may be determined based on at least one of the following: bi-prediction with CU-level weight (BCW) weights associated with the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates, POC distances associated with the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates, or template costs associated with the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates.
- BCW CU-level weight
- one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a larger BCW weight may be refined.
- one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a smaller BCW weight may be refined.
- one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a shorter POC distance may be refined.
- one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a longer POC distance may be refined.
- one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a smaller template cost may be refined.
- one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a larger template cost may be refined.
- motion vector refinement may be applied before motion vector reordering. For example, at least one MV candidate for the current block may be refined, and the motion vector reordering may be applied based on the refined at least one MV candidate. In some alternative embodiments, motion vector refinement may be applied after motion vector reordering. For example, a set of MV candidates for the current block may be reordered, and at least one MV candidate may be selected from the reordered set of MV candidates, and the selected at least one MV candidate may be refined.
- the proposed method may be applied for an AMVP-based mode.
- the AMVP-based mode may comprise a coding unit (CU) based AMVP mode, an affine-based AMVP mode, a symmetric motion vector difference (SMVD) mode, and/or the like.
- the method may be only applied for an SMVD mode.
- information regarding whether the proposed method is applied may be signaled at a block level. For example, such information may be signaled for each video block.
- the proposed method may be applied by default without explicit signaling.
- the proposed method may be allowed to be applied if a reference picture from a first RPL for the current block precedes the current picture in a display order and a reference picture from a second RPL for the current block follows the current picture in the display order. In some embodiments, if a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a first RPL for the current block is equal to a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a second RPL for the current block, the proposed method may be allowed to be applied.
- a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a first RPL for the current block is not equal to a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a second RPL for the current block
- the proposed method may be allowed to be applied.
- an SMVD mode may be allowed to be applied.
- the proposed method may be allowed to be applied to the current block. In some embodiments, if a BCW mode is applied to the current block, an SMVD mode may be allowed to be applied to the current block. In some embodiments, if a local illumination compensation (LIC) mode is applied to the current block, the proposed method may be allowed to be applied to the current block.
- LIC local illumination compensation
- the solutions in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure can advantageously improve coding efficiency and coding quality.
- a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium stores a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing.
- the method comprises: determining a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for a current block of a current picture of the video, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream; and generating the bitstream based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates.
- MVP motion vector prediction
- a method for storing bitstream of a video comprises: determining a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for a current block of a current picture of the video, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream; generating the bitstream based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates; and storing the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
- MVP motion vector prediction
- Fig. 61 illustrates a flowchart of another method 6100 for video processing in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure.
- the method 6100 may be implemented during a conversion between a current block of a video and a bitstream of the video.
- the method 6100 starts at 6102 where an AMVP motion vector candidate for the current block is obtained.
- the AMVP motion vector candidate may be derived based on a spatial neighboring block for the current block or a temporal neighboring block for the current block.
- the AMVP motion vector candidate is refined based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate.
- the target cost metric may comprise a sum of absolute difference (SAD) , a sum of absolute transformed difference (SATD) , a weighted SAD, a sum of squares for error (SSE) , mean squared error (MSE) , or the like. It should be understood that the possible implementations of the target cost metric described here are merely illustrative and therefore should not be construed as limiting the present disclosure in any way.
- the first set of samples associated with the current block may correspond to a template of the current block
- the second set of samples associated with the reference block may correspond to a template of the reference block
- the target cost metric indicates a difference between the template of the current block and the template of the reference block.
- the first set of samples associated with the current block may comprise one or more samples of the current block
- the second set of samples associated with the reference block may comprise one or more samples of the reference block.
- the conversion is performed based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate.
- the conversion may include encoding the current block into the bitstream.
- the conversion may include decoding the current block from the bitstream.
- the AMVP motion vector candidate is refined based on a cost metric.
- the proposed method can advantageously improve a quality of the AMVP motion vector candidate that is finally used for coding the current block, and thus the coding quality can be improved.
- the target cost metric that is used may be dependent on an index of the AMVP motion vector candidate, a prediction scheme for the current block, and/or the like.
- the AMVP motion vector candidate may be an affine AMVP motion vector candidate.
- whether the target cost metric is SAD or SATD may be dependent on an index of the affine AMVP motion vector candidate in an AMVP list for the current block.
- whether the target cost metric is SAD or weighted SAD may be dependent on an index of the affine AMVP motion vector candidate in an AMVP list for the current block.
- the AMVP motion vector candidate may be an inter AMVP motion vector candidate.
- whether the target cost metric is SAD or SATD may be dependent on an index of the inter AMVP motion vector candidate in an AMVP list for the current block.
- whether the target cost metric is SAD or weighted SAD may be dependent on an index of the inter AMVP motion vector candidate in an AMVP list for the current block.
- the target cost metric may be determined based on a parity of an index of the AMVP motion vector candidate. For example, if the index is an even number, a first candidate cost metric may be selected as the target cost metric, and if the index is an odd number, a second candidate cost metric may be selected as the target cost metric. Alternatively, if the index is an even number, the second candidate cost metric may be selected as the target cost metric, and if the index is an odd number, the first candidate cost metric may be selected as the target cost metric.
- the solutions in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure can advantageously improve coding efficiency and coding quality.
- a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium stores a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing.
- the method comprises: obtaining an AMVP motion vector candidate for a current block of the video; refining the AMVP motion vector candidate based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate; and generating the bitstream based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate.
- a method for storing bitstream of a video comprises: obtaining an AMVP motion vector candidate for a current block of the video; refining the AMVP motion vector candidate based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate; generating the bitstream based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate; and storing the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
- Fig. 62 illustrates a flowchart of another method 6200 for video processing in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure.
- the method 6200 may be implemented during a conversion between a current block of a video and a bitstream of the video.
- the method 6200 starts at 6202 where a set of candidates for the current block is obtained.
- a candidate may comprise a motion candidate, a mode candidate, a cross-component prediction (CCP) model candidate, a filter model candidate, and/or the like.
- CCP cross-component prediction
- the set of candidates may be derived based on at least one spatial neighboring block for the current block and/or at least one temporal neighboring block for the current block.
- a reordering process or a pruning process is applied on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates.
- a distance metric for a candidate indicates a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined.
- the distance indicated by the distance metric may be a displacement between the current block and the first block.
- the distance indicated by the distance metric may be determined based on a horizontal displacement between the current block and the first block and/or a vertical displacement between the current block and the first block.
- the distance indicated by the distance metric measures a distance between the current block and the first block. If the first block and the current block are located in different pictures, the distance indicated by the distance metric measures a distance between the first block and a collocated block of the current block in a picture comprising the first block.
- the conversion is performed based on the applying.
- the conversion may include encoding the current block into the bitstream.
- the conversion may include decoding the current block from the bitstream.
- the set of candidate is reordered or pruned based on a distance metric.
- the proposed method can advantageously improve a quality of the candidate that is finally used for coding the current block, and thus the coding quality can be improved.
- a penalty factor may be applied to a value of a cost metric (such as a template cost, a bilateral cost or the like) for a candidate among the set of candidates. For example, the value of the cost metric for the candidate may be multiplied by the penalty factor. Alternatively, the penalty factor may be added to the value of the cost metric for the candidate. It should be understood that the above examples are described merely for purpose of description. The scope of the present disclosure is not limited in this respect.
- the penalty factor may be determined based on a value of the distance metric for the candidate.
- the penalty factor may be positively correlated with the value of the distance metric for the candidate.
- the penalty factor may also be negatively correlated with the value of the distance metric for the candidate.
- the penalty factor may be determined based on a type of the candidate. For example, a penalty factor for a candidate of one of at least one predetermined type may be larger than a penalty factor for a candidate of a type different from the at least one predetermined type.
- the at least one predetermined type comprise a temporal candidate, a chained motion vector based candidate, and/or the like.
- a candidate with a larger value of the distance metric may be put after a candidate with a smaller value of the distance metric.
- a candidate with a larger value of the distance metric may be put before a candidate with a smaller value of the distance metric.
- a pruning criterion of the pruning process may be based on the value of the distance metric. For example, a plurality of candidates with similar values of the distance metric may be determined to be redundant candidates, and the plurality of candidates may be pruned.
- a pruning criterion of the pruning process may be based on diversity check related to at least one of the following: a motion vector difference, a reference picture index, a POC distance, a quantization parameter, or a parameter for determining a rate-distortion cost.
- a plurality of candidates among the set of candidates close to each other may be clustered to obtain a set of sparse candidates.
- the clustering may be performed based on discarding one or more subsequent candidate close to the first candidate among a set of adjacent candidates.
- the clustering may be performed based on an intermediate block that locates in-between blocks corresponding to the plurality of candidates.
- one or more chained motion vector candidates may be generated by using one of the set of sparse candidates as a guiding motion vector.
- this method may be used for an inter prediction mode, such as an affine mode, a regular inter mode, or the like.
- the solutions in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure can advantageously improve coding efficiency and coding quality.
- a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium stores a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing.
- the method comprises: obtaining a set of candidates for a current block of the video; applying a reordering process or a pruning process on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates, a distance metric for a candidate indicating a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined; and generating the bitstream based on the applying.
- a method for storing bitstream of a video comprises: obtaining a set of candidates for a current block of the video; applying a reordering process or a pruning process on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates, a distance metric for a candidate indicating a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined; generating the bitstream based on the applying; and storing the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
- any of the above-described methods may be allowed to be applied to a block coded with an intra mode, a cross-component based mode, an inter mode, an intra block copy (IBC) based mode, a palette mode, or a blending-based mode, and/or the like.
- IBC intra block copy
- the intra mode may comprise at least one of the following: an extrapolation filter-based intra prediction (EIP) mode, an EIP merge mode, an intra template matching prediction (IntraTMP) mode, a direct block vector (DBV) mode, a decoder side intra mode derivation (DIMD) mode, a DIMD merge mode, an occurrence based intra coding (OBIC) mode, a template-based intra mode derivation (TIMD) mode, a matrix-based position dependent intra prediction (PDP) mode, an intra merge mode, a multiple reference line (MRL) mode, a template-based multiple reference line (TMRL) mode, an extended multiple reference line (EMRL) mode, an intra luma fusion mode, an intra chroma fusion mode, a spatial geometric partitioning mode (SGPM) , an intra block copy (IBC) , a fractional block vector (BV) , a bidirectional IBC (bi-IBC) mode, or a position dependent intra prediction combination (PDPC)
- EIP extrapol
- the cross-component based mode may comprise at least one of the following: a linear model (LM) mode, a cross-component prediction (CCP) mode, a cross-component linear model (CCLM) mode, a multi-model linear model (MMLM) mode, a convolutional cross-component model (CCCM) mode, a gradient linear model (GLM) mode, a non-downsampled convolutional cross-component model (NS-CCCM) , a multiple downsample filter based convolutional cross-component model (MDF-CCCM) mode, a gradient and location based convolutional cross-component model (GL-CCCM) , a block-vector guided convolutional cross-component model (BVG-CCCM) , a convolutional cross-component model for inter block (inter CCCM) mode, a cross-component residual model (CCRM) mode, a local boosting cross-component prediction (LBCCP) mode, an inter CCP
- LM linear model
- the inter mode may comprise at least one of the following: an inter merge mode, an inter advanced motion vector prediction (AMVP) mode, an AMVP-merge mode, an affine mode, a subblock-based temporal motion vector prediction (SbTMVP) mode, a subblock merge mode, a pixel affine mode, a decoder side motion vector refinement (DMVR) , a bi-directional optical flow (BDOF) mode, a geometric partitioning mode (GPM) mode, a GPM with merge mode with motion vector difference (GPM-MMVD) mode, a GPM with template matching (GPM-TM) mode, a GPM inter-intra mode, a combined inter and intra prediction (CIIP) mode, a CIIP-PDPC mode, a CIIP-TM mode, a CIIP-TIMD mode, a CIIP with subblock based motion compensation mode, a MMVD mode, an affine MMVD mode, a multi-hypothesis prediction (CIIP) mode, a
- the IBC-based mode may comprise at least one of the following: an IBC merge mode, an IBC AMVP mode, a reconstruction-reordered IBC (RR-IBC) mode, an IBC merge mode with block vector differences (IBC-MBVD) mode, a combined intra block copy and intra prediction (IBC-CIIP) mode, an IBC with geometric partitioning mode (IBC-GPM) mode, an IBC with local illumination compensation (IBC-LIC) mode, a filter IBC mode, or an IBC with template matching (IBC-TM) mode.
- an IBC merge mode an IBC AMVP mode
- RR-IBC reconstruction-reordered IBC
- IBC-MBVD IBC merge mode with block vector differences
- IBC-CIIP combined intra block copy and intra prediction
- IBC-GPM IBC with geometric partitioning mode
- IBC-LIC IBC with local illumination compensation
- filter IBC mode or an IBC with template matching (IBC-TM) mode.
- the blending-based mode may comprise at least one of the following: an intra and inter blending mode, an intra and intra blending mode, an inter and inter blending mode, a CCP and intra blending mode, a CCP and inter blending mode, a CCP and IBC blending mode, a CCP and CCP blending mode, an intra and IBC blending mode, an inter and IBC blending mode, or an IBC and IBC blending mode.
- the intra and inter blending mode may comprise at least one of the following: a CIIP-intra-inter mode, a CIIP-PDPC-InterMerge mode, a CIIP-TIMD-TMmerge mode, a CIIP-intra-affine mode, a CIIP-intra-SbTMVP mode, or a GPM-intra-inter mode.
- the intra and intra blending mode may comprise at least one of the following: an intraTMP fusion mode, a DIMD fusion mode, a TIMD fusion mode, an intra luma fusion mode, an intra chroma fusion mode, or an SGPM intra-intra mode.
- the inter and inter blending mode may comprise at least one of the following: a bi-predictive inter mode, a BCW mode, a GPM-inter-inter mode, or an MHP mode.
- the CCP and intra blending mode may comprise at least one of the following: an intra CCCM fusion mode blending an intra prediction and a CCP prediction, or an intra chroma fusion blending an intra prediction and a CCP prediction.
- the CCP and inter blending mode may comprise at least one of the following: an inter CCCM blending an inter prediction and a CCP prediction, or an inter CCCM merge blending an inter prediction and a CCP prediction.
- the CCP and CCP blending mode may comprise an intra CCCM fusion blending more than one CCP prediction.
- the intra and IBC blending mode may comprise at least one of the following: a CIIP-intra-IBC mode, a GPM-intra-IBC mode, an SGPM intra-IBC mode.
- the inter and IBC blending mode may comprise at least one of the following: a CIIP-IBC-inter mode or a GPM-IBC-inter mode.
- the IBC and IBC blending mode may comprise at least one of the following: a bi-IBC mode, or a GPM-IBC-IBC mode.
- any of the above-described methods may be applied for a single tree coding, a dual tree coding, a chroma coding, a luma coding, an inter block coding, an intra block coding, an IBC coding, an intraTMP coding, or a DBV block coding, an intra slice, an inter slice, and/or the like.
- whether to and/or how to apply any of the above-described methods may be indicated at one of the following: a sequence level, a group of pictures level, a picture level, a slice level, or a tile group level. Additionally or alternatively, whether to and/or how to apply any of the above-described methods may be indicated in one of the following: a sequence header, a picture header, a sequence parameter set (SPS) , a video parameter set (VPS) , a decoding parameter set (DPS) , a decoding capability information (DCI) , a picture parameter set (PPS) , an adaptation parameter sets (APS) , a slice header, or a tile group header.
- SPS sequence parameter set
- VPS video parameter set
- DPS decoding parameter set
- DCI decoding capability information
- PPS picture parameter set
- APS adaptation parameter sets
- whether to and/or how to apply any of the above-described methods may be indicated at a region containing more than one sample or pixel.
- the region may comprise a prediction block (PB) , a transform block (TB) , a coding block (CB) , a prediction unit (PU) , a transform unit (TU) , a coding unit (CU) , a virtual pipeline data unit (VPDU) , a coding tree unit (CTU) , a CTU row, a slice, a tile, a sub-picture, or the like.
- whether to and/or how to apply any of the above-described methods may be dependent on coded information.
- the coded information may comprise a block size, a color format, a single tree partitioning, a dual tree partitioning, a color component, a slice type, or a picture type. It should be understood that the possible implementations of the coded information described here are merely illustrative and therefore should not be construed as limiting the present disclosure in any way.
- a method for video processing comprising: determining, for a conversion between a current block of a current picture of a video and a bitstream of the video, a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for the current block, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream; and performing the conversion based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates.
- MVP motion vector prediction
- Clause 2 The method of clause 1, wherein a first MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates is determined based on a first reference picture list (RPL) for the current block, and a second MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates is determined based on a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL.
- RPL reference picture list
- Clause 4 The method of clause 3, wherein the decoder derived scheme comprises a template cost based scheme or a bilateral cost based scheme.
- Clause 5 The method of any of clauses 2-4, wherein the first MVP candidate and the second MVP candidate are determined based on a cost metric.
- Clause 7 The method of any of clauses 5-6, wherein indexes of the first and second MVP candidates among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates are not indicated in the bitstream.
- Clause 8 The method of any of clauses 1-7, wherein the method is used for a bi-directional advanced motion vector prediction (AMVP) coding mode.
- AMVP advanced motion vector prediction
- Clause 10 The method of any of clauses 1-9, wherein a first reference picture used for a first RPL for the current block and a second reference picture used for a second RPL for the current block are determined based on a cost metric.
- Clause 14 The method of any of clauses 1-14, wherein at least one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates are refined based on a decoder derived scheme.
- Clause 15 The method of clause 14, wherein the at least one MVP candidate only comprises a first MVP candidate based on a first RPL for the current block, or the at least one MVP candidate only comprises a second MVP candidate based on a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL, or the at least one MVP candidate comprises both the first MVP candidate and the second MVP candidate.
- Clause 16 The method of any of clauses 14-15, wherein the decoder derived scheme comprises a bilateral matching based scheme or a template matching based scheme.
- the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates comprises a first MVP candidate based on a first reference picture from a first RPL for the current block and a second MVP candidate based on a second reference picture from a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL, and whether to apply the bilateral matching based scheme or the template matching based scheme to refine the at least one MVP candidate is determined based on at least one of the following: a first picture order count (POC) distance between the current picture and the first reference picture or a second POC distance between the current picture and the second reference picture.
- POC picture order count
- Clause 18 The method of clause 17, wherein in accordance with a determination that the first POC distance is not equal to the second POC distance, the template matching based scheme is applied to refine the at least one MVP candidate, or in accordance with a determination that the first POC distance is equal to the second POC distance, the bilateral matching based scheme is applied to refine the at least one MVP candidate.
- the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates comprises a first MVP candidate based on a first reference picture from a first RPL for the current block and a second MVP candidate based on a second reference picture from a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL, and in accordance with a determination that a POC distance between the current picture and the first reference picture is not equal to a POC distance between the current picture and the second reference picture, a bilateral matching is applied to the current block.
- Clause 20 The method of any of clauses 1-19, wherein in accordance with a determination that an AMVP-merge mode is applied to the current block, bilateral matching is applied to refine a pair of bi-directional motion vector (MV) candidates for the current block.
- MV motion vector
- Clause 21 The method of any of clauses 1-20, wherein whether to refine both of the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates or only one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates is determined based on at least one of the following: bi-prediction with CU-level weight (BCW) weights associated with the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates, POC distances associated with the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates, or template costs associated with the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates.
- BCW CU-level weight
- Clause 22 The method of clause 21, wherein one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a larger BCW weight is refined, or one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a smaller BCW weight is refined, or one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a shorter POC distance is refined, or one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a longer POC distance is refined, or one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a smaller template cost is refined, or one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a larger template cost is refined.
- Clause 23 The method of any of clauses 1-22, wherein motion vector refinement is applied before motion vector reordering.
- Clause 24 The method of clause 23, wherein at least one MV candidate for the current block is refined, and the motion vector reordering is applied based on the refined at least one MV candidate.
- Clause 25 The method of any of clauses 1-22, wherein motion vector refinement is applied after motion vector reordering.
- Clause 26 The method of clause 25, wherein a set of MV candidates for the current block is reordered, and at least one MV candidate is selected from the reordered set of MV candidates, and the selected at least one MV candidate is refined.
- Clause 27 The method of any of clauses 1-26, wherein the method is applied for an AMVP-based mode.
- the AMVP-based mode comprises at least one of the following: a coding unit (CU) based AMVP mode, an affine-based AMVP mode, or a symmetric motion vector difference (SMVD) mode.
- CU coding unit
- SMVD symmetric motion vector difference
- Clause 29 The method of any of clauses 1-26, wherein the method is only applied for an SMVD mode.
- Clause 30 The method of any of clauses 1-29, wherein information regarding whether the method is applied is signaled at a block level.
- Clause 31 The method of any of clauses 1-29, wherein the method is applied by default without explicit signaling.
- Clause 32 The method of any of clauses 1-31, wherein in accordance with a determination that a reference picture from a first RPL for the current block precedes the current picture in a display order and a reference picture from a second RPL for the current block follows the current picture in the display order, the method is allowed to be applied.
- Clause 33 The method of any of clauses 1-32, wherein in accordance with a determination that a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a first RPL for the current block is equal to a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a second RPL for the current block, the method is allowed to be applied.
- Clause 34 The method of any of clauses 1-33, wherein in accordance with a determination that a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a first RPL for the current block is not equal to a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a second RPL for the current block, the method is allowed to be applied.
- Clause 35 The method of any of clauses 1-34, wherein in accordance with a determination that a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a first RPL for the current block is not equal to a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a second RPL for the current block, an SMVD mode is allowed to be applied.
- Clause 36 The method of any of clauses 1-35, wherein in accordance with a determination that a BCW mode is applied to the current block, the method is allowed to be applied to the current block.
- Clause 37 The method of any of clauses 1-36, wherein in accordance with a determination that a BCW mode is applied to the current block, an SMVD mode is allowed to be applied to the current block.
- Clause 38 The method of any of clauses 1-37, wherein in accordance with a determination that a local illumination compensation (LIC) mode is applied to the current block, the method is allowed to be applied to the current block.
- LIC local illumination compensation
- a method for video processing comprising: obtaining, for a conversion between a current block of a video and a bitstream of the video, an AMVP motion vector candidate for the current block; refining the AMVP motion vector candidate based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate; and performing the conversion based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate.
- the target cost metric comprises at least one of the following: a sum of absolute difference (SAD) , a sum of absolute transformed difference (SATD) , or a weighted SAD.
- Clause 41 The method of any of clauses 39-40, wherein the first set of samples associated with the current block corresponds to a template of the current block, and the second set of samples associated with the reference block corresponds to a template of the reference block.
- Clause 47 The method of any of clauses 39-46, wherein the target cost metric is determined based on a parity of an index of the AMVP motion vector candidate.
- Clause 48 The method of clause 47, wherein in accordance with a determination that the index is an even number, a first candidate cost metric is selected as the target cost metric, and in accordance with a determination that the index is an odd number, a second candidate cost metric is selected as the target cost metric, or wherein in accordance with a determination that the index is an even number, the second candidate cost metric is selected as the target cost metric, and in accordance with a determination that the index is an odd number, the first candidate cost metric is selected as the target cost metric.
- a method for video processing comprising: obtaining, for a conversion between a current block of a video and a bitstream of the video, a set of candidates for the current block; applying a reordering process or a pruning process on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates, a distance metric for a candidate indicating a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined; and performing the conversion based on the applying.
- a candidate comprises at least one of the following: a motion candidate, a mode candidate, a cross-component prediction (CCP) model candidate, or a filter model candidate.
- CCP cross-component prediction
- Clause 51 The method of any of clauses 49-50, wherein a penalty factor is applied to a value of a cost metric for a candidate among the set of candidates.
- Clause 53 The method of any of clauses 51-52, wherein the penalty factor is determined based on a value of the distance metric for the candidate.
- Clause 54 The method of clause 53, wherein the penalty factor is positively correlated with the value of the distance metric for the candidate.
- Clause 55 The method of any of clauses 51-54, wherein the value of the cost metric for the candidate is multiplied by the penalty factor.
- Clause 56 The method of any of clauses 51-55, wherein the penalty factor is determined based on a type of the candidate.
- Clause 57 The method of clause 56, wherein a penalty factor for a candidate of one of at least one predetermined type is larger than a penalty factor for a candidate of a type different from the at least one predetermined type.
- Clause 58 The method of clause 57, wherein the at least one predetermined type comprise at least one of the following: a temporal candidate or a chained motion vector based candidate.
- Clause 59 The method of any of clauses 49-48, wherein in the reordering process, a candidate with a larger value of the distance metric is put after a candidate with a smaller value of the distance metric.
- Clause 60 The method of any of clauses 49-59, wherein the distance indicated by the distance metric is a displacement between the current block and the first block.
- Clause 61 The method of any of clauses 49-60, wherein a pruning criterion of the pruning process is based on the value of the distance metric.
- Clause 62 The method of clause 61, wherein a plurality of candidates with similar values of the distance metric are determined to be redundant candidates, and the plurality of candidates are pruned.
- a pruning criterion of the pruning process is based on diversity check related to at least one of the following: a motion vector difference, a reference picture index, a POC distance, a quantization parameter, or a parameter for determining a rate-distortion cost.
- Clause 64 The method of any of clauses 61-63, wherein a plurality of candidates among the set of candidates close to each other are clustered to obtain a set of sparse candidates.
- Clause 65 The method of clause 64, wherein the clustering is performed based on discarding one or more subsequent candidate close to the first candidate among a set of adjacent candidates, or the clustering is performed based on an intermediate block that locates in-between blocks corresponding to the plurality of candidates.
- Clause 66 The method of any of clauses 64-65, wherein one or more chained motion vector candidates are generated by using one of the set of sparse candidates as a guiding motion vector.
- Clause 67 The method of clause 66, wherein the method is used for an inter prediction mode.
- Clause 68 The method of any of clauses 49-67, wherein the distance indicated by the distance metric is determined based on at least one of the following: a horizontal displacement between the current block and the first block, or a vertical displacement between the current block and the first block.
- Clause 69 The method of any of clauses 49-68, wherein in accordance with a determination that the first block and the current block are located in a same picture, the distance indicated by the distance metric measures a distance between the current block and the first block, or in accordance with a determination that the first block and the current block are located in different pictures, the distance indicated by the distance metric measures a distance between the first block and a collocated block of the current block in a picture comprising the first block.
- Clause 70 The method of any of clauses 1-69, wherein the method is allowed to be applied to a block coded with at least one of the following: an intra mode, a cross-component based mode, an inter mode, an intra block copy (IBC) based mode, a palette mode, or a blending-based mode.
- an intra mode a cross-component based mode
- an inter mode an intra block copy (IBC) based mode
- palette mode or a blending-based mode.
- the intra mode comprises at least one of the following: an extrapolation filter-based intra prediction (EIP) mode, an EIP merge mode, an intra template matching prediction (IntraTMP) mode, a direct block vector (DBV) mode, a decoder side intra mode derivation (DIMD) mode, a DIMD merge mode, an occurrence based intra coding (OBIC) mode, a template-based intra mode derivation (TIMD) mode, a matrix-based position dependent intra prediction (PDP) mode, an intra merge mode, a multiple reference line (MRL) mode, a template-based multiple reference line (TMRL) mode, an extended multiple reference line (EMRL) mode, an intra luma fusion mode, an intra chroma fusion mode, a spatial geometric partitioning mode (SGPM) , an intra block copy (IBC) , a fractional block vector (BV) , a bidirectional IBC (bi-IBC) mode, or a position dependent intra prediction
- EIP extrapolation filter-based intra prediction
- the intra and inter blending mode comprises at least one of the following: a CIIP-intra-inter mode, a CIIP-PDPC-InterMerge mode, a CIIP-TIMD-TMmerge mode, a CIIP-intra-affine mode, a CIIP-intra-SbTMVP mode, or a GPM-intra-inter mode, or wherein the intra and intra blending mode comprises at least one of the following: an intraTMP fusion mode, a DIMD fusion mode, a TIMD fusion mode, an intra luma fusion mode, an intra chroma fusion mode, or an SGPM intra-intra mode, or wherein the inter and inter blending mode comprises at least one of the following: a bi-predictive inter mode, a BCW mode, a GPM-inter-inter mode, or an MHP mode, or wherein the CCP and intra blending mode comprises at least one of the following: an intra CC
- Clause 73 The method of any of clauses 1-72, wherein the method is applied for at least one of the following: a single tree coding, a dual tree coding, a chroma coding, a luma coding, an inter block coding, an intra block coding, an IBC coding, an intraTMP coding, or a DBV block coding, an intra slice, or an inter slice.
- Clause 74 The method of any of clauses 1-73, wherein whether to and/or how to apply the method is indicated at one of the following: a sequence level, a group of pictures level, a picture level, a slice level, or a tile group level.
- Clause 75 The method of any of clauses 1-74, wherein whether to and/or how to apply the method is indicated in one of the following: a sequence header, a picture header, a sequence parameter set (SPS) , a video parameter set (VPS) , a decoding parameter set (DPS) , a decoding capability information (DCI) , a picture parameter set (PPS) , an adaptation parameter sets (APS) , a slice header, or a tile group header.
- SPS sequence parameter set
- VPS video parameter set
- DPS decoding parameter set
- DCI decoding capability information
- PPS picture parameter set
- APS adaptation parameter sets
- Clause 76 The method of any of clauses 1-73, wherein whether to and/or how to apply the method is indicated at a region containing more than one sample or pixel.
- the region comprises at least one of the following: a prediction block (PB) , a transform block (TB) , a coding block (CB) , a prediction unit (PU) , a transform unit (TU) , a coding unit (CU) , a virtual pipeline data unit (VPDU) , a coding tree unit (CTU) , a CTU row, a slice, a tile, or a sub-picture.
- PB prediction block
- TB transform block
- CB coding block
- PU prediction unit
- TU transform unit
- CU coding unit
- VPDU virtual pipeline data unit
- CTU coding tree unit
- Clause 78 The method of any of clauses 1-73, wherein whether to and/or how to apply the method is dependent on coded information.
- Clause 79 The method of clause 78, wherein the coded information comprises at least one of the following: a block size, a color format, a single tree partitioning, a dual tree partitioning, a color component, a slice type, or a picture type.
- Clause 80 The method of any of clauses 1-79, wherein the conversion includes encoding the current block into the bitstream.
- Clause 81 The method of any of clauses 1-79, wherein the conversion includes decoding the current block from the bitstream.
- Clause 82 An apparatus for video processing comprising a processor and a non-transitory memory with instructions thereon, wherein the instructions upon execution by the processor, cause the processor to perform a method in accordance with any of clauses 1-81.
- Clause 83 A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing instructions that cause a processor to perform a method in accordance with any of clauses 1-81.
- a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium storing a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing, wherein the method comprises: determining a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for a current block of a current picture of the video, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream; and generating the bitstream based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates.
- MVP motion vector prediction
- a method for storing a bitstream of a video comprising: determining a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for a current block of a current picture of the video, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream; generating the bitstream based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates; and storing the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
- MVP motion vector prediction
- a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium storing a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing, wherein the method comprises: obtaining an AMVP motion vector candidate for a current block of the video; refining the AMVP motion vector candidate based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate; and generating the bitstream based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate.
- a method for storing a bitstream of a video comprising: obtaining an AMVP motion vector candidate for a current block of the video; refining the AMVP motion vector candidate based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate; generating the bitstream based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate; and storing the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
- a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium storing a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing, wherein the method comprises: obtaining a set of candidates for a current block of the video; applying a reordering process or a pruning process on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates, a distance metric for a candidate indicating a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined; and generating the bitstream based on the applying.
- a method for storing a bitstream of a video comprising: obtaining a set of candidates for a current block of the video; applying a reordering process or a pruning process on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates, a distance metric for a candidate indicating a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined; generating the bitstream based on the applying; and storing the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
- Fig. 63 illustrates a block diagram of a computing device 6300 in which various embodiments of the present disclosure can be implemented.
- the computing device 6300 may be implemented as or included in the source device 110 (or the video encoder 114 or 200) or the destination device 120 (or the video decoder 124 or 300) .
- computing device 6300 shown in Fig. 63 is merely for purpose of illustration, without suggesting any limitation to the functions and scopes of the embodiments of the present disclosure in any manner.
- the computing device 6300 includes a general-purpose computing device 6300.
- the computing device 6300 may at least comprise one or more processors or processing units 6310, a memory 6320, a storage unit 6330, one or more communication units 6340, one or more input devices 6350, and one or more output devices 6360.
- the computing device 6300 may be implemented as any user terminal or server terminal having the computing capability.
- the server terminal may be a server, a large-scale computing device or the like that is provided by a service provider.
- the user terminal may for example be any type of mobile terminal, fixed terminal, or portable terminal, including a mobile phone, station, unit, device, multimedia computer, multimedia tablet, Internet node, communicator, desktop computer, laptop computer, notebook computer, netbook computer, tablet computer, personal communication system (PCS) device, personal navigation device, personal digital assistant (PDA) , audio/video player, digital camera/video camera, positioning device, television receiver, radio broadcast receiver, E-book device, gaming device, or any combination thereof, including the accessories and peripherals of these devices, or any combination thereof.
- the computing device 6300 can support any type of interface to a user (such as “wearable” circuitry and the like) .
- the processing unit 6310 may be a physical or virtual processor and can implement various processes based on programs stored in the memory 6320. In a multi-processor system, multiple processing units execute computer executable instructions in parallel so as to improve the parallel processing capability of the computing device 6300.
- the processing unit 6310 may also be referred to as a central processing unit (CPU) , a microprocessor, a controller or a microcontroller.
- the computing device 6300 typically includes various computer storage medium. Such medium can be any medium accessible by the computing device 6300, including, but not limited to, volatile and non-volatile medium, or detachable and non-detachable medium.
- the memory 6320 can be a volatile memory (for example, a register, cache, Random Access Memory (RAM) ) , a non-volatile memory (such as a Read-Only Memory (ROM) , Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM) , or a flash memory) , or any combination thereof.
- the storage unit 6330 may be any detachable or non-detachable medium and may include a machine-readable medium such as a memory, flash memory drive, magnetic disk or another other media, which can be used for storing information and/or data and can be accessed in the computing device 6300.
- a machine-readable medium such as a memory, flash memory drive, magnetic disk or another other media, which can be used for storing information and/or data and can be accessed in the computing device 6300.
- the computing device 6300 may further include additional detachable/non-detachable, volatile/non-volatile memory medium.
- additional detachable/non-detachable, volatile/non-volatile memory medium may be provided.
- a magnetic disk drive for reading from and/or writing into a detachable and non-volatile magnetic disk
- an optical disk drive for reading from and/or writing into a detachable non-volatile optical disk.
- each drive may be connected to a bus (not shown) via one or more data medium interfaces.
- the communication unit 6340 communicates with a further computing device via the communication medium.
- the functions of the components in the computing device 6300 can be implemented by a single computing cluster or multiple computing machines that can communicate via communication connections. Therefore, the computing device 6300 can operate in a networked environment using a logical connection with one or more other servers, networked personal computers (PCs) or further general network nodes.
- PCs personal computers
- the input device 6350 may be one or more of a variety of input devices, such as a mouse, keyboard, tracking ball, voice-input device, and the like.
- the output device 6360 may be one or more of a variety of output devices, such as a display, loudspeaker, printer, and the like.
- the computing device 6300 can further communicate with one or more external devices (not shown) such as the storage devices and display device, with one or more devices enabling the user to interact with the computing device 6300, or any devices (such as a network card, a modem and the like) enabling the computing device 6300 to communicate with one or more other computing devices, if required.
- Such communication can be performed via input/output (I/O) interfaces (not shown) .
- some or all components of the computing device 6300 may also be arranged in cloud computing architecture.
- the components may be provided remotely and work together to implement the functionalities described in the present disclosure.
- cloud computing provides computing, software, data access and storage service, which will not require end users to be aware of the physical locations or configurations of the systems or hardware providing these services.
- the cloud computing provides the services via a wide area network (such as Internet) using suitable protocols.
- a cloud computing provider provides applications over the wide area network, which can be accessed through a web browser or any other computing components.
- the software or components of the cloud computing architecture and corresponding data may be stored on a server at a remote position.
- the computing resources in the cloud computing environment may be merged or distributed at locations in a remote data center.
- Cloud computing infrastructures may provide the services through a shared data center, though they behave as a single access point for the users. Therefore, the cloud computing architectures may be used to provide the components and functionalities described herein from a service provider at a remote location. Alternatively, they may be provided from a conventional server or installed directly or otherwise on a client device.
- the computing device 6300 may be used to implement video encoding/decoding in embodiments of the present disclosure.
- the memory 6320 may include one or more video coding modules 6325 having one or more program instructions. These modules are accessible and executable by the processing unit 6310 to perform the functionalities of the various embodiments described herein.
- the input device 6350 may receive video data as an input 6370 to be encoded.
- the video data may be processed, for example, by the video coding module 6325, to generate an encoded bitstream.
- the encoded bitstream may be provided via the output device 6360 as an output 6380.
- the input device 6350 may receive an encoded bitstream as the input 6370.
- the encoded bitstream may be processed, for example, by the video coding module 6325, to generate decoded video data.
- the decoded video data may be provided via the output device 6360 as the output 6380.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Multimedia (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Compression Or Coding Systems Of Tv Signals (AREA)
Abstract
Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a solution for video processing. A method for video processing is proposed. The method comprises: determining, for a conversion between a current block of a current picture of a video and a bitstream of the video, a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for the current block, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream; and performing the conversion based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates.
Description
FIELDS
Embodiments of the present disclosure relates generally to video processing techniques, and more particularly, to video coding.
In nowadays, digital video capabilities are being applied in various aspects of peoples’ lives. Multiple types of video compression technologies, such as motion picture expert group (MPEG) -2, MPEG-4, international telecommunication union -telecommunication standardization sector (ITU-T) H. 263, ITU-T H. 264/MPEG-4 Part 10 advanced video coding (AVC) , ITU-T H. 265 high efficiency video coding (HEVC) standard, versatile video coding (VVC) standard, have been proposed for video encoding/decoding. However, coding efficiency and/or coding quality of video coding techniques is generally expected to be further improved.
Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a solution for video processing.
In a first aspect, a method for video processing is proposed. The method comprises: determining, for a conversion between a current block of a current picture of a video and a bitstream of the video, a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for the current block, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream; and performing the conversion based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates.
Based on the method in accordance with the first aspect of the present disclosure, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates for the current block are determined without being indicated in the bitstream. Compared with the conventional solution, the proposed method can advantageously save the bits for signaling such a pair of bi-directional MVP candidates, and thus the coding efficiency can be improved.
In a second aspect, another method for video processing is proposed. The method comprises: obtaining, for a conversion between a current block of a video and a bitstream of the video, an AMVP motion vector candidate for the current block; refining the AMVP motion vector candidate based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate; and performing the conversion based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate.
Based on the method in accordance with the second aspect of the present disclosure, the AMVP motion vector candidate is refined based on a cost metric. Compared with the conventional solution, the proposed method can advantageously improve a quality of the AMVP motion vector candidate that is finally used for coding the current block, and thus the coding quality can be improved.
In a third aspect, another method for video processing is proposed. The method comprises: obtaining, for a conversion between a current block of a video and a bitstream of the video, a set of candidates for the current block; applying a reordering process or a pruning process on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates, a distance metric for a candidate indicating a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined; and performing the conversion based on the applying.
Based on the method in accordance with the third aspect of the present disclosure, the set of candidate is reordered or pruned based on a distance metric. Compared with the conventional solution, the proposed method can advantageously improve a quality of the candidate that is finally used for coding the current block, and thus the coding quality can be improved.
In a fourth aspect, an apparatus for video processing is proposed. The apparatus comprises a processor and a non-transitory memory with instructions thereon. The instructions upon execution by the processor, cause the processor to perform a method in accordance with the first, second, or third aspect of the present disclosure.
In a fifth aspect, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is proposed. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores instructions that cause a processor to perform a method in accordance with the first, second, or third aspect of the present disclosure.
In a sixth aspect, another non-transitory computer-readable recording medium is proposed. The non-transitory computer-readable recording medium stores a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing. The method comprises: determining a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for a current block of a current picture of the video, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream; and generating the bitstream based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates.
In a seventh aspect, another non-transitory computer-readable recording medium is proposed. The non-transitory computer-readable recording medium stores a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing. The method comprises: determining a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for a current block of a current picture of the video, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream; generating the bitstream based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates; and storing the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
In an eighth aspect, another non-transitory computer-readable recording medium is proposed. The non-transitory computer-readable recording medium stores a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing. The method comprises: obtaining an AMVP motion vector candidate for a current block of the video; refining the AMVP motion vector candidate based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate; and generating the bitstream based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate.
In a ninth aspect, a method for storing a bitstream of a video is proposed. The method comprises: obtaining an AMVP motion vector candidate for a current block of the video; refining the AMVP motion vector candidate based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate; generating the bitstream based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate; and storing the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
In a tenth aspect, a method for storing a bitstream of a video is proposed. The method comprises: obtaining a set of candidates for a current block of the video; applying a reordering process or a pruning process on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates, a distance metric for a candidate indicating a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined; and generating the bitstream based on the applying.
In an eleventh aspect, a method for storing a bitstream of a video is proposed. The method comprises: obtaining a set of candidates for a current block of the video; applying a reordering process or a pruning process on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates, a distance metric for a candidate indicating a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined; generating the bitstream based on the applying; and storing the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
This Summary is provided to introduce a selection of concepts in a simplified form that are further described below in the Detailed Description. This Summary is not intended to identify key features or essential features of the claimed subject matter, nor is it intended to be used to limit the scope of the claimed subject matter.
Through the following detailed description with reference to the accompanying drawings, the above and other objectives, features, and advantages of example embodiments of the present disclosure will become more apparent. In the example embodiments of the present disclosure, the same reference numerals usually refer to the same components.
Fig. 1 illustrates a block diagram of an example video coding system in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure;
Fig. 2 illustrates a block diagram of an example video encoder in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure;
Fig. 3 illustrates a block diagram of an example video decoder in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure;
Fig. 4 illustrates an illustration of the effect of the slope adjustment parameter “u” ;
Fig. 5 illustrates neighboring blocks (L, A, BL, AR, AL) used in the derivation of a general MPM list;
Fig. 6 illustrates neighboring reconstructed samples used for DIMD chroma mode;
Fig. 7 illustrates intra template matching search area used;
Fig. 8 illustrates the use of IntraTMP block vector for IBC block;
Fig. 9A and Fig. 9B illustrates the division method for angular modes;
Fig. 10 illustrates extended MRL candidate list;
Fig. 11 illustrates an illustration of the template area;
Fig. 12 illustrates spatial part of the convolutional filter;
Fig. 13 illustrates reference area (with its paddings) used to derive the filter coefficients;
Fig. 14 illustrates four Sobel based gradient patterns for GLM;
Fig. 15 illustrates non-downsampled luma samples;
Fig. 16 illustrates reference area for BVG-CCCM;
Fig. 17 illustrates spatial samples used for GL-CCCM;
Fig. 18 illustrates various downsampling filters used in cross-component models;
Fig. 19 illustrates filter on samples of MM-CCLM/MM-CCCM;
Fig. 20 illustrates the template adjacent to the current chroma CU;
Fig. 21 illustrates spatial GPM candidates;
Fig. 22 illustrates a GPM template;
Fig. 23 illustrates a GPM blending;
Fig. 24 illustrates a transform selection process for directional planar modes;
Fig. 25 illustrates luma blocks used to derive direct block vector;
Fig. 26 illustrates three EIP filter shapes;
Fig. 27 illustrates three types of reconstructed area for EIP filter;
Fig. 28 illustrates L shaped neighborhood for a given predicted block;
Fig. 29 illustrates spatial neighboring blocks used to derive the spatial merge candidates;
Fig. 30 illustrates subblock templates generation of SbTMVP;
Fig. 31A to Fig. 31C illustrate possible MVs of the proposed mode;
Fig. 32 illustrates template matching performs on a search area around initial MV;
Fig. 33 illustrates diamond regions in the search area;
Fig. 34 illustrates a template;
Fig. 35A and Fig. 35B illustrate the first HPT and the second HPT, respectively;
Fig. 36A and Fig. 36B illustrate spatial neighbors for deriving affine merge/AMVP candidates;
Fig. 37 illustrates from non-adjacent neighbors to the first type of constructed affine merge/AMVP candidates;
Fig. 38 illustrates frequency responses of the interpolation filter and the VVC interpolation filter at half-pel phase;
Fig. 39 illustrates template and reference samples of the template in reference pictures;
Fig. 40 illustrates template and reference samples of the template for block with sub-block motion using the motion information of the subblocks of the current block;
Fig. 41 illustrates additional directions along k×π/8 diagonal angles;
Fig. 42 illustrates the neighboring 4 x 4 subblocks that are used for RMVF parameter derivation;
Fig. 43 illustrates the ramp function for the weights for GPM blending;
Fig. 44A-Fig. 44C illustrate an example GPM with inter and intra prediction, respectively;
Fig. 44D illustrates an example of GPM with intra and intra prediction;
Fig. 45 illustrates the edge on templates;
Fig. 46 illustrates an example of how to derive AR-BVP;
Fig. 47 illustrates the five positions in Bn;
Fig. 48 illustrates padding candidates for the replacement of the zero-vector in the IBC list;
Fig. 49 illustrates IBC candidate clustering based on the L2 distance and the TM cost;
Fig. 50 illustrates IBC reference region depending on current CU position;
Fig. 51 illustrates reference area for IBC;
Fig. 52 illustrates prediction of BVD;
Fig. 53 illustrates motion compensated boundary padding method;
Fig. 54 illustrates an example of deriving a M×4 padding block with a left padding direction;
Fig. 55A and Fig. 55B illustrates BV adjustment;
Fig. 56 illustrates the InterCCCM method on the decoder;
Fig. 57 illustrates luma samples L0 to L5 in relation to the chroma sample C;
Fig. 58A illustrates an example of pre-defined positions;
Fig. 58B illustrates an example of pre-defined positions;
Fig. 58C illustrates an example of pre-defined positions;
Fig. 58D illustrates an example of pre-defined positions;
Fig. 59A and Fig. 59B illustrates example of possible positions of adjacent and non-adjacent neighboring blocks relative to the current or collocated block, respectively;
Fig. 60 illustrates a flowchart of a method for video processing in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure;
Fig. 61 illustrates a flowchart of a method for video processing in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure;
Fig. 62 illustrates a flowchart of a method for video processing in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure; and
Fig. 63 illustrates a block diagram of a computing device in which various embodiments of the present disclosure can be implemented.
Throughout the drawings, the same or similar reference numerals usually refer to the same or similar elements.
Principle of the present disclosure will now be described with reference to some embodiments. It is to be understood that these embodiments are described only for the purpose of illustration and help those skilled in the art to understand and implement the present disclosure, without suggesting any limitation as to the scope of the disclosure. The disclosure described herein can be implemented in various manners other than the ones described below.
In the following description and claims, unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skills in the art to which this disclosure belongs.
References in the present disclosure to “one embodiment, ” “an embodiment, ” “an example embodiment, ” and the like indicate that the embodiment described may include a particular feature, structure, or characteristic, but it is not necessary that every embodiment includes the particular feature, structure, or characteristic. Moreover, such phrases are not necessarily referring to the same embodiment. Further, when a particular feature, structure, or characteristic is described in connection with an example embodiment, it is submitted that it is within the knowledge of one skilled in the art to affect such feature, structure, or characteristic in connection with other embodiments whether or not explicitly described.
It shall be understood that although the terms “first” and “second” etc. may be used herein to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first element could be termed a second element, and similarly, a second element could be termed a first element, without departing from the scope of example embodiments. As used herein, the term “and/or” includes any and all combinations of one or more of the listed terms.
The terminology used herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting of example embodiments. As used herein, the singular forms “a” , “an” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will be further understood that the terms “comprises” , “comprising” , “has” , “having” , “includes” and/or “including” , when used herein, specify the presence of stated features, elements, and/or components etc., but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, elements, components and/or combinations thereof.
Example Environment
Example Environment
Fig. 1 is a block diagram that illustrates an example video coding system 100 that may utilize the techniques of this disclosure. As shown, the video coding system 100 may include a source device 110 and a destination device 120. The source device 110 can be also referred to as a video encoding device, and the destination device 120 can be also referred to as a video decoding device. In operation, the source device 110 can be configured to generate encoded video data and the destination device 120 can be configured to decode the encoded video data generated by the source device 110. The source device 110 may include a video source 112, a video encoder 114, and an input/output (I/O) interface 116.
The video source 112 may include a source such as a video capture device. Examples of the video capture device include, but are not limited to, an interface to receive video data from a video content provider, a computer graphics system for generating video data, and/or a combination thereof.
The video data may comprise one or more pictures. The video encoder 114 encodes the video data from the video source 112 to generate a bitstream. The bitstream may include a sequence of bits that form a coded representation of the video data. The bitstream may include coded pictures and associated data. The coded picture is a coded representation of a picture. The associated data may include sequence parameter sets, picture parameter sets, and other syntax structures. The I/O interface 116 may include a modulator/demodulator and/or a transmitter. The encoded video data may be transmitted directly to destination device 120 via the I/O interface 116 through the network 130A. The encoded video data may also be stored onto a storage medium/server 130B for access by destination device 120.
The destination device 120 may include an I/O interface 126, a video decoder 124, and a display device 122. The I/O interface 126 may include a receiver and/or a modem. The I/O interface 126 may acquire encoded video data from the source device 110 or the storage medium/server 130B. The video decoder 124 may decode the encoded video data. The display device 122 may display the decoded video data to a user. The display device 122 may be integrated with the destination device 120, or may be external to the destination device 120 which is configured to interface with an external display device.
The video encoder 114 and the video decoder 124 may operate according to a video compression standard, such as the High Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC) standard, Versatile Video Coding (VVC) standard and other current and/or further standards.
Fig. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a video encoder 200, which may be an example of the video encoder 114 in the system 100 illustrated in Fig. 1, in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure.
The video encoder 200 may be configured to implement any or all of the techniques of this disclosure. In the example of Fig. 2, the video encoder 200 includes a plurality of functional components. The techniques described in this disclosure may be shared among the various components of the video encoder 200. In some examples, a processor may be configured to perform any or all of the techniques described in this disclosure.
In some embodiments, the video encoder 200 may include a partition unit 201, a prediction unit 202 which may include a mode select unit 203, a motion estimation unit 204, a motion compensation unit 205 and an intra-prediction unit 206, a residual generation unit 207, a transform unit 208, a quantization unit 209, an inverse quantization unit 210, an inverse transform unit 211, a reconstruction unit 212, a buffer 213, and an entropy encoding unit 214.
In other examples, the video encoder 200 may include more, fewer, or different functional components. In an example, the prediction unit 202 may include an intra block copy (IBC) unit. The IBC unit may perform prediction in an IBC mode in which at least one reference picture is a picture where the current video block is located.
Furthermore, although some components, such as the motion estimation unit 204 and the motion compensation unit 205, may be integrated, but are represented in the example of Fig. 2 separately for purposes of explanation.
The partition unit 201 may partition a picture into one or more video blocks. The video encoder 200 and the video decoder 300 may support various video block sizes.
The mode select unit 203 may select one of the coding modes, intra or inter, e.g., based on error results, and provide the resulting intra-coded or inter-coded block to a residual generation unit 207 to generate residual block data and to a reconstruction unit 212 to reconstruct the encoded block for use as a reference picture. In some examples, the mode select unit 203 may select a combined inter and intra prediction (CIIP) mode in which the prediction is based on an inter prediction signal and an intra prediction signal. The mode select unit 203 may also select a resolution for a motion vector (e.g., a sub-pixel or integer pixel precision) for the block in the case of inter-prediction.
To perform inter prediction on a current video block, the motion estimation unit 204 may generate motion information for the current video block by comparing one or more reference frames from buffer 213 to the current video block. The motion compensation unit 205 may determine a predicted video block for the current video block based on the motion information and decoded samples of pictures from the buffer 213 other than the picture associated with the current video block.
The motion estimation unit 204 and the motion compensation unit 205 may perform different operations for a current video block, for example, depending on whether the current video block is in an I-slice, a P-slice, or a B-slice. As used herein, an “I-slice” may refer to a portion of a picture composed of macroblocks, all of which are based upon macroblocks within the same picture. Further, as used herein, in some aspects, “P-slices” and “B-slices” may refer to portions of a picture composed of macroblocks that are not dependent on macroblocks in the same picture.
In some examples, the motion estimation unit 204 may perform uni-directional prediction for the current video block, and the motion estimation unit 204 may search reference pictures of list 0 or list 1 for a reference video block for the current video block. The motion estimation unit 204 may then generate a reference index that indicates the reference picture in list 0 or list 1 that contains the reference video block and a motion vector that indicates a spatial displacement between the current video block and the reference video block. The motion estimation unit 204 may output the reference index, a prediction direction indicator, and the motion vector as the motion information of the current video block. The motion compensation unit 205 may generate the predicted video block of the current video block based on the reference video block indicated by the motion information of the current video block.
Alternatively, in other examples, the motion estimation unit 204 may perform bi-directional prediction for the current video block. The motion estimation unit 204 may search the reference pictures in list 0 for a reference video block for the current video block and may also search the reference pictures in list 1 for another reference video block for the current video block. The motion estimation unit 204 may then generate reference indexes that indicate the reference pictures in list 0 and list 1 containing the reference video blocks and motion vectors that indicate spatial displacements between the reference video blocks and the current video block. The motion estimation unit 204 may output the reference indexes and the motion vectors of the current video block as the motion information of the current video block. The motion compensation unit 205 may generate the predicted video block of the current video block based on the reference video blocks indicated by the motion information of the current video block.
In some examples, the motion estimation unit 204 may output a full set of motion information for decoding processing of a decoder. Alternatively, in some embodiments, the motion estimation unit 204 may signal the motion information of the current video block with reference to the motion information of another video block. For example, the motion estimation unit 204 may determine that the motion information of the current video block is sufficiently similar to the motion information of a neighboring video block.
In one example, the motion estimation unit 204 may indicate, in a syntax structure associated with the current video block, a value that indicates to the video decoder 300 that the current video block has the same motion information as the another video block.
In another example, the motion estimation unit 204 may identify, in a syntax structure associated with the current video block, another video block and a motion vector difference (MVD) . The motion vector difference indicates a difference between the motion vector of the current video block and the motion vector of the indicated video block. The video decoder 300 may use the motion vector of the indicated video block and the motion vector difference to determine the motion vector of the current video block.
As discussed above, video encoder 200 may predictively signal the motion vector. Two examples of predictive signaling techniques that may be implemented by video encoder 200 include advanced motion vector prediction (AMVP) and merge mode signaling.
The intra prediction unit 206 may perform intra prediction on the current video block. When the intra prediction unit 206 performs intra prediction on the current video block, the intra prediction unit 206 may generate prediction data for the current video block based on decoded samples of other video blocks in the same picture. The prediction data for the current video block may include a predicted video block and various syntax elements.
The residual generation unit 207 may generate residual data for the current video block by subtracting (e.g., indicated by the minus sign) the predicted video block (s) of the current video block from the current video block. The residual data of the current video block may include residual video blocks that correspond to different sample components of the samples in the current video block.
In other examples, there may be no residual data for the current video block, for example in a skip mode, and the residual generation unit 207 may not perform the subtracting operation.
The transform unit 208 may generate one or more transform coefficient video blocks for the current video block by applying one or more transforms to a residual video block associated with the current video block.
After the transform unit 208 generates a transform coefficient video block associated with the current video block, the quantization unit 209 may quantize the transform coefficient video block associated with the current video block based on one or more quantization parameter (QP) values associated with the current video block.
The inverse quantization unit 210 and the inverse transform unit 211 may apply inverse quantization and inverse transforms to the transform coefficient video block, respectively, to reconstruct a residual video block from the transform coefficient video block. The reconstruction unit 212 may add the reconstructed residual video block to corresponding samples from one or more predicted video blocks generated by the prediction unit 202 to produce a reconstructed video block associated with the current video block for storage in the buffer 213.
After the reconstruction unit 212 reconstructs the video block, loop filtering operation may be performed to reduce video blocking artifacts in the video block.
The entropy encoding unit 214 may receive data from other functional components of the video encoder 200. When the entropy encoding unit 214 receives the data, the entropy encoding unit 214 may perform one or more entropy encoding operations to generate entropy encoded data and output a bitstream that includes the entropy encoded data.
Fig. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a video decoder 300, which may be an example of the video decoder 124 in the system 100 illustrated in Fig. 1, in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure.
The video decoder 300 may be configured to perform any or all of the techniques of this disclosure. In the example of Fig. 3, the video decoder 300 includes a plurality of functional components. The techniques described in this disclosure may be shared among the various components of the video decoder 300. In some examples, a processor may be configured to perform any or all of the techniques described in this disclosure.
In the example of Fig. 3, the video decoder 300 includes an entropy decoding unit 301, a motion compensation unit 302, an intra prediction unit 303, an inverse quantization unit 304, an inverse transform unit 305, a reconstruction unit 306 and a buffer 307. The video decoder 300 may, in some examples, perform a decoding pass generally reciprocal to the encoding pass described with respect to video encoder 200.
The entropy decoding unit 301 may retrieve an encoded bitstream. The encoded bitstream may include entropy coded video data (e.g., encoded blocks of video data) . The entropy decoding unit 301 may decode the entropy coded video data, and from the entropy decoded video data, the motion compensation unit 302 may determine motion information including motion vectors, motion vector precision, reference picture list indexes, and other motion information. The motion compensation unit 302 may, for example, determine such information by performing the AMVP and merge mode. AMVP is used, including derivation of several most probable candidates based on data from adjacent PBs and the reference picture. Motion information typically includes the horizontal and vertical motion vector displacement values, one or two reference picture indices, and, in the case of prediction regions in B slices, an identification of which reference picture list is associated with each index. As used herein, in some aspects, a “merge mode” may refer to deriving the motion information from spatially or temporally neighboring blocks.
The motion compensation unit 302 may produce motion compensated blocks, possibly performing interpolation based on interpolation filters. Identifiers for interpolation filters to be used with sub-pixel precision may be included in the syntax elements.
The motion compensation unit 302 may use the interpolation filters as used by the video encoder 200 during encoding of the video block to calculate interpolated values for sub-integer pixels of a reference block. The motion compensation unit 302 may determine the interpolation filters used by the video encoder 200 according to the received syntax information and use the interpolation filters to produce predictive blocks.
The motion compensation unit 302 may use at least part of the syntax information to determine sizes of blocks used to encode frame (s) and/or slice (s) of the encoded video sequence, partition information that describes how each macroblock of a picture of the encoded video sequence is partitioned, modes indicating how each partition is encoded, one or more reference frames (and reference frame lists) for each inter-encoded block, and other information to decode the encoded video sequence. As used herein, in some aspects, a “slice” may refer to a data structure that can be decoded independently from other slices of the same picture, in terms of entropy coding, signal prediction, and residual signal reconstruction. A slice can either be an entire picture or a region of a picture.
The intra prediction unit 303 may use intra prediction modes for example received in the bitstream to form a prediction block from spatially adjacent blocks. The inverse quantization unit 304 inverse quantizes, i.e., de-quantizes, the quantized video block coefficients provided in the bitstream and decoded by entropy decoding unit 301. The inverse transform unit 305 applies an inverse transform.
The reconstruction unit 306 may obtain the decoded blocks, e.g., by summing the residual blocks with the corresponding prediction blocks generated by the motion compensation unit 302 or intra-prediction unit 303. If desired, a deblocking filter may also be applied to filter the decoded blocks in order to remove blockiness artifacts. The decoded video blocks are then stored in the buffer 307, which provides reference blocks for subsequent motion compensation/intra prediction and also produces decoded video for presentation on a display device.
Some example embodiments of the present disclosure will be described in detailed hereinafter. It should be understood that section headings are used in the present document to facilitate ease of understanding and do not limit the embodiments disclosed in a section to only that section. Furthermore, while certain embodiments are described with reference to Versatile Video Coding or other specific video codecs, the disclosed techniques are applicable to other video coding technologies also. Furthermore, while some embodiments describe video coding steps in detail, it will be understood that corresponding steps decoding that undo the coding will be implemented by a decoder. Furthermore, the term video processing encompasses video coding or compression, video decoding or decompression and video transcoding in which video pixels are represented from one compressed format into another compressed format or at a different compressed bitrate.
1. Brief Summary
1. Brief Summary
This disclosure is related to video coding technologies. Specifically, it is about temporal candidates and non-adjacent candidates in image/video coding. It may be applied to the existing video coding standard like HEVC, VVC, and etc. It may be also applicable to future video coding standards or video codec.
2. Introduction
2. Introduction
Video coding standards have evolved primarily through the development of the well-known ITU-T and ISO/IEC standards. The ITU-T produced H. 261 and H. 263, ISO/IEC produced MPEG-1 and MPEG-4 Visual, and the two organizations jointly produced the H. 262/MPEG-2 Video and H. 264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding (AVC) and H. 265/HEVC standards. Since H. 262, the video coding standards are based on the hybrid video coding structure wherein temporal prediction plus transform coding are utilized. To explore the future video coding technologies beyond HEVC, the Joint Video Exploration Team (JVET) was founded by VCEG and MPEG jointly in 2015. The JVET meeting is concurrently held once every quarter, and the new video coding standard was officially named as Versatile Video Coding (VVC) in the April 2018 JVET meeting, and the first version of VVC test model (VTM) was released at that time. The VVC working draft and test model VTM are then updated after every meeting. The VVC project achieved technical completion (FDIS) at the July 2020 meeting.
2.1. Existing coding tools
2.1.1. Intra prediction
2.1. Existing coding tools
2.1.1. Intra prediction
In intra prediction the smallest chroma intra prediction unit (SCIPU) constraint in VVC is removed. In addition, the VPDU constraint for reducing CCLM prediction latency is also removed.
2.1.1.1. Multi-model LM (MMLM)
2.1.1.1. Multi-model LM (MMLM)
CCLM included in VVC is extended by adding three Multi-model LM (MMLM) modes. In each MMLM mode, the reconstructed neighboring samples are classified into two classes using a threshold which is the average of the luma reconstructed neighboring samples. The linear model of each class is derived using the Least-Mean-Square (LMS) method. For the CCLM mode, the LMS method is also used to derive the linear model. A slope adjustment to is applied to cross-component linear model (CCLM) and to Multi-model LM prediction. The adjustment is tilting the linear function which maps luma values to chroma values with respect to a center point determined by the average luma value of the reference samples.
2.1.1.2. Slope adjustment of CCLM
2.1.1.2. Slope adjustment of CCLM
CCLM uses a model with 2 parameters to map luma values to chroma values. The slope parameter “a” and the bias parameter “b” define the mapping as follows:
chromaVal = a *lumaVal + b
chromaVal = a *lumaVal + b
An adjustment “u” to the slope parameter is signaled to update the model to the following form:
chromaVal = a’ *lumaVal + b’
where
a’= a + u
b’= b -u *yr.
chromaVal = a’ *lumaVal + b’
where
a’= a + u
b’= b -u *yr.
With this selection the mapping function is tilted or rotated around the point with luminance value yr. The average of the reference luma samples used in the model creation as yr in order to provide a meaningful modification to the model. Picture below illustrates the process. Fig. 4 illustrates an illustration of the effect of the slope adjustment parameter “u” . Left: model created with the current CCLM. Right: model updated as proposed.
Implementation
Implementation
Slope adjustment parameter is provided as an integer between -4 and 4, inclusive, and signaled in the bitstream. The unit of the slope adjustment parameter is 1/8th of a chroma sample value per one luma sample value (for 10-bit content) .
Adjustment is available for the CCLM models that are using reference samples both above and left of the block ( “LM_CHROMA_IDX” and “MMLM_CHROMA_IDX” ) , but not for the “single side” modes. This selection is based on coding efficiency vs. complexity trade-off considerations.
When slope adjustment is applied for a multimode CCLM model, both models can be adjusted and thus up to two slope updates are signaled for a single chroma block.
Encoder approach
Encoder approach
The proposed encoder approach performs an SATD based search for the best value of the slope update for Cr and a similar SATD based search for Cb. If either one results as a non-zero slope adjustment parameter, the combined slope adjustment pair (SATD based update for Cr, SATD based update for Cb) is included in the list of RD checks for the TU.
2.1.1.3. Gradient PDPC
2.1.1.3. Gradient PDPC
In VVC, for a few scenarios, PDPC may not be applied due to the unavailability of the secondary reference samples. In these cases, a gradient based PDPC, extended from horizontal/vertical mode, is applied. The PDPC weights (wT /wL) and nScale parameter for determining the decay in PDPC weights with respect to the distance from left/top boundary are set equal to corresponding parameters in horizontal/vertical mode, respectively. When the secondary reference sample is at a fractional sample position, bilinear interpolation is applied.
2.1.1.4. Primary and Secondary MPM
2.1.1.4. Primary and Secondary MPM
Secondary MPM lists is introduced. The existing primary MPM (PMPM) list consists of 6 entries and the secondary MPM (SMPM) list includes 16 entries. A general MPM list with 22 entries is constructed first, and then the first 6 entries in this general MPM list are included into the PMPM list, and the rest of entries form the SMPM list. The first entry in the general MPM list is the Planar mode. The remaining entries are composed of the intra modes of the left (L) , above (A) , below-left (BL) , above-right (AR) , and above-left (AL) neighbouring blocks as shown in Fig. 5, and DIMD modes which are sorted in ascending order of SAD cost. Up to 5 modes with the smallest SAD cost are added. The SAD cost is computed between the prediction and the reconstruction samples of the template. The sorted directional modes with added offset are added into the general MPM list, and then the default modes, until the general MPM list with 22 entries is constructed.
If a CU block is vertically oriented, the order of neighbouring blocks is A, L, BL, AR, AL; otherwise, it is L, A, BL, AR, AL.
MPM list is equally divided into four groups and the group index is parsed first. Then, a mode index is further parsed to indicate which mode in the selected group is used.
2.1.1.5. Reference sample interpolation and smoothing for intra-prediction
2.1.1.5. Reference sample interpolation and smoothing for intra-prediction
The 4-tap cubic interpolation is replaced with a 6-tap cubic interpolation filter, for the derivation of predicted samples from the reference samples.
For reference sample filtering, a 6-tap gaussian filter is applied for larger blocks (W >= 32 and H >=32) , existing VVC 4-tap gaussian interpolation filter is applied otherwise. The extended intra reference samples are derived using the 4-tap interpolation filter instead of the nearest neighbor rounding.
2.1.1.6. Decoder side intra mode derivation (DIMD)
2.1.1.6. Decoder side intra mode derivation (DIMD)
When DIMD is applied, up to five intra modes are derived from the reconstructed neighbor samples, and those five predictors are combined with the non-directional predictor (planar or block vector based predictor) with the weights derived from the histogram of gradients. The decision between for the non-directional modes is taken according to the template cost. Specifically, the block vectors of all adjacent and non-adjacent merge candidates (coded in IntraTMP or IBC) are compared to planar prediction on the reconstructed template. The template cost (SATD) is used to select the best predictor among them.
The division operations in weight derivation are performed utilizing the same lookup table (LUT) based integerization scheme used by the CCLM. For example, the division operation in the orientation calculation
Orient=Gy/Gx
is computed by the following LUT-based scheme:
x = Floor (Log2 (Gx) )
normDiff = ( (Gx<< 4) >> x) &15
x += (3 + (normDiff ! = 0) ? 1: 0)
Orient = (Gy* (DivSigTable [normDiff ] | 8) + (1<< (x-1) ) ) >> x
where
DivSigTable [16] = {0, 7, 6, 5 , 5, 4, 4, 3, 3, 2, 2, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0 } .
Orient=Gy/Gx
is computed by the following LUT-based scheme:
x = Floor (Log2 (Gx) )
normDiff = ( (Gx<< 4) >> x) &15
x += (3 + (normDiff ! = 0) ? 1: 0)
Orient = (Gy* (DivSigTable [normDiff ] | 8) + (1<< (x-1) ) ) >> x
where
DivSigTable [16] = {0, 7, 6, 5 , 5, 4, 4, 3, 3, 2, 2, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0 } .
For a block of size W×H, the weight for each of the five derived modes is modified if the one the above or left histogram magnitudes is twice larger than the other one. In this case, the weights are location dependent and computed as follows.
If the above histogram is twice the left, then:
If the left histogram is twice the above, then:
where wDimdi is the unmodified uniform weight of the DIMD selected, Δi is pre-defined and set to 10.
where wDimdi is the unmodified uniform weight of the DIMD selected, Δi is pre-defined and set to 10.
Derived intra modes are included into the primary list of intra most probable modes (MPM) , so the DIMD process is performed before the MPM list is constructed. The primary derived intra mode of a DIMD block is stored with a block and is used for MPM list construction of the neighboring blocks.
Finally, note the region of neighboring reconstructed samples used for computing the histogram of gradients is modified, depending on reconstructed samples availability. The region of decoded reference samples of current WxH luma CB is extended towards the above-right side if available, up to W additional columns. It is extended towards the bottom-left side if available, up to H additional rows.
2.1.1.6.1. DIMD chroma mode
2.1.1.6.1. DIMD chroma mode
The DIMD chroma mode uses the DIMD derivation method to derive the chroma intra prediction mode of the current block based on the neighboring reconstructed Y, Cb and Cr samples in the second neighboring row and column. Specifically, a horizontal gradient and a vertical gradient are calculated for each collocated reconstructed luma sample of the current chroma block, as well as the reconstructed Cb and Cr samples, to build a HoG. Then the intra prediction mode with the largest histogram amplitude values is used for performing chroma intra prediction of the current chroma block. Fig. 6 illustrates neighboring reconstructed samples used for DIMD chroma mode.
When the intra prediction mode derived from the DIMD chroma mode is the same as the intra prediction mode derived from the DM mode, the intra prediction mode with the second largest histogram amplitude value is used as the DIMD chroma mode. A CU level flag is signaled to indicate whether the proposed DIMD chroma mode is applied.
Finally, the luma region of reconstructed samples used for computing the histogram of gradients for chroma DIMD mode is modified. For a WxH pair of chroma CBs to predict, to build the histogram of gradients associated to the collocated luma CB, the pairs of a vertical gradient and a horizontal gradient are extracted from the second and third lines in this luma CB instead of being extracted from the regular set of DIMD decoded reference samples around this luma CB.
2.1.1.7. Fusion of chroma intra prediction modes
2.1.1.7. Fusion of chroma intra prediction modes
In ECM, two chroma intra prediction signals can be fused together. One of the two chroma intra prediction signals is predicted using one of the DM mode, DIMD chroma mode and the four default modes (non-LM mode) . The other chroma intra prediction signal is predicted using cross-component linear prediction modes (LM mode) . Two different methods are supported.
In the first method, the LM mode can be either MM-CCLM or MM-CCCM, and the final predictor is derived as follows:
predC (i, j) = (w0×pred0 (i, j) +w1×pred1 (i, j) + (1<< (shift-1) ) ) >>shift
where pred0 (i, j) is the predictor obtained by applying the non-LM mode, pred1 (i, j) is the predictor
obtained by applying the LM mode and predC (i, j) is the final predictor of the current chroma block. The two weights, w0 and w1 are determined by the intra prediction mode of adjacent chroma blocks and shift is set equal to 2. Specifically, when the above and left adjacent blocks are both coded with LM modes, {w0, w1} = {1, 3} ; when the above and left adjacent blocks are both coded with non-LM modes, {w0, w1} = {3, 1} ; otherwise, {w0, w1} = {2, 2} . Two template costs are calculated by fusing the angular chroma prediction with MM-CCLM or MM-CCCM, respectively, and the one of the two CCPs which provides a smaller template cost is utilized to derive pred1.
predC (i, j) = (w0×pred0 (i, j) +w1×pred1 (i, j) + (1<< (shift-1) ) ) >>shift
where pred0 (i, j) is the predictor obtained by applying the non-LM mode, pred1 (i, j) is the predictor
obtained by applying the LM mode and predC (i, j) is the final predictor of the current chroma block. The two weights, w0 and w1 are determined by the intra prediction mode of adjacent chroma blocks and shift is set equal to 2. Specifically, when the above and left adjacent blocks are both coded with LM modes, {w0, w1} = {1, 3} ; when the above and left adjacent blocks are both coded with non-LM modes, {w0, w1} = {3, 1} ; otherwise, {w0, w1} = {2, 2} . Two template costs are calculated by fusing the angular chroma prediction with MM-CCLM or MM-CCCM, respectively, and the one of the two CCPs which provides a smaller template cost is utilized to derive pred1.
In the second method, the LM mode can be either MMLM or CCLM mode, and the final predictor is derived as follows:
predC (i, j) = α0×pred0 (i, j) + α1×rec′L (i, j) +α2×β
where pred0 (i, j) is the predictor obtained by applying the non-LM mode, rec′L (i, j) is the set of
downsampled reconstructed luma samples at co-located positions and predC (i, j) is the final predictor of the current chroma block. β is a fixed value and is set equal to 512 for 10-bit content. The three weights, α0, α1 and α2 are derived from the adjacent luma and chroma samples using the same LDL derivation method as in CCCM.
predC (i, j) = α0×pred0 (i, j) + α1×rec′L (i, j) +α2×β
where pred0 (i, j) is the predictor obtained by applying the non-LM mode, rec′L (i, j) is the set of
downsampled reconstructed luma samples at co-located positions and predC (i, j) is the final predictor of the current chroma block. β is a fixed value and is set equal to 512 for 10-bit content. The three weights, α0, α1 and α2 are derived from the adjacent luma and chroma samples using the same LDL derivation method as in CCCM.
For the syntax design, one index is signaled to indicate whether fusion is applied and which method is used. It is noted that for I slices, the non-LM mode can be DM mode, DIMD chroma mode and the four default modes. For non-I slices, only DIMD chroma mode is allowed to be fused with LM modes.
2.1.1.8. Intra template matching
2.1.1.8. Intra template matching
Intra template matching prediction (IntraTMP) is a special intra prediction mode that copies the best prediction block from the reconstructed part of the current frame, whose L-shaped template matches the current template. For a predefined search range, the encoder searches for the most similar template to the current template in a reconstructed part of the current frame and uses the corresponding block as a prediction block. The encoder then signals the usage of this mode, and the same prediction operation is performed at the decoder side.
The prediction signal is generated by matching the L-shaped, Top-only or Left-Only causal neighbor of the current block with another block in a predefined search area. There are 6 predefined search areas, i.e., R1 to R6 in Fig. 7 which contain the reconstructed samples from the top and left CTUs as well as part of the reconstructed samples within the current CTU that are located above, left, bottom-left and top-right to the current block.
IntraTMP employs an implicit merge mode, where merge candidates are considered without signaling a merge flag or index. Specifically, the reference positions pointed by the block vectors of all the adjacent and non-adjacent merge candidates (coded in IntraTMP or IBC mode) are used as additional candidates beyond the default search areas. The same template matching cost is used to compare the merge positions and the defaults ones. For bi-directional IBC merge candidate, two candidates are retained corresponding to each reference frame. Similarly, for IntraTMP, two candidates are considered corresponding to the best candidate by template search and the coded candidate.
Sum of absolute differences (SAD) is used as a cost function.
A given search order of the 6 regions is utilized, i.e., R4, R5, R6, R1, R2, and R3. Within each region, the decoder constructs a candidate list of up to “19” template matching block vectors that are ranked in ascending order according to the template cost (SAD) . The following modes are supported:
1-Single predictor: A single predictor is selected from the candidate list.
2-Fusion of multiple predictors: multiple predictors are blended multiple to derive the final prediction
block. The blending weights are either computed from the template matching cost of each predictor, or with Wiener-filter based weight derivation method.
3-Sub-pel precision: When single predictor is used, sub-pel precision can be used with 1/2-pel precision,
1/4-pel precision and 3/4-pel precision, each with 8 possible directions.
4-linear filter model: A linear filter can be learned between the reference template and current template
and be applied the linear model to reference block. This mode can be used for single predictor when sub-pel precision is not used.
1-Single predictor: A single predictor is selected from the candidate list.
2-Fusion of multiple predictors: multiple predictors are blended multiple to derive the final prediction
block. The blending weights are either computed from the template matching cost of each predictor, or with Wiener-filter based weight derivation method.
3-Sub-pel precision: When single predictor is used, sub-pel precision can be used with 1/2-pel precision,
1/4-pel precision and 3/4-pel precision, each with 8 possible directions.
4-linear filter model: A linear filter can be learned between the reference template and current template
and be applied the linear model to reference block. This mode can be used for single predictor when sub-pel precision is not used.
Additionally, IntraTMP with local illumination compensation is allowed. The following considerations are taken:
1-Usages of LIC and FLM (CCCM-like filtering) are mutually exclusive for a given CU.
2-Usages of LIC together with fusion in intra TMP is allowed.
3-Top-only and Left-only template usage for LIC model determination is allowed for screen content
coding. For camera-captured coding, only the top-left template is employed.
4-Multi Mode Linear Model (MMLM) is supported similarly to IBC-LIC, for screen content coding.
1-Usages of LIC and FLM (CCCM-like filtering) are mutually exclusive for a given CU.
2-Usages of LIC together with fusion in intra TMP is allowed.
3-Top-only and Left-only template usage for LIC model determination is allowed for screen content
coding. For camera-captured coding, only the top-left template is employed.
4-Multi Mode Linear Model (MMLM) is supported similarly to IBC-LIC, for screen content coding.
When LIC is used for a given CU, the Intra TMP search process employs MRSAD rather than SAD distortion function.
The dimensions of all regions (SearchRange_w, SearchRange_h) are set proportional to the block dimension (BlkW, BlkH) to have a fixed number of SAD comparisons per pixel. That is:
SearchRange_w = min (64, a*BlkW)
SearchRange_h = min (64, a*BlkH)
where ‘a’ is a constant that controls the gain/complexity trade-off. In practice, ‘a’ is equal to 5.
SearchRange_w = min (64, a*BlkW)
SearchRange_h = min (64, a*BlkH)
where ‘a’ is a constant that controls the gain/complexity trade-off. In practice, ‘a’ is equal to 5.
To speed-up the template matching process, the search range of all search regions is subsampled by a factor of 4. . After finding the best match, a refinement process is performed. The refinement is done via a second template matching search around the best match with a reduced range.
The Intra template matching tool is enabled for CUs with size less than or equal to 64 in width and height. This maximum CU size for Intra template matching is configurable.
The Intra template matching prediction mode is signaled at CU level through a dedicated flag when DIMD is not used for current CU.
2.1.1.8.1. IntraTMP derived block vector candidates for IBC
2.1.1.8.1. IntraTMP derived block vector candidates for IBC
In this method block vector (BV) derived from the intra template matching prediction (IntraTMP) is used for intra block copy (IBC) . The stored IntraTMP BV of the neighbouring blocks along with IBC BV are used as spatial BV candidates in IBC candidate list construction.
IntraTMP block vector is stored in the IBC block vector buffer and, the current IBC block can use both IBC BV and IntraTMP BV of neighbouring blocks as BV candidate for IBC BV candidate list as shown in Fig. 8.
IntraTMP block vectors are added to IBC block vector candidate list as spatial candidates. IntraTMP block vectors are stored in quarter-pel resolution for coding of IBC block vectors and HMVP.
2.1.1.9. Fusion for template-based intra mode derivation (TIMD)
2.1.1.9. Fusion for template-based intra mode derivation (TIMD)
For each intra prediction mode in MPMs, as well as the wide-angle modes if the above-right and/or bottom-left reference samples are available, SATD between the prediction and reconstruction samples of the template is calculated. First two intra prediction modes with the minimum SATD and one non-angular intra prediction mode (i.e. DC or Planar) with the lowest SATD cost are selected as the TIMD modes. These three TIMD modes are fused with the weights after applying PDPC process, and such weighted intra prediction is used to code the current CU. Position dependent intra prediction combination (PDPC) is included in the derivation of the TIMD modes.
The conditions below are checked to determine whether the non-angular intra prediction mode is used in fusion:
- the non-angular intra prediction mode is different from the two selected intra prediction modes.
- costMode3 < 1.5*costMode1, where the costMode3 is the SATD cost of the non-angular intra prediction
mode and costMode1 is the SATD cost of the first intra prediction mode.
If both of the conditions are true, three intra prediction modes are used to generate the prediction. And
the weights of each intra prediction mode are computed from SATD cost:
- the non-angular intra prediction mode is different from the two selected intra prediction modes.
- costMode3 < 1.5*costMode1, where the costMode3 is the SATD cost of the non-angular intra prediction
mode and costMode1 is the SATD cost of the first intra prediction mode.
If both of the conditions are true, three intra prediction modes are used to generate the prediction. And
the weights of each intra prediction mode are computed from SATD cost:
Otherwise, the non-angular intra prediction mode is not used in prediction. And the costs of the two selected modes are compared with a threshold, in the test the cost factor of 2 is applied as follows:
costMode2 < 2*costMode1.
costMode2 < 2*costMode1.
If this condition is true, the fusion is applied, otherwise the only mode1 is used.
Weights of the modes are computed from their SATD costs as follows:
weight1 = costMode2 / (costMode1+ costMode2)
weight2 = 1 -weight1
weight1 = costMode2 / (costMode1+ costMode2)
weight2 = 1 -weight1
The division operations are conducted using the same lookup table (LUT) based integerization scheme used by the CCLM.
Besides, location-dependent sample-based fusion used in DIMD fusion process is used for the TIMD fusion but the location-dependent criterion applying to amplitudes of the selected predictors is replaced by a SATD cost-based criteria. The location-dependent criterion is determined from a ratio of the normalized SATD of the selected TIMD predictors computed in above and left template area.
2.1.1.10. Intra prediction fusion
2.1.1.10. Intra prediction fusion
This intra prediction method derives predicted samples as a weighted combination of multiple predictors generated from different reference lines. In this process multiple intra predictors are generated and then fused by weighted averaging. The process of deriving the predictors to be used in the fusion process is described as follows:
1) For angular intra prediction modes including the single mode case of TIMD and DIMD, the proposed
method derives intra prediction by weighting intra predictions obtained from multiple reference lines represented as pfusion=w0pline+w1pline+1, where pline is the intra prediction from the default reference line and pline+1 is the prediction from the line above the default reference line. The weights are set as w0=3/4 and w1=1/4.
2) For TIMD mode with blending, pline is used for the first mode (w0=1, w1=0) and pline+1 is used
for the second mode (w0=0, w1=1) .
3) For DIMD mode with blending, the number of predictors selected for a weighted average is increased
from 3 to 6.
1) For angular intra prediction modes including the single mode case of TIMD and DIMD, the proposed
method derives intra prediction by weighting intra predictions obtained from multiple reference lines represented as pfusion=w0pline+w1pline+1, where pline is the intra prediction from the default reference line and pline+1 is the prediction from the line above the default reference line. The weights are set as w0=3/4 and w1=1/4.
2) For TIMD mode with blending, pline is used for the first mode (w0=1, w1=0) and pline+1 is used
for the second mode (w0=0, w1=1) .
3) For DIMD mode with blending, the number of predictors selected for a weighted average is increased
from 3 to 6.
The angular intra prediction fusion method is applied to luma blocks when angular intra mode has non-integer slope (required reference samples interpolation) and the block size is greater than 16, it is used with MRL and not applied for ISP coded blocks. In the method studied in the sub-test a, PDPC is applied for the intra prediction mode using the closest to the current block reference line.
The TIMD mode with blending method is applied when all the following conditions are satisfied:
- both the first and second modes are angular prediction mode.
- the current block is not ISP coded block.
- all of the following conditions are false:
○ abs (predModeIntra1 –predModeIntra2) is greater than Threshold. The value of Threshold is set
to 8 or 4 depending on block size.
○ (predModeIntra1 -EXT_HOR_IDX) * (predModeIntra2 -EXT_HOR_IDX) is less than 0.
○ (predModeIntra1 -EXT_VER_IDX) * (predModeIntra2 -EXT_VER_IDX) is less than 0.
2.1.1.11. Improvements of CIIP
2.1.1.11.1. Subblock CIIP
- both the first and second modes are angular prediction mode.
- the current block is not ISP coded block.
- all of the following conditions are false:
○ abs (predModeIntra1 –predModeIntra2) is greater than Threshold. The value of Threshold is set
to 8 or 4 depending on block size.
○ (predModeIntra1 -EXT_HOR_IDX) * (predModeIntra2 -EXT_HOR_IDX) is less than 0.
○ (predModeIntra1 -EXT_VER_IDX) * (predModeIntra2 -EXT_VER_IDX) is less than 0.
2.1.1.11. Improvements of CIIP
2.1.1.11.1. Subblock CIIP
A subblock-based merge candidate may be used to generate the inter signal of CIIP, where the same subblock-based merge candidate list used by affine and sbTMVP is utilized.
When CIIP flag is true and CIIP-TM flag is false, a subblock-based CIIP flag is signalled. If subblock-based CIIP flag is true, an index indicating specific candidate in the subblock-based merge list is signalled, and TIMD is used to generate intra signal by default thus no CIIP-PDPC flag signalled any more.
2.1.1.11.2. Combination of CIIP with TIMD and TM merge
2.1.1.11.2. Combination of CIIP with TIMD and TM merge
In CIIP mode, the prediction samples are generated by weighting an inter prediction signal predicted using CIIP-TM merge candidate and an intra prediction signal predicted using TIMD derived intra prediction mode. The method is only applied to coding blocks with an area less than or equal to 1024.
The TIMD derivation method is used to derive the intra prediction mode in CIIP. Specifically, the intra prediction mode with the smallest SATD values in the TIMD mode list is selected and mapped to one of the 67 regular intra prediction modes.
In addition, it is also proposed to modify the weights (wIntra, wInter) for the two tests if the derived intra prediction mode is an angular mode. For near-horizontal modes (2 <= angular mode index < 34) , the current block is vertically divided as shown in Fig. 9A; for near-vertical modes (34 <= angular mode index <= 66) , the current block is horizontally divided as shown in Fig. 9B.
The (wIntra, wInter) for different sub-blocks are shown in Table 1.
Table 1. The modified weights used for angular modes.
Table 1. The modified weights used for angular modes.
With CIIP-TM, a CIIP-TM merge candidate list is built for the CIIP-TM mode. The merge candidates are refined by template matching. The CIIP-TM merge candidates are also reordered by the ARMC method as regular merge candidates. The maximum number of CIIP-TM merge candidates is equal to two.
2.1.1.12. Extended multiple reference line (MRL) list
2.1.1.12. Extended multiple reference line (MRL) list
MRL list in VVC is extended to include more reference lines for intra prediction. The extended reference line list consists of line indices {1, 3, 5, 7, 12} . For template-based intra mode derivation (TIMD) , instead of the full MRL candidate list, only the first two reference line candidates, i.e., {1, 3} , are used. Fig. 10 illustrates extended MRL candidate list.
2.1.1.13. Template-based multiple reference line intra prediction
2.1.1.13. Template-based multiple reference line intra prediction
Template-based multiple reference line intra prediction (TMRL) mode combines reference line and prediction mode together and uses a template matching method to construct a list of candidate combinations. An index to the candidate combination list is coded to indicate which reference line and prediction mode is used in coding the current block. The regular multiple reference line (MRL) for the non-TIMD part is replaced by TMRL mode.
The TMRL mode extends reference line candidate list and the intra-prediction-mode candidate list. The extended reference line candidate list is {1, 3, 5, 7, 12} . The restriction on the top CTU row is unchanged. The size of the intra-prediction-mode candidate list is 10. The construction of the intra-prediction-mode candidate list is similar to MPM except the PLANAR mode is excluded from the intra-prediction-mode candidate list, DC mode is added after 5 neighboring PUs’ modes and DIMD modes if its not included and the angular modes with delta angles from ±1 to ±4 (compared the existing angular modes in the intra-prediction-mode candidate list) are added. The precision of angular prediction is extended from 65 to 129. Additionally non-adjacent positions are added as candidates in constructing the intra candidate list. If the neighbouring or non-adjacent blocks are coded with SGPM or GPM modes, the intra modes of the blocks are replaced by the partitioning angles.
The TMRL candidate is constructed as follows. There are 5x10=50 combinations of the extended reference line and the allowed intra-prediction modes for a block. Since the extended reference line starts from reference line 1, the area covered by reference line 0 is used for template matching. The SAD costs over the template area are calculated between the predictions (generated by 50 combinations) and the reconstructions. The 20 combinations with the least SAD cost are selected in an ascending order to form the TMRL candidate list. Fig. 11 illustrates an illustration of the template area.
For TMR signalling instead of coding the reference line and the intra mode directly, an index to the TMRL candidate list is coded to indicate which combination of reference line and prediction mode is used for coding the current block.
2.1.1.14. Convolutional cross-component intra prediction model
2.1.1.14. Convolutional cross-component intra prediction model
In this method convolutional cross-component model (CCCM) is applied to predict chroma samples from reconstructed luma samples in a similar spirit as done by the current CCLM modes. As with CCLM, the reconstructed luma samples are down-sampled to match the lower resolution chroma grid when chroma sub-sampling is used. Similar to CCLM top, left or top and left reference samples are used as templates for model derivation.
Also, similarly to CCLM, there is an option of using a single model or multi-model variant of CCCM. The multi-model variant uses two models, one model derived for samples above the average luma reference value and another model for the rest of the samples (following the spirit of the CCLM design) . Multi-model CCCM mode can be selected for PUs which have at least 128 reference samples available.
2.1.1.14.1. Convolutional filter
2.1.1.14.1. Convolutional filter
The convolutional 7-tap filter consist of a 5-tap plus sign shape spatial component, a nonlinear term and a bias term. The input to the spatial 5-tap component of the filter consists of a center (C) luma sample which is collocated with the chroma sample to be predicted and its above/north (N) , below/south (S) , left/west (W) and right/east (E) neighbors as illustrated below. Fig. 12 illustrates spatial part of the convolutional filter.
The nonlinear term P is represented as power of two of the center luma sample C and scaled to the sample value range of the content:
P = (C*C + midVal) >> bitDepth.
P = (C*C + midVal) >> bitDepth.
That is, for 10-bit content it is calculated as:
P = (C*C + 512) >> 10.
P = (C*C + 512) >> 10.
The bias term B represents a scalar offset between the input and output (similarly to the offset term in CCLM) and is set to middle chroma value (512 for 10-bit content) .
Output of the filter is calculated as a convolution between the filter coefficients ci and the input values and clipped to the range of valid chroma samples:
predChromaVal = c0C + c1N + c2S + c3E + c4W + c5P + c6B.
2.1.1.14.2. Calculation of filter coefficients
predChromaVal = c0C + c1N + c2S + c3E + c4W + c5P + c6B.
2.1.1.14.2. Calculation of filter coefficients
The filter coefficients ci are calculated by minimising MSE between predicted and reconstructed chroma samples in the reference area. Fig. 13 illustrates the reference area which consists of 2 or 6 lines of chroma samples above and left of the PU. Whether to use 6 lines or 2 lines of neighbouring samples to derive the CCCM model parameters in the single model CCCM is determined by a template cost. Similarly, for the multi-model CCCM mode, the two candidates use 6 lines neighbouring luma samples or luma samples collocated to the current chroma block to derive mean values which separate samples into two groups. The cost is derived by applying the candidate CCP (either 2 or 6 lines) on a template, calculating the sum of absolute difference (SAD) between CCP predicted samples and reconstructed samples in the template.
Reference area extends one PU width to the right and one PU height below the PU boundaries. Area is adjusted to include only available samples. The extensions to the area shown in blue are needed to support the “side samples” of the plus shaped spatial filter and are padded when in unavailable areas.
The MSE minimization is performed by calculating autocorrelation matrix for the luma input and a cross-correlation vector between the luma input and chroma output. Autocorrelation matrix is LDL decomposed and the final filter coefficients are calculated using back-substitution. The process follows roughly the calculation of the ALF filter coefficients in ECM, however LDL decomposition was chosen instead of Cholesky decomposition to avoid using square root operations.
The autocorrelation matrix is calculated using the reconstructed values of luma and chroma samples. These samples are full range (e.g. between 0 and 1023 for 10-bit content) resulting in relatively large values in the autocorrelation matrix. This requires high bit depth operation during the model parameters calculation. It is proposed to remove fixed offsets from luma and chroma samples in each PU for each model. This is driving down the magnitudes of the values used in the model creation and allows reducing the precision needed for the fixed-point arithmetic. As a result, 16-bit decimal precision is proposed to be used instead of the 22-bit precision of the original CCCM implementation.
Reference sample values just outside of the top-left corner of the PU are used as the offsets (offsetLuma, offsetCb and offsetCr) for simplicity. The samples values used in both model creation and final prediction (i.e., luma and chroma in the reference area, and luma in the current PU) are reduced by these fixed values, as follows:
C'= C –offsetLuma
N'= N –offsetLuma
S'= S –offsetLuma
E'= E –offsetLuma
W'= W –offsetLuma
P'= nonLinear (C')
B = midValue = 1 << (bitDepth -1)
and the chroma value is predicted using the following equation, where offsetChroma is equal to offsetCr and
offsetCb for Cr and Cb components, respectively:
predChromaVal = c0C'+ c1N'+ c2S'+ c3E'+ c4W'+ c5P'+ c6B + offsetChroma.
C'= C –offsetLuma
N'= N –offsetLuma
S'= S –offsetLuma
E'= E –offsetLuma
W'= W –offsetLuma
P'= nonLinear (C')
B = midValue = 1 << (bitDepth -1)
and the chroma value is predicted using the following equation, where offsetChroma is equal to offsetCr and
offsetCb for Cr and Cb components, respectively:
predChromaVal = c0C'+ c1N'+ c2S'+ c3E'+ c4W'+ c5P'+ c6B + offsetChroma.
In order to avoid any additional sample level operations, the luma offset is removed during the luma reference sample interpolation. This can be done, for example, by substituting the rounding term used in the luma reference sample interpolation with an updated offset including both the rounding term and the offsetLuma. The chroma offset can be removed by deducting the chroma offset directly from the reference chroma samples. As an alternative way, impact of the chroma offset can be removed from the cross-component vector giving identical result. In order to add the chroma offset back to the output of the convolutional prediction operation the chroma offset is added to the bias term of the convolutional model.
The process of CCCM model parameter calculation requires division operations. Division operations are not always considered implementation friendly. The division operation are replaced with multiplication (with a scale factor) and shift operation, where scale factor and number of shifts are calculated based on denominator similar to the method used in calculation of CCLM parameters. 2.1.1.14.3. Gradient Linear Model
For YUV 4: 2: 0 color format, a gradient linear model (GLM) method can be used to predict the chroma samples from luma sample gradients. Two modes are supported: a two-parameter GLM mode and a three-parameter GLM mode.
Compared with the CCLM, instead of down-sampled luma values, the two-parameter GLM utilizes luma sample gradients to derive the linear model. Specifically, when the two-parameter GLM is applied, the input to the CCLM process, i.e., the down-sampled luma samples L, are replaced by luma sample gradients G. The other parts of the CCLM (e.g., parameter derivation, prediction sample linear transform) are kept unchanged.
C=α·G+β
C=α·G+β
In the three-parameter GLM, a chroma sample can be predicted based on both the luma sample gradients and down-sampled luma values with different parameters. The model parameters of the three-parameter GLM are derived from 6 rows and columns adjacent samples by the LDL decomposition based MSE minimization method as used in the CCCM.
C=α0·G+α1·L+α2·β
C=α0·G+α1·L+α2·β
For signaling, when the CCLM mode is enabled to the current CU, one flag is signaled to indicate whether GLM is enabled for both Cb and Cr components; if the GLM is enabled, another flag is signaled to indicate which of the two GLM modes is selected and one syntax element is further signaled to select one of 4 gradient filters for the gradient calculation.
· Four gradient filters are enabled for the GLM. Fig. 14 illustrates four Sobel based gradient patterns for
GLM.
2.1.1.14.4. CCCM signalling
· Four gradient filters are enabled for the GLM. Fig. 14 illustrates four Sobel based gradient patterns for
GLM.
2.1.1.14.4. CCCM signalling
Usage of the mode is signalled with a CABAC coded PU level flag. One new CABAC context was included to support this. When it comes to signalling, CCCM is considered a sub-mode of CCLM. That is, the CCCM flag is only signalled if intra prediction mode is LM_CHROMA.
2.1.1.14.5. CCCM using non-downsampled luma samples
2.1.1.14.5. CCCM using non-downsampled luma samples
CCCM mode with 3x2 filter using non-downsampled luma samples is used, which consists of 6-tap spatial terms, four nonlinear terms and a bias term. The 6-tap spatial terms correspond to 6 neighboring luma samples (i.e., L0, L1, …, L5) around the chroma sample (i.e., C) to be predicted, the four non-linear terms are derived from the samples L0, L1, L2, and L3. Fig. 15 illustrates non-downsampled luma samples.
where αi is the coefficient, β is the offset. Same to the existing CCCM design, up to 6 lines/columns of chroma
samples above and left to the current CU are applied to derive the filter coefficients. The filter coefficients are derived based on the same LDL decomposition method used in CCCM. The proposed method is signaled as an additional CCCM model besides the existing one, when the CCCM is selected, one single flag is signaled and used for both two chroma components to indicate whether the default CCCM model or the proposed CCCM model is applied. Additionally, SPS signaling is introduced to indicate whether the CCCM using non-downsampled luma samples is enabled.
2.1.1.14.6. Block-vector guided CCCM (BVG-CCCM)
where αi is the coefficient, β is the offset. Same to the existing CCCM design, up to 6 lines/columns of chroma
samples above and left to the current CU are applied to derive the filter coefficients. The filter coefficients are derived based on the same LDL decomposition method used in CCCM. The proposed method is signaled as an additional CCCM model besides the existing one, when the CCCM is selected, one single flag is signaled and used for both two chroma components to indicate whether the default CCCM model or the proposed CCCM model is applied. Additionally, SPS signaling is introduced to indicate whether the CCCM using non-downsampled luma samples is enabled.
2.1.1.14.6. Block-vector guided CCCM (BVG-CCCM)
When the co-located luma prediction is coded with IBC or IntraTMP in Intra slices, the BVG-CCCM mode can be used. In this mode, the block vectors of the co-located luma blocks, coded in IBC or intraTMP modes, are used to determine the reference area for calculating the CCCM parameters. The prediction is performed using uses the calculated model parameters and co-located luma samples. Fig. 16 illustrates the reference area in BVG-CCCM method.
The BVG-CCCM mode uses an 11-tap filter for cross-component prediction as below:
predChromaVal = c0C + c1N + c2S + c3E + c4W + c5P (C) + c6P (N) + c7P (S) + c8P (W) + c9P (E) + c10B.
predChromaVal = c0C + c1N + c2S + c3E + c4W + c5P (C) + c6P (N) + c7P (S) + c8P (W) + c9P (E) + c10B.
The input to the spatial 5-tap component of the filter consists of a center (C) luma sample which is collocated with the chroma sample to be predicted and its above/north (N) , below/south (S) , left/west (W) and right/east (E) neighbors as illustrated in Fig. 12.
The nonlinear term P is represented as power of two of the corresponding luma sample and B is the bias term.
Similar to Direct Block Vector (DBV) mode, five locations in the collocated luma block area are scanned and the associated block vectors are then used for determining the reference area for parameter calculation in BVG-CCCM method.
2.1.1.14.7. Gradient and Location based convolutional cross-component model (GL-CCCM)
2.1.1.14.7. Gradient and Location based convolutional cross-component model (GL-CCCM)
This method maps luma values into chroma values using a filter with inputs consisting of one spatial luma sample, two gradient values, two location information, a nonlinear term, and a bias term. The GL-CCCM method uses gradient and location information instead of the 4 spatial neighbor samples used in the CCCM filter. The GL-CCCM filter used for the prediction is:
predChromaVal = c0C + c1Gy + c2Gx + c3Y + c4X + c5P + c6B
where Gy and Gx are the vertical and horizontal gradients, respectively, and are calculated as Fig. 17:
Gy = (2N + NW + NE) – (2S + SW + SE)
Gx = (2W + NW + SW) – (2E + NE + SE)
predChromaVal = c0C + c1Gy + c2Gx + c3Y + c4X + c5P + c6B
where Gy and Gx are the vertical and horizontal gradients, respectively, and are calculated as Fig. 17:
Gy = (2N + NW + NE) – (2S + SW + SE)
Gx = (2W + NW + SW) – (2E + NE + SE)
Moreover, the Y and X are the spatial coordinates of the center luma sample.
The rest of the parameters are the same as CCCM tool. The reference area for the parameter calculation is the same as CCCM method.
The usage of the mode is signalled with a CABAC coded PU level flag. When it comes to signalling, GL-CCCM is considered a sub-mode of CCCM. That is, the GL-CCCM flag is only signalled if original CCCM flag is true.
Similar to the CCCM, GL-CCCM tool has 6 modes for calculating the parameters:
· Single-model GL-CCCM from above and left templates,
· Single-model GL-CCCM from above template,
· Single-model GL-CCCM from left template,
· Multi-model GL-CCCM from above and left templates,
· Multi-model GL-CCCM from above template,
· Multi-model GL-CCCM from left template.
· Single-model GL-CCCM from above and left templates,
· Single-model GL-CCCM from above template,
· Single-model GL-CCCM from left template,
· Multi-model GL-CCCM from above and left templates,
· Multi-model GL-CCCM from above template,
· Multi-model GL-CCCM from left template.
The encoder performs SATD search for the 6 GL-CCCM modes along with the existing CCCM modes to find the best candidates for full RD tests.
2.1.1.14.8. CCCM with Multiple Downsampling Filters
2.1.1.14.8. CCCM with Multiple Downsampling Filters
Multiple downsampling filters are applied to a group of reconstructed luma samples in a CCCM. The linear combination of these downsampled reconstructed samples is multiplied by derived filter coefficients to form the final chroma predictor. The horizontal or vertical location of the center luma sample are also considered in the tested model. The cross-component models shown below are tested as additional CCCM modes with a mode index signalled in the bitstream:
(1) Model 1: predChroma = c0 *H (C) + c1 * G1 (C) + c2 * G2 (C) + c3 * G3 (C) + c4 * P (H (C) ) + c5 *
P (G1 (C) ) + c6 *P (G2 (C) ) + c7 *X + c8 *Y + c9 *B
(2) Model 2: predChroma = c0 *H (C) + c1 * H (W) + c2 * H (E) + c3 * G1 (C) + c4 * G1 (W) + c5 *
G1 (E) + c6 * P (H (C) ) + c7 * P (H (W) ) + c8 * P (H (E) ) + c9 *X + c10 *B
(3) Model 3: predChroma = c0 *H (C) + c1 * H (NE) + c2 * H (SW) + c3 * G3 (C) + c4 * G3 (NE) + c5 *
G3 (SW) + c6 * P (H (C) ) + c7 * P (H (NE) ) + c8 * P (H (SW) ) + c9 *Y + c10 *B
where H (·) , G1 (·) , G2 (·) , G3 (·) are various downsampling filters as indicated in Fig. 18, C denotes the current
chroma sample position, and N, S, W, E, NE, SW are the positions around C, ci are filter coefficients, P and B are nonlinear term and bias term, and X and Y are the horizontal and vertical locations of the center luma sample with respect to the top-left coordinates of the block.
2.1.1.15. Local-Boosting Cross-Component Prediction (LB-CCP)
(1) Model 1: predChroma = c0 *H (C) + c1 * G1 (C) + c2 * G2 (C) + c3 * G3 (C) + c4 * P (H (C) ) + c5 *
P (G1 (C) ) + c6 *P (G2 (C) ) + c7 *X + c8 *Y + c9 *B
(2) Model 2: predChroma = c0 *H (C) + c1 * H (W) + c2 * H (E) + c3 * G1 (C) + c4 * G1 (W) + c5 *
G1 (E) + c6 * P (H (C) ) + c7 * P (H (W) ) + c8 * P (H (E) ) + c9 *X + c10 *B
(3) Model 3: predChroma = c0 *H (C) + c1 * H (NE) + c2 * H (SW) + c3 * G3 (C) + c4 * G3 (NE) + c5 *
G3 (SW) + c6 * P (H (C) ) + c7 * P (H (NE) ) + c8 * P (H (SW) ) + c9 *Y + c10 *B
where H (·) , G1 (·) , G2 (·) , G3 (·) are various downsampling filters as indicated in Fig. 18, C denotes the current
chroma sample position, and N, S, W, E, NE, SW are the positions around C, ci are filter coefficients, P and B are nonlinear term and bias term, and X and Y are the horizontal and vertical locations of the center luma sample with respect to the top-left coordinates of the block.
2.1.1.15. Local-Boosting Cross-Component Prediction (LB-CCP)
Prediction samples of MM-CCLM/MM-CCCM can be filtered with neighbouring samples. As shown in Fig. 19, a 3×3 low-pass filter is applied to filter prediction samples generated by MM-CCLM/MM-CCCM. For a sample at a top/left boundary, the filtering window may involve neighbouring reconstructed samples. For inner samples, the filtering window only involves prediction samples, which may be padded. A flag is signaled to indicate whether filtering is applied or not for a block coded with MM-CCLM/MM-CCCM.
2.1.1.16. Cross-Component Prediction (CCP) merge (a. k. a., non-local CCP) mode
2.1.1.16. Cross-Component Prediction (CCP) merge (a. k. a., non-local CCP) mode
For chroma coding, a flag is signalled to indicate whether CCP mode (including the CCLM, CCCM, GLM and their variants) or non-CCP mode (conventional chroma intra prediction mode, fusion of chroma intra prediction mode) is used. If the CCP mode is selected, one more flag is signalled to indicate how to derive the CCP type and parameters, i.e., either from a CCP merge list or signalled/derived on-the-fly. A CCP merge candidate list is constructed from the spatial adjacent, temporal, spatial non-adjacent, history-based m or shifted temporal candidates. After including these candidates, default models are further included to fill the remaining empty positions in the merge list. In order to remove redundant CCP models in the list, pruning operation is applied. After constructing the list, the CCP models in the list are reordered depending on the SAD costs, which are obtained using the neighbouring template of the current block. More details are described below.
Spatial adjacent and non-adjacent candidates
Spatial adjacent and non-adjacent candidates
The positions and inclusion order of the spatial adjacent and non-adjacent candidates are the same as those defined in ECM for regular inter merge prediction candidates.
Temporal and shifted temporal candidates
Temporal and shifted temporal candidates
Temporal candidates are selected from the collocated picture. The position and inclusion order of the temporal candidates are the same as those defined in ECM for regular inter merge prediction candidates. The shifted temporal candidates are also selected from the collocated picture. The position of temporal candidates is shifted by a selected motion vector which is derived from motion vectors of neighboring blocks.
History-based candidates
History-based candidates
A history-based table is maintained to include the recently used CCP models, and the table is reset at the beginning of each CTU row. If the current list is not full after including spatial adjacent and non-adjacent candidates, the CCP models in the history-based table are added into the list.
Default candidates
Default candidates
CCLM candidates with default scaling parameters are considered, only when the list is not full after including the spatial adjacent, spatial non-adjacent, or history-based candidates. If the current list has no candidates with the single model CCLM mode, the default scaling parameters are {0, 1/8, -1/8, 2/8, -2/8, 3/8, -3/8, 4/8, -4/8, 5/8, -5/8, 6/8} . Otherwise, the default scaling parameters are {0, the scaling parameter of the first CCLM candidate + {1/8, -1/8, 2/8, -2/8, 3/8, -3/8, 4/8, -4/8, 5/8, -5/8, 6/8} .
It is noted that the LB-CCP flag is inherited from a CCP candidate in the CCP merge candidate list.
A flag is signaled to indicate whether the CCP merge mode is applied or not. If CCP merge mode is applied, an index is signaled to indicate which candidate model is used by the current block. In addition, CCP merge mode is not allowed for the current chroma coding block when the current CU is coded by intra sub-partitions (ISP) with single tree, or the current chroma coding block size is less than or equal to 16. For a CCP merge coded block, one CCP-merge fusion flag is further signalled to indicate whether a fusion mode is applied. In the fusion mode, the final prediction is generated by a weighted sum of the CCP-merge prediction and either the MM-CCCM prediction or the DIMD prediction. A CCP-merge fusion type flag is further signalled if the CCP-merge fusion flag is true, to indicate whether the MM-CCCM prediction or the DIMD prediction is selected and fused with the CCP-merge prediction.
2.1.1.17. Decoder derived CCP mode
2.1.1.17. Decoder derived CCP mode
In this method, a candidate list of cross-component prediction (CCP) modes is constructed, and to select the best candidate from the list a template cost is calculated to compare the reconstructed samples and the prediction values generated by the evaluated CCP mode. The template is shown in Fig. 20.
The CCP mode list is constructed from the already existed in ECM modes by single model CCLM, single model CCCM, multi-model CCCM, single model GLCCCM, single model CCCM applied with LBCCP, and multi-model CCCM applied with LBCCP.
In the second aspect of the method, various decoder-derived CCP fusion candidates are added. A fusion candidate is the combination of two CCP modes selected from the existing CCP mode lists reordered by template costs. Mode flag and a fusion flag are signalled to indicate the mode usage.
2.1.1.18. Spatial Geometric partitioning mode (SGPM)
2.1.1.18. Spatial Geometric partitioning mode (SGPM)
SGPM is an intra mode that resembles the inter coding tool of GPM, where the two prediction parts are generated from intra predicted process. In this mode, a candidate list is built with each entry containing one partition split and two intra prediction modes as shown in Fig. 21.26 partition modes and 9 of intra prediction modes are used to form the combinations. the length of the candidate list is set equal to 16. The selected candidate index is signalled.
The list is reordered using template where SAD between the prediction and reconstruction of the template is used for ordering. The template size is fixed to 1. Fig. 22 illustrates an GPM template.
For each partition mode, an IPM list is derived for each part using the same intra-inter GPM list derivation. The IPM list size is set to 3. In the list, TIMD derived mode is replaced by 2 derived modes with horizontal and vertical orientations. The list is further augmented with block-vector based prediction candidates obtained from the adjacent and non-adjacent merge candidates coded in IntraTMP or IBC mode. The template cost is employed to select the up to 6 block vectors. The final list contains up to 9 predictors: 3 regular intra modes and up to 6 block vectors based predictors.
The SGPM mode is applied with a restricted blocks size: 4<=width<=64, 4<=height<=64, width<height*8, height<width*8, width*height>=32.
A PPS flag is coded to indicate whether no blending of two intra predictions is allowed. When this PPS flag is set to false, the following adaptive blending is also used for spatial GPM, where blending depth τ is derived as follows:
· If min (width, height) ==4, 1/2 τ is selected,
· else if min (width, height) ==8, τ is selected,
· else if min (width, height) ==16, 2 τ is selected,
· else if min (width, height) ==32, 4 τ is selected,
· else, 8 τ is selected.
· If min (width, height) ==4, 1/2 τ is selected,
· else if min (width, height) ==8, τ is selected,
· else if min (width, height) ==16, 2 τ is selected,
· else if min (width, height) ==32, 4 τ is selected,
· else, 8 τ is selected.
Otherwise (the PPS flag is set to true) , 1/4 τ is always used for spatial GPM coded blocks to make sure no blending is used when SGPM block has partition angle completely horizontal or vertical, and much narrower blending width is used when SGPM block has other partition angles. It is noted that the flag is set to true in current Common Test Conditions (CTC) for the screen content videos. Fig. 23 illustrates a GPM blending.
2.1.1.19. Directional planar mode
2.1.1.19. Directional planar mode
Two additional planar modes where only the horizontal interpolation or only the vertical interpolation are used to obtain the predicted samples.
For planar horizontal mode, only the horizontal linear interpolation is performed based on the left reference sample and the top-right reference sample to predict the current sample as:
pred (x, y) = ( (W-1-x) *rec (-1, y) + (x+1) *rec (W, -1) + (W>>1) ) >>log2 (W) .
pred (x, y) = ( (W-1-x) *rec (-1, y) + (x+1) *rec (W, -1) + (W>>1) ) >>log2 (W) .
For planar vertical mode, only the vertical linear interpolation is performed based on the above reference sample and the bottom-left reference sample to predict the current sample as:
pred (x, y) = ( (H-1-y) *rec (x, -1) + (y+1) *rec (-1, H) + (H>>1) ) >>log2 (H) .
pred (x, y) = ( (H-1-y) *rec (x, -1) + (y+1) *rec (-1, H) + (H>>1) ) >>log2 (H) .
The transform kernel selection for planar horizontal and planar vertical mode is shown in Fig. 24. If an intra prediction mode of a current block is the planar vertical mode, the horizontal intra prediction mode is used to derive a transform kernel in MTS set and LFNST set. Also, if an intra prediction mode of a current block is the planar horizontal mode, the vertical intra prediction mode is used to derive a transform kernel in MTS set and LFNST set.
2.1.1.20. Direct block vector (DBV) for chroma block
2.1.1.20. Direct block vector (DBV) for chroma block
The direct block vector is used for chroma blocks. A flag is signaled to indicate whether a chroma block is coded using IBC mode. If one of the luma blocks in five locations shown in Fig. 25 is coded with IBC or intraTMP mode, its block vector is scaled and is used as block vector for the chroma block. Template matching is used to perform block vector scaling.
2.1.1.21. Extrapolation filter-based intra prediction (EIP) mode
2.1.1.21. Extrapolation filter-based intra prediction (EIP) mode
In the EIP mode, the samples in a CU are predicted from the top-left position to the bottom-right position by applying an extrapolation filter to neighboring reconstructed samples or predicted samples. The EIP mode uses a 15-tap filter for prediction as below:
where pred (x, y) is the predicted value at position (x, y) in the CU, ci is the filter coefficient, and the is the reconstructed samples or predicted samples.
where pred (x, y) is the predicted value at position (x, y) in the CU, ci is the filter coefficient, and the is the reconstructed samples or predicted samples.
The EIP filter can be derived from the neighboring reconstructed samples or be inherited from the previous EIP coded blocks. There are three EIP filter shapes and three types of reconstructed area supported in ECM. Fig. 26 illustrates three EIP filter shapes, and Fig. 27 illustrates three types of reconstructed area for EIP filter.
For a CU coded in the EIP mode, an EIP merge flag is signaled to indicate whether the EIP filter is inherited from previous blocks coded in EIP mode. When the EIP merge flag is true, an EIP merge list is constructed from the spatial adjacent, spatial non-adjacent, temporal and history candidates. The position and inclusion order of these candidates are the same as those used in CCP merge candidate list. An EIP merge index is further signaled to indicate which EIP merge candidate is selected. The filter shape and the filter coefficients of the selected candidate are then inherited to code the CU.
When the EIP merge flag is false, the EIP filter is derived from the neighboring reconstructed samples and the relevant syntax element is signaled to indicate which one of the three types of reconstructed area and which one of the three filter shapes are used for the CU. The selected filter moves in the selected reconstructed area either horizontally or vertically with a one-pixel step to construct the auto-correlation matrix and the cross-correlation vector. The calculation of coefficients from the auto-correlation matrix and the cross-correlation vector is the same as that in CCCM.
After generating the prediction samples of the CU using the EIP filter, an intra prediction mode is derived by applying the DIMD process to the prediction samples. Specifically, a horizontal gradient and a vertical gradient are calculated for each predicted sample to build a histogram of gradient. Then the intra prediction mode corresponding to the largest histogram count is used to determine the LFNST, NSPT or MTS transform set.
2.1.1.22. Matrix based position dependent intra prediction (PDP) replacing conventional intra modes
2.1.1.22. Matrix based position dependent intra prediction (PDP) replacing conventional intra modes
A matrix of weights, which are defined for a block shape and intra mode, is introduced, those weights are multiplied by the neighbour reference template to derive the prediction samples replacing conventional intra prediction. The weights are applied to the reference samples of the L shaped causal neighborhood template as shown in the Fig. 28.
The reference samples in the causal neighborhood are denoted as r, and F (x, y) is the matrix of weights. Then the prediction P (x, y) can be derived as
P (x, y) = ∑k F (x, y, k) *r (k) ,
where k denotes the index of the reference sample in the template.
P (x, y) = ∑k F (x, y, k) *r (k) ,
where k denotes the index of the reference sample in the template.
In the test, this prediction is used for block size with both width and height up to 32 (except for 4x32, 32x4, 8x32 and 32x8) . The template size is 2 for blocks with both width and height up to 16 and it is only used for mode 0, 1, and (2+2*k) . For other blocks, template size is set to 1; is used for mode 0, 1, and (2+4*k) ; prediction is only performed for 16x16 positions, and the rest of the samples are generated by bilinear interpolation. For all block sizes, block shape and mode-based symmetry is used. Reference length is set to W and H for modes greater than 18 and less than 50 and set to 2*W and 2*H otherwise.
2.1.2. Inter prediction
2.1.2.1. Local illumination compensation (LIC)
2.1.2. Inter prediction
2.1.2.1. Local illumination compensation (LIC)
LIC is an inter prediction technique to model local illumination variation between current block and its prediction block as a function of that between current block template and reference block template. The parameters of the function can be denoted by a scale α and an offset β, which forms a linear equation, that is, α*p [x] +β to compensate illumination changes, where p [x] is a reference sample pointed to by MV at a location x on reference picture. When wrap around motion compensation is enabled, the MV shall be clipped with wrap around offset taken into consideration. Since α and β can be derived based on current block template and reference block template, no signaling overhead is required for them, except that an LIC flag is signaled for AMVP mode to indicate the use of LIC. For the merge mode, the LIC flag is not inherited from a merge candidate, instead, it is derived on-the-fly. More specifically, of a merge candidate is derived by comparing two template costs: a SAD-based template cost, denoted as C0, and a Mean Removal SAD (MRSAD) -based template cost, denoted as C1. The LIC flag is set to be false, if C0 <= C1 and is set to be true, if C0 > C1. To favor the inherited LIC flag, C0 is multiplied by α if the inherited LIC flag is false while C1 is multiplied by α if the inherited LIC flag is true, where α < 1.
The local illumination compensation is used for inter CUs with the following modifications.
· Intra neighbor samples can be used in LIC parameter derivation.
· LIC is disabled for blocks with less than 32 luma samples.
· For both non-subblock and affine modes, LIC parameter derivation is performed based on the template block
samples corresponding to the current CU, instead of partial template block samples corresponding to first top-left 16x16 unit.
· Samples of the reference block template are generated by using MC with the block MV without rounding it
to integer-pel precision.
· The LIC parameters could be adjusted instead of directly using the derived values. Similar to the slope
adjustment of CCLM, an adjustment parameter for the uni-predicted LIC coded block is used to modify parameters of LIC. The adjustment parameter is signalled for AMVP mode.
· Intra neighbor samples can be used in LIC parameter derivation.
· LIC is disabled for blocks with less than 32 luma samples.
· For both non-subblock and affine modes, LIC parameter derivation is performed based on the template block
samples corresponding to the current CU, instead of partial template block samples corresponding to first top-left 16x16 unit.
· Samples of the reference block template are generated by using MC with the block MV without rounding it
to integer-pel precision.
· The LIC parameters could be adjusted instead of directly using the derived values. Similar to the slope
adjustment of CCLM, an adjustment parameter for the uni-predicted LIC coded block is used to modify parameters of LIC. The adjustment parameter is signalled for AMVP mode.
For the bi-predictive inter CUs, two sets of LIC parameters are separately derived for L0 and L1 prediction samples. An iterative manner to derive the L0 and L1 LIC parameters is applied. Specifically, L0 LIC parameters are firstly derived by minimizing difference between L0 template prediction T0 and the template T and the samples in T are updated by subtracting the corresponding samples in T0. Then, the L1 parameters are calculated that minimizes the difference between L1 template prediction T1 and the updated template. Finally, the L0 parameter is refined again in the same way.
For inter-prediction merge modes, the LIC flag value could be either signalled for regular merge mode, affine merge mode and TM merge mode or inherited from a merge candidate. The signalled flag indicates if the original inherited LIC flag or the reverse LIC flag value is used for a merge candidate. Also, LIC is enabled with PU level BDMVR and BDOF.
Non-local illumination compensation (NLIC) is applied in ECM wherein the linear model is derived from the previously coded inter CUs by minimizing the difference between their reconstruction and prediction samples. When constructing the merge lists, up to 16 and 6 NLIC candidates (obtained from both spatial adjacent and non-adjacent positions) are inserted to the lists of regular merge and subblock merge respectively, and reordered with the existing merge candidates. The lengths of the output merge lists are kept unchanged. The same pattern used for non-adjacent merge mode is reused to locate the non-adjacent positions in the scheme.
2.1.2.2. Non-adjacent spatial candidate
2.1.2.2. Non-adjacent spatial candidate
The non-adjacent spatial merge candidates are inserted after the temporal motion vector prediction (TMVP) in the regular merge candidate list. The pattern of spatial merge candidates is shown in Fig. 29. The distances between non-adjacent spatial candidates and current coding block are based on the width and height of current coding block. The line buffer restriction is not applied.
2.1.2.3. Temporal motion information derivation
2.1.2.3. Temporal motion information derivation
In VVC, the Temporal Motion Vector Prediction (TMVP) for the AMVP and merge mode is derived by fetching the motion information from the center or the bottom-right of the collocated block in a signaled collocated picture. Similarly, for the Subblock-based Temporal Motion Vector Prediction (SbTMVP) mode, the motion information from the left neighboring position is used as a motion shift, which is then employed to obtain TMVPs at sub-CU level.
In ECM, to further improve the coding efficiency of TMVP, two aspects are modified. Firstly, two collocated pictures are utilized which are the two reference frames with the least POC distance relative to the to-be-coded frame. Secondly, the motion shift to locate TMVP is adaptively determined from multiple locations according to template costs. More specifically, two motion shift candidate lists are constructed respectively for the two collocated frames. The motion shifts with the minimum template matching cost are used to derive SbTMVP or TMVP candidates. At most 4 SbTMVP candidates are included in the sub-block-based merge list. The SbTMVP candidate with the least template matching cost derived from the first collocated frame is placed in the first entry without reordering, while other SbTMVP candidates are sorted together with affine candidates. In addition, the prediction direction of each subblock template is determined based on the center subblock. As illustrated in Fig. 30, if the center subblock is uni-predicted, then all the subblock templates are uni-predicted, and vice versa. If the motion vector of corresponding adjacent subblock at the determined reference list is not available for a subblock template, zero MV is used for that subblock template.
2.1.2.4. AMVP with SbTMVP mode
2.1.2.4. AMVP with SbTMVP mode
The concept of SbTMVP mode is extended to AMVP. Given a CU coded in AMVP with SbTMVP mode, the CU is predicted in a similar way as that of SbTMVP in merge mode except that the motion shift is signaled in the bitstream instead of being derived from neighboring blocks The motion shift is obtained using MVP with a signaled MVD. The number of MVDs is determined according to the percentage of the area of the blocks coded in the the AMVP with SbTMVP mode in the previous coded picture with the same temporal layer as follows:
- If the current picture is the first coded picture in a temporal layer, the number of MVD is set to 8.
- Otherwise, if the percentage of the area of the proposed mode is smaller than 4%, the number of MVD is
set to 4.
- Otherwise, if the percentage of the area of the proposed mode is smaller than 7%, the number of MVD is
set to 8.
- Otherwise, the number of MVD is set to 12.
- If the current picture is the first coded picture in a temporal layer, the number of MVD is set to 8.
- Otherwise, if the percentage of the area of the proposed mode is smaller than 4%, the number of MVD is
set to 4.
- Otherwise, if the percentage of the area of the proposed mode is smaller than 7%, the number of MVD is
set to 8.
- Otherwise, the number of MVD is set to 12.
Fig. 31A to Fig. 31C illustrate possible MVs of the proposed mode. Same as SbTMVP mode, the CU is split into 4x4 subblocks, and each subblock derives its own motion from a corresponding subblock in the collocated picture. One collocated picture is used for non-low delay pictures, whereas two collocated pictures are used for low delay pictures. When deriving the motion for subblocks, the reference pictures are fixed to the one with the reference picture index equal to 0.
When the AMVP with SbTMVP mode is applied to the CU, LIC and MHP are always disabled, and OBMC is always enabled for the CU. Besides, the AMVR is enabled for picture resolution larger than or equal to 3840x2160 luma samples. When the AMVR is enabled for a AMVP with SbTMVP coded block, the MVD magnitudes are increased from {4, 8, 12} -pel to {16, 24, 32} -pel.
2.1.2.5. Template matching (TM)
2.1.2.5. Template matching (TM)
Template matching (TM) is a decoder-side MV derivation method to refine the motion information of the current CU by finding the closest match between a template (i.e., top and/or left neighbouring blocks of the current CU) in the current picture and a block (i.e., same size to the template) in a reference picture. As illustrated in Fig. 32, a better MV is searched around the initial motion of the current CU within a [–8, +8] -pel search range. The template matching method is used with the following modifications: search step size is determined based on AMVR mode and TM can be cascaded with bilateral matching process in merge modes.
In AMVP mode, an MVP candidate is determined based on template matching error to select the one which reaches the minimum difference between the current block template and the reference block template, and then TM is performed only for this particular MVP candidate for MV refinement. TM refines this MVP candidate, starting from full-pel MVD precision (or 4-pel for 4-pel AMVR mode) within a [–8, +8] -pel search range by using iterative 16-point diamond search. The AMVP candidate may be further refined by using cross search with full-pel MVD precision (or 4-pel for 4-pel AMVR mode) , followed sequentially by half-pel and quarter-pel ones depending on AMVR mode. This search process ensures that the MVP candidate still keeps the same MV precision as indicated by the AMVR mode after TM process. In the search process, if the difference between the previous minimum cost and the current minimum cost in the iteration is less than a threshold that is equal to the area of the block, the search process terminates.
Table 2. Search patterns of AMVR and merge mode with AMVR.
Table 2. Search patterns of AMVR and merge mode with AMVR.
In merge mode, similar search method is applied to the merge candidate indicated by the merge index. TM may perform all the way down to 1/8-pel MVD precision or skipping those beyond half-pel MVD precision, depending on whether the alternative interpolation filter (that is used when AMVR is of half-pel mode) is used according to merged motion information. Besides, when TM mode is enabled, template matching may work as an independent process or an extra MV refinement process between block-based and subblock-based bilateral matching (BM) methods, depending on whether BM can be enabled or not according to its enabling condition check.
When TM is applied to bi-predictive blocks, an iterative process is used. Specifically, the initial motion vectors of L0 and L1 are firstly refined and TM costs Cost0 and Cost1 are calculated for L0 and L1, respectively. When Cost0 is larger than Cost1, the refined motion vector of L1 (MV’1) is used to derive a further refined motion vector of L0 (MV’0) . Then, the MV’1 is further refined using MV’0. Similarly, when Cost0 is not larger than Cost1, the refined motion vector of L0 (MV’0) is used to derive a further refined motion vector of L1 (MV’1) , and the MV’0 is further refined using MV’1. Besides, TM for bi-prediction is enabled when DMVR condition is satisfied.
2.1.2.5.1. TM-based subblock motion refinement
2.1.2.5.1. TM-based subblock motion refinement
It is proposed to apply the template matching to subblock based motion tools, including the affine and SbTMVP mode. More specifically, the control point motion vectors (CPMVs) of uni-predicted affine merge candidates and the motion shift of SbTMVP candidates are refined using TM. For a uni-predicted affine merge candidate, a same MV offset is assigned to all the CPMVs, and the TM cost of the affine candidate is calculated accordingly. The optimal CPMV offset with the minimum TM cost can be used to refine the corresponding affine candidate. For a SbTMVP candidate, the initial motion shift can be refined with TM, and then the refined motion shift will be utilized to derive subblock temporal motion information.
2.1.2.6. Multi-pass decoder-side motion vector refinement
2.1.2.6. Multi-pass decoder-side motion vector refinement
A multi-pass decoder-side motion vector refinement is applied. In the first pass, bilateral matching (BM) is applied to the coding block. In the second pass, BM is applied to each 16x16 subblock within the coding block. In the third pass, MV in each 8x8 subblock is refined by applying bi-directional optical flow (BDOF) . The refined MVs are stored for both spatial and temporal motion vector prediction.
2.1.2.6.1. First pass –Block based bilateral matching MV refinement
2.1.2.6.1. First pass –Block based bilateral matching MV refinement
In the first pass, a refined MV is derived by applying BM to a coding block. Similar to decoder-side motion vector refinement (DMVR) , in bi-prediction operation, a refined MV is searched around the two initial MVs (MV0 and MV1) in the reference picture lists L0 and L1. The refined MVs (MV0_pass1 and MV1_pass1) are derived around the initiate MVs based on the minimum bilateral matching cost between the two reference blocks in L0 and L1.
BM performs local search to derive integer sample precision intDeltaMV. The local search applies a 3×3 square search pattern to loop through the search range [–sHor, sHor] in horizontal direction and [–sVer, sVer] in vertical direction, wherein, the values of sHor and sVer are determined by the block dimension, and the maximum value of sHor and sVer is 8.
The bilateral matching cost is calculated as: bilCost = mvDistanceCost + sadCost. When the block size cbW *cbH is greater than 64, mean-removal SAD (MRSAD) cost function is applied to remove the DC effect of distortion between reference blocks. When the bilCost at the center point of the 3×3 search pattern has the minimum cost, the intDeltaMV local search is terminated. Otherwise, the current minimum cost search point becomes the new center point of the 3×3 search pattern and continue to search for the minimum cost, until it reaches the end of the search range.
The existing fractional sample refinement is further applied to derive the final deltaMV. The refined MVs after the first pass is then derived as:
· MV0_pass1 = MV0 + deltaMV,
· MV1_pass1 = MV1 –deltaMV.
2.1.2.6.2. Second pass –Subblock based bilateral matching MV refinement
· MV0_pass1 = MV0 + deltaMV,
· MV1_pass1 = MV1 –deltaMV.
2.1.2.6.2. Second pass –Subblock based bilateral matching MV refinement
In the second pass, a refined MV is derived by applying BM to a 16×16 grid subblock. For each subblock, a refined MV is searched around the two MVs (MV0_pass1 and MV1_pass1) , obtained on the first pass, in the reference picture list L0 and L1. The refined MVs (MV0_pass2 (sbIdx2) and MV1_pass2 (sbIdx2) ) are derived based on the minimum bilateral matching cost between the two reference subblocks in L0 and L1.
For each subblock, BM performs full search to derive integer sample precision intDeltaMV. The full search has a search range [–sHor, sHor] in horizontal direction and [–sVer, sVer] in vertical direction, wherein, the values of sHor and sVer are determined by the block dimension, and the maximum value of sHor and sVer is 8.
The bilateral matching cost is calculated by applying a cost factor to the SATD cost between two reference subblocks, as: bilCost = satdCost *costFactor. The search area (2*sHor + 1) * (2*sVer +1) is divided up to 5 diamond shape search regions. Each search region is assigned a costFactor, which is determined by the distance (intDeltaMV) between each search point and the starting MV, and each diamond region is processed in the order starting from the center of the search area. In each region, the search points are processed in the raster scan order starting from the top left going to the bottom right corner of the region. When the minimum bilCost within the current search region is less than a threshold equal to sbW *sbH, the int-pel full search is terminated, otherwise, the int-pel full search continues to the next search region until all search points are examined. Additionally, if the difference between the previous minimum cost and the current minimum cost in the iteration is less than a threshold that is equal to the area of the block, the search process terminates. Fig. 33 illustrates diamond regions in the search area.
The existing VVC DMVR fractional sample refinement is further applied to derive the final deltaMV (sbIdx2) . The refined MVs at second pass is then derived as:
· MV0_pass2 (sbIdx2) = MV0_pass1 + deltaMV (sbIdx2) ,
· MV1_pass2 (sbIdx2) = MV1_pass1 –deltaMV (sbIdx2) .
2.1.2.6.3. Third pass –Subblock based bi-directional optical flow MV refinement
· MV0_pass2 (sbIdx2) = MV0_pass1 + deltaMV (sbIdx2) ,
· MV1_pass2 (sbIdx2) = MV1_pass1 –deltaMV (sbIdx2) .
2.1.2.6.3. Third pass –Subblock based bi-directional optical flow MV refinement
In the third pass, a refined MV is derived by applying BDOF to an 8×8 grid subblock. For each 8×8 subblock, BDOF refinement is applied to derive scaled Vx and Vy without clipping starting from the refined MV of the parent subblock of the second pass. The derived bioMv (Vx, Vy) is rounded to 1/16 sample precision and clipped between -32 and 32.
The refined MVs (MV0_pass3 (sbIdx3) and MV1_pass3 (sbIdx3) ) at third pass are derived as:
· MV0_pass3 (sbIdx3) = MV0_pass2 (sbIdx2) + bioMv,
· MV1_pass3 (sbIdx3) = MV0_pass2 (sbIdx2) –bioMv.
2.1.2.6.4. Fourth pass –Adaptive subblock based bi-directional optical flow MV refinement
· MV0_pass3 (sbIdx3) = MV0_pass2 (sbIdx2) + bioMv,
· MV1_pass3 (sbIdx3) = MV0_pass2 (sbIdx2) –bioMv.
2.1.2.6.4. Fourth pass –Adaptive subblock based bi-directional optical flow MV refinement
In the fourth pass, a refined MV is derived by applying BDOF to a 4×4 or 8×8 or 16x16 grid subblock. When a block is smaller than 1024 pixels, the 4×4 grid subblock is used. Otherwise, 8×8 grid subblock is used. The MV of each subblock is refined in the same way as that used in third pass.
In all aforementioned sub-clauses, when wrap around motion compensation is enabled, the motion vectors shall be clipped with wrap around offset taken into consideration. It is noted that in ECM, the DMVR is extended to non-equal POC distance cases, and the mean removed equations are utilized to derive the BDOF MV refinement parameters as:
(ΣGx. Gx+R1) *vx + ΣGx. Gy *vy = ΣdI . Gx. → (∑Gx. Gx+R1) *vx + ∑Gx. Gy *vy = ∑dI . Gx -dM . ∑Gx
∑Gx. Gy *vx + (∑Gy. Gy+R1) *vy= ∑dI . Gy → ∑Gx. Gy *vx + (∑Gy. Gy+R1) *vy = ∑dI . Gy -dM . ΣGy
2.1.2.7. Adaptive decoder-side motion vector refinement
(ΣGx. Gx+R1) *vx + ΣGx. Gy *vy = ΣdI . Gx. → (∑Gx. Gx+R1) *vx + ∑Gx. Gy *vy = ∑dI . Gx -dM . ∑Gx
∑Gx. Gy *vx + (∑Gy. Gy+R1) *vy= ∑dI . Gy → ∑Gx. Gy *vx + (∑Gy. Gy+R1) *vy = ∑dI . Gy -dM . ΣGy
2.1.2.7. Adaptive decoder-side motion vector refinement
Adaptive decoder side motion vector refinement method is an extension of multi-pass DMVR which consists of the two new merge modes to refine MV only in one direction, either L0 or L1, of the bi-prediction for the merge candidates that meet the DMVR conditions. The multi-pass DMVR process is applied for the selected merge candidate to refine the motion vectors, however either MVD0 or MVD1 is set to zero in the 1st pass (i.e., PU level) DMVR.
The merge candidates for the new merge mode are derived from spatial neighboring coded blocks, TMVPs, non-adjacent blocks, HMVPs, pair-wise candidate, similar as in the regular merge mode. The difference is that only those meet DMVR conditions are added into the candidate list. The same merge candidate list is used by the two new merge modes. If the list of BM candidates contains the inherited BCW weights and DMVR process is unchanged except the computation of the distortion is made using MRSAD or MRSATD if the weights are non-equal and the bi-prediction is weighted with BCW weights. Merge index is coded as in regular merge mode.
2.1.2.8. OBMC
2.1.2.8. OBMC
When OBMC is applied, top and left boundary pixels of a CU are refined using neighboring block’s motion information with a weighted prediction.
Conditions of not applying OBMC are as follows:
· When OBMC is disabled at SPS level.
· When current block has intra mode or IBC mode.
· When current luma block area is smaller or equal to 32.
· When OBMC is disabled at SPS level.
· When current block has intra mode or IBC mode.
· When current luma block area is smaller or equal to 32.
Additionally OBMC is adaptively controlled on a block level as follows:
· OBMC flag is inherited from a neighboring affine block for affine merge mode.
· OBMC is not applied to a block if there is a neighbor block coded with IBC, palette, or BDPCM modes.
· When applying OBMC to a block, block boundary check whether OBMC is applied to the boundary is
further made based on the reference samples of the current block. If any absolute difference between the prediction sample and non-interpolated (integer pel) reference sample is greater than a threshold, the OBMC is not applied to that boundary.
· OBMC flag is inherited from a neighboring affine block for affine merge mode.
· OBMC is not applied to a block if there is a neighbor block coded with IBC, palette, or BDPCM modes.
· When applying OBMC to a block, block boundary check whether OBMC is applied to the boundary is
further made based on the reference samples of the current block. If any absolute difference between the prediction sample and non-interpolated (integer pel) reference sample is greater than a threshold, the OBMC is not applied to that boundary.
A subblock-boundary OBMC is performed by applying the same blending to the top, left, bottom, and right subblock boundary pixels using neighboring subblocks’ motion information. It is enabled for the subblock based coding tools:
· Affine AMVP modes;
· Affine merge modes and subblock-based temporal motion vector prediction (SbTMVP) ;
· Subblock-based bilateral matching.
· Affine AMVP modes;
· Affine merge modes and subblock-based temporal motion vector prediction (SbTMVP) ;
· Subblock-based bilateral matching.
When OBMC mode is used in CIIP mode with LMCS, inter blending is performed prior to LMCS mapping of inter samples. LMCS is applied to blended inter samples which are combined with LMCS applied intra samples in CIIP mode,
where InterpredY represents the samples predicted by the motion of current block in the original domain,
IntrapredY represents the samples predicted in the mapped domain, OBMCpredY represents the samples predicted by the motion of neighboring blocks in the original domain, and w0 and w1 are the weights.
where InterpredY represents the samples predicted by the motion of current block in the original domain,
IntrapredY represents the samples predicted in the mapped domain, OBMCpredY represents the samples predicted by the motion of neighboring blocks in the original domain, and w0 and w1 are the weights.
When OBMC mode is used in a LIC coded block, the LIC parameters are applied to generate the corresponding prediction samples for the OBMC of the LIC coded block. Besides, to reduce the complexity, the OBMC is only applied to the top and left CU boundaries while being always disabled for the boundaries of the internal sub-blocks of the LIC coded block.
2.1.2.9. Template matching based OBMC
2.1.2.9. Template matching based OBMC
In template matching based OBMC scheme, instead of directly using the weighted prediction, the prediction value of CU boundary samples derivation approach is decided according to the template matching costs, including using current block’s motion information only, or using neighboring block’s motion information as well with one of the blending modes.
In this scheme for each block with a size of 4×4 at the top CU boundary, the above template size equals to 4×1. If N adjacent blocks have the same motion information, then the above template size is enlarged to 4N×1 since the MC operation can be processed at one time. For each left block with a size of 4×4 at the left CU boundary, the left template size equals to 1×4 or 1×4N. Fig. 34 illustrates a template.
For each 4×4 top block (or N 4×4 blocks group) , the prediction value of boundary samples is derived following the below steps.
Take block A as the current block and its above neighboring block AboveNeighbor_A for example. The operation for left blocks is conducted in the same manner.
First, three template matching costs (Cost1, Cost2, Cost3) are measured by SAD between the reconstructed samples of a template and its corresponding reference samples derived by MC process according to the following three types of motion information:
Cost1 is calculated according to A’s motion information.
Cost2 is calculated according to AboveNeighbor_A’s motion information.
Cost3 is calculated according to weighted prediction of A’s and AboveNeighbor_A’s motion information with
weighting factors as 3/4 and 1/4 respectively.
Cost1 is calculated according to A’s motion information.
Cost2 is calculated according to AboveNeighbor_A’s motion information.
Cost3 is calculated according to weighted prediction of A’s and AboveNeighbor_A’s motion information with
weighting factors as 3/4 and 1/4 respectively.
Second, choose one approach to calculate the final prediction results of boundary samples by comparing Cost1, Cost2 and Cost 3.
The original MC result using current block’s motion information is denoted as Pixel1, and the MC result using neighboring block’s motion information is denoted as Pixel2. The final prediction result is denoted as NewPixel.
- If Cost1 is minimum, then NewPixel (i, j) = Pixel1 (i, j) .
- If (Cost2 + (Cost2 >> 2) + (Cost2 >> 3) ) <= Cost1, then blending mode 1 is used.
- If Cost1 is minimum, then NewPixel (i, j) = Pixel1 (i, j) .
- If (Cost2 + (Cost2 >> 2) + (Cost2 >> 3) ) <= Cost1, then blending mode 1 is used.
For luma blocks, the number of blending pixel rows is 4.
NewPixel (i, 0) = (26×Pixel1 (i, 0) +6×Pixel2 (i, 0) +16) >>5
NewPixel (i, 1) = (7×Pixel1 (i, 1) +Pixel2 (i, 1) +4) 》》3
NewPixel (i, 2) = (15×Pixel1 (i, 2) +Pixel2 (i, 2) +8) >>4
NewPixel (i, 3) = (31×Pixel1 (i, 3) +Pixel2 (i, 3) +16) >>5
NewPixel (i, 0) = (26×Pixel1 (i, 0) +6×Pixel2 (i, 0) +16) >>5
NewPixel (i, 1) = (7×Pixel1 (i, 1) +Pixel2 (i, 1) +4) 》》3
NewPixel (i, 2) = (15×Pixel1 (i, 2) +Pixel2 (i, 2) +8) >>4
NewPixel (i, 3) = (31×Pixel1 (i, 3) +Pixel2 (i, 3) +16) >>5
For chroma blocks, the number of blending pixel rows is 1.
NewPixel (i, 0) = (26×Pixel1 (i, 0) +6×Pixel2 (i, 0) +16) >>5
- If Cost1 <= Cost2, then blending mode 2 is used.
NewPixel (i, 0) = (26×Pixel1 (i, 0) +6×Pixel2 (i, 0) +16) >>5
- If Cost1 <= Cost2, then blending mode 2 is used.
For luma blocks, the number of blending pixel rows is 2.
NewPixel (i, 0) = (15×Pixel1 (i, 0) +Pixel2 (i, 0) +8) >>4
NewPixel (i, 1) = (31×Pixel1 (i, 1) +Pixel2 (i, 1) +16) >>5
NewPixel (i, 0) = (15×Pixel1 (i, 0) +Pixel2 (i, 0) +8) >>4
NewPixel (i, 1) = (31×Pixel1 (i, 1) +Pixel2 (i, 1) +16) >>5
For chroma blocks, the number of blending pixel rows/columns is 1.
NewPixel (i, 0) = (15×Pixel1 (i, 0) +Pixel2 (i, 0) +8) >>4
- Otherwise, blending mode 3 is used.
NewPixel (i, 0) = (15×Pixel1 (i, 0) +Pixel2 (i, 0) +8) >>4
- Otherwise, blending mode 3 is used.
For luma blocks, the number of blending pixel rows is 4.
NewPixel (i, 1) = (7×Pixel1 (i, 1) +Pixel2 (i, 1) +4) >>3
NewPixel (i, 2) = (15×Pixel1 (i, 2) +Pixel2 (i, 2) +8) >>4
NewPixel (i, 3) = (31×Pixel1 (i, 3) +Pixel2 (i, 3) +16) >>5
NewPixel (i, 1) = (7×Pixel1 (i, 1) +Pixel2 (i, 1) +4) >>3
NewPixel (i, 2) = (15×Pixel1 (i, 2) +Pixel2 (i, 2) +8) >>4
NewPixel (i, 3) = (31×Pixel1 (i, 3) +Pixel2 (i, 3) +16) >>5
For chroma blocks, the number of blending pixel rows is 1.
NewPixel (i, 0) = (7×Pixel1 (i, 0) +Pixel2 (i, 0) +4) >>3
2.1.2.10. History-parameter-based affine model inheritance and non-adjacent affine mode
NewPixel (i, 0) = (7×Pixel1 (i, 0) +Pixel2 (i, 0) +4) >>3
2.1.2.10. History-parameter-based affine model inheritance and non-adjacent affine mode
History-parameter-based affine model inheritance (HAMI) allows the affine model to be inherited from a previously affine-coded block which may not be neighboring to the current block. Similar to the enhanced regular merge mode, non-adjacent affine mode (NA-AFF) is introduced.
A first history-parameter table (HPT) is established. An entry of the first HPT stores a set of affine parameters: a, b, c and d, each of which is represented by a 16-bit signed integer. Entries in HPT is categorized by reference list and reference index. Five reference indices are supported for each reference list in HPT. In a formular way, the category of HPT (denoted as HPTCat) is calculated as
HPTCat (RefList, RefIdx) = 5×RefList + min (RefIdx, 4) ,
wherein RefList and RefIdx represents a reference picture list (0 or 1) and a reference index, respectively. For
each category, at most seven entries can be stored, resulting in 70 entries totally in HPT. At the beginning of each CTU row, the number of entries for each category is initialized as zero. After decoding an affine-coded CU with reference list RefListcur and RefIdxcur, the affine parameters are utilized to update entries in the category HPTCat (RefListcur, RefIdxcur) in a way similar to HMVP table updating. Fig. 35A and Fig. 35B illustrate the first HPT and the second HPT, respectively.
HPTCat (RefList, RefIdx) = 5×RefList + min (RefIdx, 4) ,
wherein RefList and RefIdx represents a reference picture list (0 or 1) and a reference index, respectively. For
each category, at most seven entries can be stored, resulting in 70 entries totally in HPT. At the beginning of each CTU row, the number of entries for each category is initialized as zero. After decoding an affine-coded CU with reference list RefListcur and RefIdxcur, the affine parameters are utilized to update entries in the category HPTCat (RefListcur, RefIdxcur) in a way similar to HMVP table updating. Fig. 35A and Fig. 35B illustrate the first HPT and the second HPT, respectively.
A history-affine-parameter-based candidate (HAPC) is derived from one of the seven neighbouring 4×4 blocks denoted as A0, A1, A2, B0, B1, B2 or B3 in Fig. 35A and a set of affine parameters stored in a corresponding entry in the first HPT. The MV of a neighbouring 4×4 block served as the base MV. In a formulating way, the MV of the current block at position (x, y) is calculated as:
where (mvh base, mvv base) represents the MV of the neighbouring 4×4 block, (xbase, ybase) represents the center
position of the neighbouring 4×4 block. (x, y) can be the top-left, top-right and bottom-left corner of the current block to obtain the corner-position MVs (CPMVs) for the current block, or it can be the center of the current block to obtain a regular MV for the current block.
where (mvh base, mvv base) represents the MV of the neighbouring 4×4 block, (xbase, ybase) represents the center
position of the neighbouring 4×4 block. (x, y) can be the top-left, top-right and bottom-left corner of the current block to obtain the corner-position MVs (CPMVs) for the current block, or it can be the center of the current block to obtain a regular MV for the current block.
A second history-parameter table (HPT) with base MV information is also appended. There are nine entries in the second HPT, wherein an entry comprises a base MV, a reference index and four affine parameters for each reference list, and a base position. An additional merge HAPC can be generated from the second HPT with the base MV information the corresponding affine models stored in an entry.
Moreover, pair-wised affine merge candidates are generated by two affine merge candidates which are history-derived or not history-derived. A pair-wised affine merge candidates is generated by averaging the CPMVs of existing affine merge candidates in the list.
As a response to new HAPCs being introduced, the size of sub-block-based merge candidate list is increased from five to fifteen, which are all involved in the ARMC process.
In NA-AFF, the pattern of obtaining non-adjacent spatial neighbors is shown in Fig. 36A and Fig. 36B. Same as the existing non-adjacent regular merge candidates, the distances between non-adjacent spatial neighbors and current coding block in the NA-AFF are also defined based on the width and height of current CU.
The motion information of the non-adjacent spatial neighbors in Fig. 36A and Fig. 36B is utilized to generate additional inherited and constructed affine merge/AMVP candidates. Specifically, for inherited candidates, the same derivation process of the inherited affine merge/AMVP candidates in the VVC is kept unchanged except that the CPMVs are inherited from non-adjacent spatial neighbors. The non-adjacent spatial neighbors are checked based on their distances to the current block, i.e., from near to far. At a specific distance, only the first available neighbor (that is coded with the affine mode) from each side (e.g., the left and above) of the current block is included for inherited candidate derivation. The checking orders of the neighbors on the left and above sides are bottom-to-up and right-to-left, respectively.
For the first type of constructed candidates, the positions of one left and above non-adjacent spatial neighbors are firstly determined independently; After that, the location of the top-left neighbor can be determined accordingly which can enclose a rectangular virtual block together with the left and above non-adjacent neighbors. Then, the motion information of the three non-adjacent neighbors is used to form the CPMVs at the top-left (A) , top-right (B) and bottom-left (C) of the virtual block, which is finally projected to the current CU to generate the corresponding constructed candidates.
The NA-AFF candidates are inserted into the existing affine merge candidate list and affine AMVP candidate list according to the following orders:
Affine merge mode:
1. SbTMVP candidate, if available
2. Inherited from adjacent neighbors
3. Inherited from non-adjacent neighbors
4. Constructed from adjacent neighbors
5. The first type of constructed affine candidates from non-adjacent neighbors
6. Zero MVs
Affine AMVP mode:
1. Inherited from adjacent neighbors
2. Constructed from adjacent neighbors
3. Translational MVs from adjacent neighbors
4. Translational MVs from temporal neighbors
5. Inherited from non-adjacent neighbors
6. The first type of constructed affine candidates from non-adjacent neighbors
7. Zero MVs
Affine merge mode:
1. SbTMVP candidate, if available
2. Inherited from adjacent neighbors
3. Inherited from non-adjacent neighbors
4. Constructed from adjacent neighbors
5. The first type of constructed affine candidates from non-adjacent neighbors
6. Zero MVs
Affine AMVP mode:
1. Inherited from adjacent neighbors
2. Constructed from adjacent neighbors
3. Translational MVs from adjacent neighbors
4. Translational MVs from temporal neighbors
5. Inherited from non-adjacent neighbors
6. The first type of constructed affine candidates from non-adjacent neighbors
7. Zero MVs
Due to the inclusion of the additional candidates generated by NA-AFF, the size of the affine merge candidate list is increased from 5 to 15. The subgroup size of ARMC for the affine merge mode is increased from 3 to 15. Fig. 36A and Fig. 36B illustrates spatial neighbors for deriving affine merge/AMVP candidates, and Fig. 37 illustrates from non-adjacent neighbors to the first type of constructed affine merge/AMVP candidates.
In NA-AFF:
1. The area from where the non-adjacent neighbors come is restricted to be within the current CTU (i.e.,
no additional storage requirements for line buffer) .
2. The storage granularity for affine motion information, including CPMVs and reference indexes, is
reduced from 8x8 to 16x16 (i.e., only the affine motion from the top-left 8x8 block is saved) . Additionally, the saved CPMVs are projected to each 16x16 block before storage, such that the position and size information are not needed.
3. Only the top-left and top-right CPMVs are stored (i.e., always using 4-parameter affine model for NA-
AFF) .
2.1.2.11. Sample-based BDOF
1. The area from where the non-adjacent neighbors come is restricted to be within the current CTU (i.e.,
no additional storage requirements for line buffer) .
2. The storage granularity for affine motion information, including CPMVs and reference indexes, is
reduced from 8x8 to 16x16 (i.e., only the affine motion from the top-left 8x8 block is saved) . Additionally, the saved CPMVs are projected to each 16x16 block before storage, such that the position and size information are not needed.
3. Only the top-left and top-right CPMVs are stored (i.e., always using 4-parameter affine model for NA-
AFF) .
2.1.2.11. Sample-based BDOF
In the sample-based BDOF, instead of deriving motion refinement (Vx, Vy) on a block basis, it is performed per sample.
The coding block is divided into 8×8 subblocks. For each subblock, whether to apply BDOF or not is determined by checking the SAD between the two reference subblocks against a threshold. If decided to apply BDOF to a subblock, for every sample in the subblock, a sliding 5×5 window is used and the existing BDOF process is applied for every sliding window to derive Vx and Vy. The derived motion refinement (Vx, Vy) is applied to adjust the bi-predicted sample value for the center sample of the window.
2.1.2.12. Interpolation
2.1.2.12. Interpolation
The 8-tap interpolation filter used in VVC is replaced with a 12-tap filter. The interpolation filter is derived from the sinc function of which the frequency response is cut off at Nyquist frequency and cropped by a cosine window function. Fig. 38 illustrates frequency responses of the interpolation filter and the VVC interpolation filter at half-pel phase.
Table 3. Filter coefficients of the 12-tap interpolation filter
Table 3. Filter coefficients of the 12-tap interpolation filter
For chroma interpolation additional longer 6-tap filters are used.
Table 4. The coefficients of the 6-tap interpolation filter for chroma components.
2.1.2.13. Multi-hypothesis prediction (MHP)
Table 4. The coefficients of the 6-tap interpolation filter for chroma components.
2.1.2.13. Multi-hypothesis prediction (MHP)
In the multi-hypothesis inter prediction mode, one or more additional motion-compensated prediction signals are signaled, in addition to the conventional bi-prediction signal. The resulting overall prediction signal is obtained by sample-wise weighted superposition. With the bi-prediction signal pbi and the first additional inter prediction signal/hypothesis h3, the resulting prediction signal p3 is obtained as follows:
p3= (1-α) pbi+αh3
p3= (1-α) pbi+αh3
The weighting factor α is specified by the new syntax element add_hyp_weight_idx, according to the following mapping:
Analogously to above, more than one additional prediction signal can be used. The resulting overall prediction signal is accumulated iteratively with each additional prediction signal.
pn+1= (1-αn+1) pn+αn+1hn+1
pn+1= (1-αn+1) pn+αn+1hn+1
The resulting overall prediction signal is obtained as the last pn (i.e., the pn having the largest index n) . Within this EE, up to two additional prediction signals can be used (i.e., n is limited to 2) .
The motion parameters of each additional prediction hypothesis can be signaled either explicitly by specifying the reference index, the motion vector predictor index, and the motion vector difference, or implicitly by specifying a merge index. A separate multi-hypothesis merge flag distinguishes between these two signalling modes.
For inter AMVP mode, MHP is only applied if non-equal weight in BCW is selected in bi-prediction mode.
Combination of MHP and BDOF is possible, however the BDOF is only applied to the bi-prediction signal part of the prediction signal (i.e., the ordinary first two hypotheses) .
2.1.2.14. Pixel based affine motion compensation
2.1.2.14. Pixel based affine motion compensation
The minimum affine subblock size is changed from 4x4 to 1x1 for both luma and chroma components, 1x1 subblock size allows pixel based affine MC. When affine subblock width or height is smaller than 4, PROF is disabled.
2.1.2.15. Affine subblock BDOF refinement
2.1.2.15. Affine subblock BDOF refinement
BDOF subblock MV refinement and sample adjustment is applied to an affine or SbTMVP coded block with subblock MC when BDOF condition is satisfied.
An affine coded block, e.g. affine regular merge mode, affine BM merge mode, affine AMVP mode, derives MVs for each 4×4 subblock from the affine model. The BDOF process starts with the 4×4 subblocks grouping with identical MVs. The first iteration of BDOF MV refinement is processed in 8x8 subblock grid as in ECM-10.0. When the grouped subblock size is less than 256, the second iteration of BDOF MV refinement is processed in 4×4 subblock grid, and otherwise in 8×8 subblock grid. When the grouped subblock size is 4xN or Nx4, the first iteration of BDOF MV refinement is bypassed.
2.1.2.16. Adaptive reordering of merge candidates with template matching (ARMC-TM)
2.1.2.16. Adaptive reordering of merge candidates with template matching (ARMC-TM)
The merge candidates are adaptively reordered with template matching (TM) . The reordering method is applied to regular merge mode, TM merge mode, and affine merge mode (excluding the SbTMVP candidate) . For the TM merge mode, merge candidates are reordered before the refinement process.
An initial merge candidate list is firstly constructed according to given checking order, such as spatial, TMVPs, non-adjacent, HMVPs, pairwise, virtual merge candidates. Then the candidates in the initial list are divided into several subgroups. For the template matching (TM) merge mode, adaptive DMVR mode, each merge candidate in the initial list is firstly refined by using TM/multi-pass DMVR. Merge candidates in each subgroup are reordered to generate a reordered merge candidate list and the reordering is according to cost values based on template matching. The index of selected merge candidate in the reordered merge candidate list is signalled to the decoder. For simplification, merge candidates in the last but not the first subgroup are not reordered. All the zero candidates from the ARMC reordering process are excluded during the construction of Merge motion vector candidates list. The subgroup size is set to 5 for regular merge mode and TM merge mode. The subgroup size is set to 3 for affine merge mode.
· Cost calculation
· Cost calculation
The template matching cost of a merge candidate during the reordering process is measured by the SAD between samples of a template of the current block and their corresponding reference samples. The template comprises a set of reconstructed samples neighboring to the current block. Reference samples of the template are located by the motion information of the merge candidate. When a merge candidate utilizes bi-directional prediction, the reference samples of the template of the merge candidate are also generated by bi-prediction.
· Refinement of the initial merge candidate list
· Refinement of the initial merge candidate list
When multi-pass DMVR is used to derive the refined motion to the initial merge candidate list only the first pass (i.e., PU level) of multi-pass DMVR is applied in reordering. When template matching is used to derive the refined motion, the template size is set equal to 1. Only the above or left template is used during the motion refinement of TM when the block is flat with block width greater than 2 times of height or narrow with height greater than 2 times of width. TM is extended to perform 1/16-pel MVD precision. The first four merge candidates are reordered with the refined motion in TM merge mode. Fig. 39 illustrates template and reference samples of the template in reference pictures.
For subblock-based merge candidates with subblock size equal to Wsub × Hsub, the above template comprises several sub-templates with the size of Wsub × 1, and the left template comprises several sub-templates with the size of 1 × Hsub. The motion information of the subblocks in the first row and the first column of current block is used to derive the reference samples of each sub-template.
· Reordering criteria
· Reordering criteria
In the reordering process, a candidate is considered as redundant if the cost difference between a candidate and its predecessor is inferior to a lambda value e.g. |D1-D2| < λ, where D1 and D2 are the costs obtained during the first ARMC ordering and λ is the Lagrangian parameter used in the RD criterion at encoder side.
The proposed algorithm is defined as the following:
- Determine the minimum cost difference between a candidate and its predecessor among all candidates in
the list
· If the minimum cost difference is superior or equal to λ, the list is considered diverse enough and the
reordering stops.
· If this minimum cost difference is inferior to λ, the candidate is considered as redundant, and it is moved
at a further position in the list. This further position is the first position where the candidate is diverse enough compared to its predecessor.
- The algorithm stops after a finite number of iterations (if the minimum cost difference is not inferior to λ) .
- Determine the minimum cost difference between a candidate and its predecessor among all candidates in
the list
· If the minimum cost difference is superior or equal to λ, the list is considered diverse enough and the
reordering stops.
· If this minimum cost difference is inferior to λ, the candidate is considered as redundant, and it is moved
at a further position in the list. This further position is the first position where the candidate is diverse enough compared to its predecessor.
- The algorithm stops after a finite number of iterations (if the minimum cost difference is not inferior to λ) .
This algorithm is applied to the Regular, TM, BM and Affine merge modes. A similar algorithm is applied to the Merge MMVD and sign MVD prediction methods which also use ARMC for the reordering.
The value of λ is set equal to the λ of the rate distortion criterion used to select the best merge candidate at the encoder side for low delay configuration and to the value λ corresponding to a another QP for Random Access configuration. A set of λ values corresponding to each signaled QP offset is provided in the SPS or in the Slice Header for the QP offsets which are not present in the SPS.
· Extension to AMVP modes
· Extension to AMVP modes
The ARMC design is also applicable to the AMVP mode wherein the AMVP candidates are reordered according to the TM cost. For the template matching for advanced motion vector prediction (TM-AMVP) mode, an initial AMVP candidate list is constructed, followed by a refinement from TM to construct a refined AMVP candidate list. In addition, an MVP candidate with a TM cost larger than a threshold, which is equal to five times of the cost of the first MVP candidate, is skipped.
Note, when wrap around motion compensation is enabled, the MV candidate shall be clipped with wrap around offset taken into consideration. Fig. 40 illustrates template and reference samples of the template for block with sub-block motion using the motion information of the subblocks of the current block.
2.1.2.17. MV candidate type based ARMC
2.1.2.17. MV candidate type based ARMC
Merge candidates of one single candidate type, e.g., TMVP or non-adjacent MVP (NA-MVP) , are reordered based on the ARMC TM cost values. The reordered candidates are then added into the merge candidate list. The TMVP candidate type adds more TMVP candidates with more temporal positions and different inter prediction directions to perform the reordering and the selection. Moreover, NA-MVP candidate type is further extended with more spatially non-adjacent positions. The target reference picture of the TMVP candidate can be selected from any one of reference picture in the list according to scaling factor. The selected reference picture is the one whose scaling factor is the closest to 1.
2.1.2.18. TM based reordering for MMVD and affine MMVD
2.1.2.18. TM based reordering for MMVD and affine MMVD
The MMVD offsets are extended for MMVD and affine MMVD modes. Additional refinement positions along k×π/8 diagonal angles are added, thus increasing the number of directions from 4 to 16. Second, based on the SAD cost between the template (one row above and one column left to the current block) and its reference for each refinement position, all the possible MMVD refinement positions (16×6) for each base candidate are reordered. Finally, the top 1/8 refinement positions with the smallest template SAD costs are kept as available positions, consequently for MMVD index coding. The MMVD index is binarized by the rice code with the parameter equal to 2. The affine MMVD reordering is extended, in which additional refinement positions along k×π/4 diagonal angles are added. After reordering top 1/2 refinement positions with the smallest template SAD costs are kept.
The first N motion candidates in the candidate list before being reordered are utilized as the base candidates for MMVD and affine MMVD. N is equal to 3 for MMVD, and [1, 3] depending on the neighboring block affine flags for affine MMVD. Two ways of adding MMVD offsets are allowed, including the ‘two-side’ and ‘one-side’ , depending on whether the offset of the other reference picture list is mirrored or directly set to zero. Which way is applied to one block is dependent on the TM cost. Fig. 41 illustrates additional directions along k×π/8 diagonal angles.
2.1.2.19. Regression based affine candidate derivation
2.1.2.19. Regression based affine candidate derivation
The Regression based Motion Vector Field (RMVF) derivation method provides a new variety of subblock-based merge candidate. The motion vectors and center positions from the neighboring subblocks of the current CU, are used as the input to the linear regression process to derive a set of linear model parameters. Fig. 42 illustrates the neighboring 4 x 4 subblocks that are used for RMVF parameter derivation.
The subblock motion field from a previous coded affine CU and the motion vectors from the adjacent subblocks of current CU are used as the input for the regression process. The predicted CPMVs for current block are derived as output.
The regression based affine merge candidates are derived and added to the affine merge list. Subblock motion field from a previously coded affine CU and motion information from adjacent subblocks of a current CU are used as the input to the regression process to derive proposed affine candidates.
The previously coded affine CU can be identified from scanning through non-adjacent positions and the affine HMVP table.
Adjacent subblock information of current CU is fetched from 4x4 sub-blocks. For each sub-block, given a reference list, the corresponding motion vector and center coordinate of the sub-block may be used.
For each affine CU, up to 2 affine candidates can be derived. One with adjacent subblock information and one without. All the linear-regression-generated candidates are pruned and collected into one candidate sub-group, TM cost based ARMC process is applied when ARMC is enabled. Afterwards, up to N linear-regression-generated candidates are added to the affine merge list when N affine CUs are found. The number of affine candidates for ARMC is 30, the output list size is 15.
2.1.2.20. Geometric partitioning mode (GPM)
2.1.2.20.1. Geometric partitioning mode (GPM) with merge motion vector differences (MMVD)
2.1.2.20. Geometric partitioning mode (GPM)
2.1.2.20.1. Geometric partitioning mode (GPM) with merge motion vector differences (MMVD)
GPM in VVC is extended by applying motion vector refinement on top of the existing GPM uni-directional MVs. A flag is first signalled for a GPM CU, to specify whether this mode is used. If the mode is used, each geometric partition of a GPM CU can further decide whether to signal MVD or not. If MVD is signalled for a geometric partition, after a GPM merge candidate is selected, the motion of the partition is further refined by the signalled MVDs information. All other procedures are kept the same as in GPM.
The MVD is signaled as a pair of distance and direction, similar as in MMVD. There are nine candidate distances (1/4-pel, 1/2-pel, 1-pel, 2-pel, 3-pel, 4-pel, 6-pel, 8-pel, 16-pel) , and eight candidate directions (four horizontal/vertical directions and four diagonal directions) involved in GPM with MMVD (GPM-MMVD) . In addition, when pic_fpel_mmvd_enabled_flag is equal to 1, the MVD is left shifted by 2 as in MMVD.
2.1.2.20.1.1. Geometric partitioning mode (GPM) with adaptive blending
2.1.2.20.1.1. Geometric partitioning mode (GPM) with adaptive blending
In VVC, the final prediction samples are generated with by blending the prediction of the two prediction signals using weighted average. Two integer blending matrices (W0 and W1) are used. The weights in the GPM blending matrices are derived from the ramp function based on the displacement from a predicted sample position to the GPM partitioning boundary. The blending area size is fixed to two (2 samples on each side of the GPM partition split boundary) .
The blending process in ECM is improved by adding four extra blending area sizes (quarter, half, double, and quadrupole of the existing area size) . A CU level flag is coded to signal the selected blending area size is signalled. Furthermore, the extended weighting precision is utilized, in which the maximum value of the weighs is changed from 8 (in VVC) to 32 to accommodate the extended blending area sizes. Fig. 43 illustrates the ramp function for the weights for GPM blending.
2.1.2.20.2. Geometric partitioning mode (GPM) with template matching (TM)
2.1.2.20.2. Geometric partitioning mode (GPM) with template matching (TM)
Template matching is applied to GPM. When GPM mode is enabled for a CU, a CU-level flag is signaled to indicate whether TM is applied to both geometric partitions. Motion information for each geometric partition is refined using TM. When TM is chosen, a template is constructed using left, above or left and above neighboring samples according to partition angle. The motion is then refined by minimizing the difference between the current template and the template in the reference picture using the same search pattern of merge mode with half-pel interpolation filter disabled.
Table 5. Template for the 1st and 2nd geometric partitions, where A represents using above samples, L
represents using left samples, and L+A represents using both left and above samples.
Table 5. Template for the 1st and 2nd geometric partitions, where A represents using above samples, L
represents using left samples, and L+A represents using both left and above samples.
A GPM candidate list is constructed as follows:
1. Interleaved List-0 MV candidates and List-1 MV candidates are derived directly from the regular merge
candidate list, where List-0 MV candidates are higher priority than List-1 MV candidates. A pruning method with an adaptive threshold based on the current CU size is applied to remove redundant MV candidates.
2. Interleaved List-1 MV candidates and List-0 MV candidates are further derived directly from the regular
merge candidate list, where List-1 MV candidates are higher priority than List-0 MV candidates. The same pruning method with the adaptive threshold is also applied to remove redundant MV candidates.
3. Zero MV candidates are padded until the GPM candidate list is full.
1. Interleaved List-0 MV candidates and List-1 MV candidates are derived directly from the regular merge
candidate list, where List-0 MV candidates are higher priority than List-1 MV candidates. A pruning method with an adaptive threshold based on the current CU size is applied to remove redundant MV candidates.
2. Interleaved List-1 MV candidates and List-0 MV candidates are further derived directly from the regular
merge candidate list, where List-1 MV candidates are higher priority than List-0 MV candidates. The same pruning method with the adaptive threshold is also applied to remove redundant MV candidates.
3. Zero MV candidates are padded until the GPM candidate list is full.
The GPM-MMVD and GPM-TM are exclusively enabled to one GPM CU. This is done by firstly signaling the GPM-MMVD syntax. When both two GPM-MMVD control flags are equal to false (i.e., the GPM-MMVD are disabled for two GPM partitions) , the GPM-TM flag is signaled to indicate whether the template matching is applied to the two GPM partitions. Otherwise (at least one GPM-MMVD flag is equal to true) , the value of the GPM-TM flag is inferred to be false.
2.1.2.20.3. GPM with inter and intra prediction
2.1.2.20.3. GPM with inter and intra prediction
In GPM with inter and intra prediction, the final prediction samples are generated by weighting inter predicted samples and intra predicted samples for each GPM-separated region. The inter predicted samples are derived by inter GPM whereas the intra predicted samples are derived by an intra prediction mode (IPM) candidate list and an index signaled from the encoder. The IPM candidate list size is pre-defined as 3. The available IPM candidates are the parallel angular mode against the GPM block boundary (Parallel mode) , the perpendicular angular mode against the GPM block boundary (Perpendicular mode) , and the Planar mode. Furthermore, GPM with intra and intra prediction is restricted to reduce the signalling overhead for IPMs and avoid an increase in the size of the intra prediction circuit on the hardware decoder. In addition, a direct motion vector and IPM storage on the GPM-blending area is introduced to further improve the coding performance. Fig. 44A-Fig. 44C illustrate an example GPM with inter and intra prediction, respectively; and Fig. 44D illustrates an example of GPM with intra and intra prediction.
In DIMD and neighboring mode based IPM derivation Parallel mode is registered first. Therefore, max two IPM candidates derived from the decoder-side intra mode derivation (DIMD) method and/or the neighboring blocks can be registered if there is not the same IPM candidate in the list. As for the neighboring mode derivation, there are five positions for available neighboring blocks at most, but they are restricted by the angle of GPM block boundary, which are already used for GPM with template matching (GPM-TM) .
Table 6. The position of available neighboring blocks for IPM candidate derivation based on the angle of GPM
block boundary. A and L denotes the above and left side of the prediction block.
Table 6. The position of available neighboring blocks for IPM candidate derivation based on the angle of GPM
block boundary. A and L denotes the above and left side of the prediction block.
GPM-intra can be combined with GPM with merge with motion vector difference (GPM-MMVD) . TIMD is used for on IPM candidates of GPM-intra to further improve the coding performance. The Parallel mode can be registered first, then IPM candidates of TIMD, DIMD, and neighboring blocks.
2.1.2.20.4. Template matching based reordering for GPM split modes
2.1.2.20.4. Template matching based reordering for GPM split modes
In template matching based reordering for GPM split modes, given the motion information of the current GPM block, the respective TM cost values of GPM split modes are computed. Then, all GPM split modes are reordered in ascending ordering based on the TM cost values. Instead of sending GPM split mode, an index using Golomb-Rice code to indicate where the exact GPM split mode located in the reordering list is signaled.
The reordering method for GPM split modes is a two-step process performed after the respective reference templates of the two GPM partitions in a coding unit are generated, as follows:
· extending GPM partition edge into the reference templates of the two GPM partitions, resulting in 64
reference templates and computing the respective TM cost for each of the 64 reference templates;
· reordering GPM split modes based on their TM cost values in ascending order and marking the best 32 split
modes as available split modes.
· extending GPM partition edge into the reference templates of the two GPM partitions, resulting in 64
reference templates and computing the respective TM cost for each of the 64 reference templates;
· reordering GPM split modes based on their TM cost values in ascending order and marking the best 32 split
modes as available split modes.
The edge on the template is extended from that of the current CU, but GPM blending process is not used in the template area across the edge. Fig. 45 illustrates the edge on templates.
After ascending reordering using TM cost, an index is signaled.
2.1.2.20.5. Bi-predictive GPM
After ascending reordering using TM cost, an index is signaled.
2.1.2.20.5. Bi-predictive GPM
The GPM design in VVC relies on uni-predictive motion vectors to generate motion compensated prediction samples for each inter GPM partition. In ECM, such a design has been extended to allow usage of bi-predictive motion vectors.
When constructing a GPM candidate list, the extraction process that extracts uni-predictive motion vectors from the initial merge list is invoked only for small blocks 8x8, 16x8 and 8x16. For larger blocks, the extraction process is bypassed, so the initial merge list (which may contain merged Bi-MVs) is directly used as the final GPM merge list. The generation of the initial merge list is the same as before (i.e., the normal merge list generation without any candidate reordering) except that when generating the initial merge list for larger blocks (i.e., blocks with the extraction process bypassed) , the motion vector difference threshold for controlling whether a candidate can be added into the list is increased to be one full sample distance.
BDOF based motion vector refinement as in the multi-pass DMVR is used when generating motion compensated prediction samples.
When GPM-MMVD is used for a GPM partition and its base motion vector is bi-predictive, for low-delay pictures, the signalled MVD is applied on top of the L0 and L1 motion vector as in the existing merge MMVD design. For non-low-delay pictures, the bi-predictive motion vector is converted into a uni-predictive motion vector first and then the MVD is applied on top.
2.1.2.20.6. AMC-GPM
2.1.2.20.6. AMC-GPM
In ECM, the GPM is further extended to enable affine motion compensation (AMC) . Therefore, a GPM partition can be predicted by AMC inter-prediction, non-AMC inter-prediction or intra-prediction. In addition, a GPM partition predicted by AMC can be combined with the other GPM partition predicted by AMC, non-AMC, or intra-prediction.
When AMC is applied, a uni-prediction affine merge candidate list is constructed from the subblock-based merge candidate list after discarding sub-TMVP candidates, similar to the uni-prediction merge candidate list construction for GPM in VVC. AMC is performed for a GPM partition using the control point motion vectors (CPMVs) of a merge candidate in the uni-prediction affine merge candidate list. The length of the uni-prediction affine merge candidate list is signalled in SPS. When ARMC is applicable, the uni-prediction affine merge candidate list is reordered according to the template costs.
A gpm_affine_flag is signaled for each GPM partition to indicate whether AMC is applied for the GPM partition. A merge candidate index for the GPM partition is signaled using individual arithmetic context models depending on whether AMC or non-AMC is applied.
AMC is not allowed for GPM-MMVD and GPM-TM.
2.1.2.20.7. Implicit GPM
2.1.2.20.7. Implicit GPM
In the implicit GPM, the two integer blending matrices (W0 and W1) are derived from the template (1 line above, 1 column left) . The blending matrices are modelled as an affine linear function of the sample positions (x, y) in the current CU:
W0 (x, y) = a. x + b. y + c and W1 (x, y) = 1 -W0 (x, y)
W0 (x, y) = a. x + b. y + c and W1 (x, y) = 1 -W0 (x, y)
The parameters (a, b, c) are derived from the reference template using the same solver (MSE minimization) as the one used for CCCM, GLM or GL-CCCM. A list of pair of candidates is built from the regular GPM candidates and re-ordered with the template cost.
The GPM implicit mode is signaled by a CU-level flag (gpm_implicit_flag) . If gpm_implicit_flag is true, a merge-idx is coded to signal the pair of GPM candidates to be used. If gpm_implicit_flag is false, the regular GPM syntax elements are signaled.
2.1.2.21. Bilateral matching AMVP-merge mode
2.1.2.21. Bilateral matching AMVP-merge mode
The bi-directional predictor is composed of an AMVP predictor in one direction and a merge predictor in the other direction. The mode can be enabled to a coding block when the selected merge predictor and the AMVP predictor satisfy DMVR condition, where there is at least one reference picture from the past and one reference picture from the future relatively to the current picture and the distances from two reference pictures to the current picture are the same, the bilateral matching MV refinement is applied for the merge MV candidate and AMVP MVP as a starting point. Otherwise, if template matching functionality is enabled, template matching MV refinement is applied to the merge predictor or the AMVP predictor which has a higher template matching cost.
AMVP part of the mode is signaled as a regular uni-directional AMVP, i.e. reference index and MVD are signaled, and it has a derived MVP index if template matching is used or MVP index is signaled when template matching is disabled.
For AMVP direction LX, X can be 0 or 1, the merge part in the other direction (1 –LX) is implicitly derived by minimizing the bilateral matching cost between the AMVP predictor and a merge predictor, i.e., for a pair of the AMVP and a merge motion vectors. For every merge candidate in the merge candidate list which has that other direction (1 –LX) motion vector, the bilateral matching cost is calculated using the merge candidate MV and the AMVP MV. The merge candidate with the smallest cost is selected. The bilateral matching refinement is applied to the coding block with the selected merge candidate MV and the AMVP MV as a starting point.
The third pass of multi pass DMVR which is sub-PU BDOF refinement of the multi-pass DMVR is enabled to AMVP-merge mode coded block. Sub-PU size of BDOF is adaptively selected depending on the width×height. For blocks smaller than 256, subblock size of 4×4, and otherwise 8×8 is used. In addition, the following high-precision equations to derive the BDOF MV refinement parameters are utilized:
∑Gx. Gx *vx + ∑Gx. Gy *vy = ∑dI . Gx → s1 *vx + s2 *vy = s3
∑Gx. Gy *vx + ∑Gy. Gy *vy = ∑dI . Gy → s2 *vx + s5 *vy = s6
where Gx/Gy are the summation of the 2 horizontal/vertical gradients derived for each reference block.
Summations (Σ) are weighted sums, where weights depend on the position in the target region Ω. The weights
can also be applied to derive vx/vy in other cases.
∑Gx. Gx *vx + ∑Gx. Gy *vy = ∑dI . Gx → s1 *vx + s2 *vy = s3
∑Gx. Gy *vx + ∑Gy. Gy *vy = ∑dI . Gy → s2 *vx + s5 *vy = s6
where Gx/Gy are the summation of the 2 horizontal/vertical gradients derived for each reference block.
Summations (Σ) are weighted sums, where weights depend on the position in the target region Ω. The weights
can also be applied to derive vx/vy in other cases.
The mode is indicated by a flag, if the mode is enabled AMVP direction LX is further indicated by a flag.
When bilateral matching (BM) AMVP-merge mode is used for the current block and template matching is enabled, MVD is not signalled. An additional pair of AMVP-merge MVPs is introduced. The merge candidate list is sorted based on the BM cost in increase order. An index (0 or 1) is signaled to indicate which merge candidate in the sorted merge candidate list to use. When there is only one candidate in merge candidate list, the pair of AMVP MVP and merge MVP without bilateral matching MV refinement is padded.
2.1.2.22. IBC merge/AMVP list construction
2.1.2.22. IBC merge/AMVP list construction
The IBC merge/AMVP list construction compared to VVC is modified as follows:
· Only if an IBC merge/AMVP candidate is valid, it can be inserted into the IBC merge/AMVP candidate
list.
· Above-right, bottom-left, and above-left spatial candidates (belonging to the adjacent spatial candidate
category) and one pairwise average candidate can be added into the IBC merge/AMVP candidate list.
· Template based adaptive reordering (ARMC-TM) is applied to IBC merge list.
· Candidates from non-adjacent spatial neighboring blocks (a. k. a., non-adjacent candidates) can be added
to the candidate lists of IBC merge modes and IBC AMVP. These non-adjacent candidates are inserted between the adjacent spatial candidates and the HBVP candidates for both IBC merge and IBC AMVP. The same reference area of non-adjacent merge in regular inter mode is reused for the IBC.
· Auto-relocated block vector prediction (AR-BVP) candidates are added to the IBC merge and AMVP
candidate list right after the HBVP candidates. A guiding block vector BV0, 1 (i.e., an existing BVP already in the candidate list) associated with the current block B0 points to a reference block B1. If B1 has a BV denoted as BV1, 2 pointing to a reference block B2, then BV0, 2, given by BV0, 2 = BV0, 1 +BV1, 2, is defined as the AR-BVP, guided by BV0, 1. When deriving BVn, n+1 guided by BV0, n, all five positions including top-left (e.g., LT) , top-right (e.g., RT) , center (e.g., Ctr) , bottom-left (e.g., LB) , and bottom-right (e.g., RB) positions of Bn are checked to find BVn, n+1.
· Restriction that adjacent spatial candidates cannot be used for IBC merge of a 4x4 CU is removed.
· Only if an IBC merge/AMVP candidate is valid, it can be inserted into the IBC merge/AMVP candidate
list.
· Above-right, bottom-left, and above-left spatial candidates (belonging to the adjacent spatial candidate
category) and one pairwise average candidate can be added into the IBC merge/AMVP candidate list.
· Template based adaptive reordering (ARMC-TM) is applied to IBC merge list.
· Candidates from non-adjacent spatial neighboring blocks (a. k. a., non-adjacent candidates) can be added
to the candidate lists of IBC merge modes and IBC AMVP. These non-adjacent candidates are inserted between the adjacent spatial candidates and the HBVP candidates for both IBC merge and IBC AMVP. The same reference area of non-adjacent merge in regular inter mode is reused for the IBC.
· Auto-relocated block vector prediction (AR-BVP) candidates are added to the IBC merge and AMVP
candidate list right after the HBVP candidates. A guiding block vector BV0, 1 (i.e., an existing BVP already in the candidate list) associated with the current block B0 points to a reference block B1. If B1 has a BV denoted as BV1, 2 pointing to a reference block B2, then BV0, 2, given by BV0, 2 = BV0, 1 +BV1, 2, is defined as the AR-BVP, guided by BV0, 1. When deriving BVn, n+1 guided by BV0, n, all five positions including top-left (e.g., LT) , top-right (e.g., RT) , center (e.g., Ctr) , bottom-left (e.g., LB) , and bottom-right (e.g., RB) positions of Bn are checked to find BVn, n+1.
· Restriction that adjacent spatial candidates cannot be used for IBC merge of a 4x4 CU is removed.
The HMVP table size for IBC is increased to 25. After up to 20 IBC merge candidates are derived with full pruning, they are reordered together. After reordering, the first 6 candidates with the lowest template matching costs are selected as the final candidates in the IBC merge list.
The zero vectors’ candidates to pad the IBC Merge/AMVP list are replaced with a set of BVP candidates located in the IBC reference region. A zero vector is invalid as a block vector in IBC merge mode, and consequently, it is discarded as BVP in the IBC candidate list.
Three candidates are located on the nearest corners of the reference region, and three additional candidates are determined in the middle of the three sub-regions (A, B, and C) , whose coordinates are determined by the width, and height of the current block and the ΔX and ΔY parameters. Fig. 46 illustrates an example of how to derive AR-BVP, and Fig. 47 illustrates the five positions in Bn.
During the IBC AMVP list construction, a clustering of the BVP candidates may be applied when both BV candidate components are non-zero. The clustering with L2 distance is applied if there are more than 2 valid BV candidates and up to 6 candidates are clustered, the clustering radius is defined as
Radius=log2 ( (cbWidth·cbHeight) >>MIN_PU_SIZE)
Radius=log2 ( (cbWidth·cbHeight) >>MIN_PU_SIZE)
The clustering method is applied in the candidate list order, and the candidates assigned to a group are removed from the list for the subsequent clusters. In each group, the BVP with a lowest TM cost is selected as the representative candidate of that group. Finally, the representative candidates of the two first groups are chosen as the candidates for the IBC AMVP list.
Furthermore, if one of BV candidate components is zero or block is coded in RRIBC, a flag is signalled to indicate this case with a directional flag indicating horizontal or vertical component is non-zero. Instead of usual IBC AMVP list, two new BVP candidates are derived, and the sign of the non-zero BV component is derived at decoder side. The AMVP BVP0 is set to the nearest valid location to the current block (-cbWidth or -cbHeight) , so the non-zero BVD is always negative, pointing to the left for a BV with a zero vertical component or to the above for a BV with a zero horizontal component. Likewise, the AMVP BVP1 is set to the farthest position from the current block in the valid reference region, that is the left boundary or the top boundary of the IBC search region. Consequently, if the BVP1 is selected, the BVD is always positive, pointing to the right for BV with a zero vertical component or to the bottom for BV with a zero-horizontal component. Fig. 48 illustrates padding candidates for the replacement of the zero-vector in the IBC list, and Fig. 49 illustrates IBC candidate clustering based on the L2 distance and the TM cost.
The optimal IBC AMVP index is signalled, which allows deriving the sign of the non-zero BVD component at the decoder side. The absolute magnitude of non-zero BVD component is further signalled. In RRIBC, the direction of the flipping mode is derived from the signalled directional flag.
2.1.2.23. IBC with Template Matching
2.1.2.23. IBC with Template Matching
Template Matching is used in IBC for both IBC merge mode and IBC AMVP mode.
The IBC-TM merge list is modified compared to the one used by regular IBC merge mode such that the candidates are selected according to a pruning method with a motion distance between the candidates as in the regular TM merge mode. The ending zero motion fulfillment is replaced by motion vectors to the left (-W, 0) , top (0, -H) and top-left (-W, -H) , where W is the width and H the height of the current CU.
In the IBC-TM merge mode, the selected candidates are refined with the Template Matching method prior to the RDO or decoding process. The IBC-TM merge mode has been put in competition with the regular IBC merge mode and a TM-merge flag is signaled.
In the IBC-TM AMVP mode, up to 3 candidates are selected from the IBC-TM merge list. Each of those 3 selected candidates are refined using the Template Matching method and sorted according to their resulting Template Matching cost. Only the 2 first ones are then considered in the motion estimation process as usual.
The Template Matching refinement for both IBC-TM merge and AMVP modes is quite simple since IBC motion vectors are constrained (i) to be integer and (ii) within a reference region. So, in IBC-TM merge mode, all refinements are performed at integer precision, and in IBC-TM AMVP mode, they are performed either at integer or 4-pel precision depending on the AMVR value. Such a refinement accesses only to samples without interpolation. In both cases, the refined motion vectors and the used template in each refinement step must respect the constraint of the reference region. Fig. 50 illustrates IBC reference region depending on current CU position.
2.1.2.24. IBC reference area
2.1.2.24. IBC reference area
The reference area for IBC is extended to two CTU rows above. Specifically, for CTU (m, n) to be coded, the reference area includes CTUs with index (m–2, n–2) … (W, n–2) , (0, n–1) … (W, n–1) , (0, n) … (m, n) , where W denotes the maximum horizontal index within the current tile, slice or picture. When CTU size is 256, the reference area is limited to one CTU row above. This setting ensures that for CTU size being 128 or 256, IBC does not require extra memory in the current ETM platform. The per-sample block vector search (or called local search) range is limited to [– (C << 1) , C >> 2] horizontally and [–C, C >> 2] vertically to adapt to the reference area extension, where C denotes the CTU size. Fig. 51 illustrates reference area for IBC.
2.1.2.25. Fractional pel IBC
2.1.2.25. Fractional pel IBC
The option of block vector resolutions is extended to include quarter-pel resolution in additional to full-pel and 4-pel. Like inter AMVR syntax, the first bin is signalled to indicate whether BV is in quarter-pel resolution, and the second bin is signalled to switch between full-pel and 4-pel resolutions. The interpolation filters applied to the luma (8-tap) and chroma (6-tap existed inter interpolation) components of an IBC block. For template-based IBC tools, a 2-tap bilinear interpolation filter is applied to generate template prediction blocks. Reference sample padding is performed when some of them are located outside IBC reference area. When needed, it performs in horizontal direction first and then vertical direction.
2.1.2.26. Filtered IBC prediction
2.1.2.26. Filtered IBC prediction
Additional filtered IBC mode is introduced, where a filter is applied to IBC predictor, which is derived by minimizing MSE between current and reference template.
Output of the filter is calculated as follows:
predLumaVal = c0C + c1N + c2S + c3E + c4W + c5P + c6B
predLumaVal = c0C + c1N + c2S + c3E + c4W + c5P + c6B
The nonlinear term P is represented as power of two of the center sample C and scaled to the sample value range of the content:
P = (C*C + midVal) >> bitDepth
P = (C*C + midVal) >> bitDepth
The bias term B represents a scalar offset between the input and output and is set to middle luma value (512 for 10-bit content) .
This filtered mode is used as an additional mode for non-merge IBC blocks, and it is not used together with IBC-LIC, IBC-CIIP or RR-IBC. For IBC merge modes, this filtering mode is inherited when merge mode list is constructed. The mode flag is signalled before the IBC-LIC flag.
2.1.2.27. MVD prediction
2.1.2.27. MVD prediction
In this method, possible MVD sign combinations and possible combinations of the first 6 most signification suffix bins of MVD magnitudes are sorted according to the template matching cost and index corresponding to the true MVD sign and MVD magnitudes is derived and context coded. At decoder side, the MVD are derived as following:
1. Parse the magnitude of MVD components,
2. Parse context coded MVD prediction index,
3. Build MV candidates by creating combination between possible signs and possible MVD magnitudes
and add it to the MV predictor,
4. Derive MVD prediction cost for each derived MV based on template matching cost and sort,
5. Use the signaled index to pick the true MVD.
1. Parse the magnitude of MVD components,
2. Parse context coded MVD prediction index,
3. Build MV candidates by creating combination between possible signs and possible MVD magnitudes
and add it to the MV predictor,
4. Derive MVD prediction cost for each derived MV based on template matching cost and sort,
5. Use the signaled index to pick the true MVD.
MVD prediction is applied to inter AMVP, affine AMVP, MMVD and affine MMVD modes. Note, when wrap around motion compensation is enabled, the MV candidate shall be clipped with wrap around offset taken into consideration.
2.1.2.28. BVD prediction
2.1.2.28. BVD prediction
Similar to MVD prediction, possible BVD sign combinations of IBC mode are sorted according to the template matching cost. Moreover, the first 4 most signification suffix bins of exponential Golomb code used to represent BVD magnitudes is also sorted according to the TM cost. Template matching operation is used to determine a BVD candidate with the best cost and indicate in the bitstream whether the best candidate is predicted correctly or not. Fig. 52 illustrates prediction of BVD.
2.1.2.29. Enhanced bi-directional motion compensation
2.1.2.29. Enhanced bi-directional motion compensation
In bi-directional motion compensation the out of boundary (OOB) prediction samples are discarded and only the non-OOB predictors, when available, are used to generate the final predictor. Specifically, let Pos_xi, j and Pos_yi, j denote the position of one prediction sample in one current block, and (x = 0, 1) denote the MV of the current block; PosLeftBdry, PosRightBdry, PosTopBdry and PosBottomBdry are the positions of four boundaries of the picture. One prediction sample is regarded as OOB when at least one of the following conditions is satisfied:
where half_pixel is equal to 8 that represents the half-pel sample distance in the 1/16-pel sample precision.
After examining the OOB condition for each sample, the final prediction samples of one bi-directional block are generated as follows:
Ifis OOB andis non-OOB
else ifis non-OOB andis OOB
else
OOB checking process is also applicable when BCW is enabled.
where half_pixel is equal to 8 that represents the half-pel sample distance in the 1/16-pel sample precision.
After examining the OOB condition for each sample, the final prediction samples of one bi-directional block are generated as follows:
Ifis OOB andis non-OOB
else ifis non-OOB andis OOB
else
OOB checking process is also applicable when BCW is enabled.
Finally, note this sample-adaptive bi-prediction process only applies to prediction units for which at least a reference bock is first detected as partially or entirely out-of-bounds. Thus, a block-level OOB criteria is first checked. If both prediction blocks are non-OOB, then the usual bi-prediction takes place.
2.1.2.30. Motion compensated picture boundary padding
2.1.2.30. Motion compensated picture boundary padding
The samples outside of the picture boundary are derived by motion compensation instead of using only repetitive padding. In the implementation, the total padded area size is increased by 16 compared to repetitive padding. This is to keep MV clipping, which implements repetitive padding. Fig. 53 illustrates motion compensated boundary padding method.
For motion compensation padding, MV of a 4×4 boundary block is utilized to derive a M×4 or 4×M padding block. The value M is derived as the distance of the reference block to the picture boundary. Moreover, M is set at least equal to 4 as soon as the motion vector points to a position internal to the reference picture bounds. If boundary block is intra coded, then MV is not available, and M is set equal to 0. If M is less than 16, the rest of the padded area is filled with the repetitive padded samples. Fig. 54 illustrates an example of deriving a M×4 padding block with a left padding direction.
In case of bi-directional inter prediction, only one prediction direction, which has a motion vector pointing to the pixel position farther away from the picture boundary in the reference picture in terms of the padding direction, is used in MC boundary padding.
The pixels in MC padding block are corrected with an offset, which is equal to the difference between the DC values of the reconstructed boundary block and its corresponding reference block.
2.1.2.31. Block level reference picture list reordering
2.1.2.31. Block level reference picture list reordering
A block level reference picture reordering method based on template matching is used. For the uni-prediction AMVP mode, the reference pictures in List 0 and List 1 are interweaved to generate a joint list. For each hypothesis of the reference picture in the joint list template matching is performed to calculate the cost. The joint list is reordered based on ascending order of the template matching cost. The index of the selected reference picture in the reordered joint list is signaled in the bitstream. For the bi-prediction AMVP mode, a list of pairs of reference pictures from List 0 and List 1 is generated and similarly reordered based on the template matching cost. The index of the selected pair is signaled.
2.1.2.32. Reference picture resampling (RPR)
2.1.2.32. Reference picture resampling (RPR)
Reference picture resampling is inherited from VVC. Compared to the filter lengths in VVC, e.g., 8, 6 and 4 taps for luma affine coded blocks, luma non-affine coded blocks and chroma respectively, the corresponding RPR filters in ECM are increased to 12, 10 and 6 taps.
The LIC and template-based inter reordering tools, including ARMC, MMVD and affine MMVD reordering, template-based BCW derivation, block level reference picture list reordering and MVD prediction, are enabled when any of reference pictures is in different resolution to the current picture.
2.1.2.33. Reconstruction-Reordered IBC (RR-IBC)
2.1.2.33. Reconstruction-Reordered IBC (RR-IBC)
A Reconstruction-Reordered IBC (RR-IBC) mode is allowed for IBC coded blocks. When RR-IBC is applied, the samples in a reconstruction block are flipped according to a flip type of the current block. At the encoder side, the original block is flipped before motion search and residual calculation, while the prediction block is derived without flipping. At the decoder side, the reconstruction block is flipped back to restore the original block.
Two flip methods, horizontal flip and vertical flip, are supported for RR-IBC coded blocks. A syntax flag is firstly signalled for an IBC AMVP coded block, indicating whether the reconstruction is flipped, and if it is flipped, another flag is further signaled specifying the flip type. For IBC merge, the flip type is inherited from neighbouring blocks, without syntax signalling. Considering the horizontal or vertical symmetry, the current block and the reference block are normally aligned horizontally or vertically. Therefore, when a horizontal flip is applied, the vertical component of the BV is not signaled and inferred to be equal to 0. Similarly, the horizontal component of the BV is not signaled and inferred to be equal to 0 when a vertical flip is applied.
To better utilize the symmetry property, a flip-aware BV adjustment approach is applied to refine the block
vector candidate. For example, (xnbr, ynbr) and (xcur, ycur) represent the coordinates of the center sample of the neighbouring block and the current block, respectively, BVnbr and BVcur denotes the BV of the neighbouring block and the current block, respectively. Instead of directly inheriting the BV from a neighbouring block, the horizontal component of BVcur is calculated by adding a motion shift to the horizontal component of BVnbr (denoted as BVnbr h) in case that the neighbouring block is coded with a horizontal flip, i.e., BVcur h =2 (xnbr -xcur) + BVnbr h . Similarly, the vertical component of BVcur is calculated by adding a motion shift to the vertical component of BVnbr (denoted as BVnbr v) in case that the neighbouring block is coded with a vertical flip, i.e., BVcur v =2 (ynbr -ycur) + BVnbr v . Fig. 55A and Fig. 55B illustrates BV adjustment.
2.1.2.34. Combination of IBC with other coding tools
2.1.2.34.1. IBC merge mode with block vector differences (IBC-MBVD)
To better utilize the symmetry property, a flip-aware BV adjustment approach is applied to refine the block
vector candidate. For example, (xnbr, ynbr) and (xcur, ycur) represent the coordinates of the center sample of the neighbouring block and the current block, respectively, BVnbr and BVcur denotes the BV of the neighbouring block and the current block, respectively. Instead of directly inheriting the BV from a neighbouring block, the horizontal component of BVcur is calculated by adding a motion shift to the horizontal component of BVnbr (denoted as BVnbr h) in case that the neighbouring block is coded with a horizontal flip, i.e., BVcur h =2 (xnbr -xcur) + BVnbr h . Similarly, the vertical component of BVcur is calculated by adding a motion shift to the vertical component of BVnbr (denoted as BVnbr v) in case that the neighbouring block is coded with a vertical flip, i.e., BVcur v =2 (ynbr -ycur) + BVnbr v . Fig. 55A and Fig. 55B illustrates BV adjustment.
2.1.2.34. Combination of IBC with other coding tools
2.1.2.34.1. IBC merge mode with block vector differences (IBC-MBVD)
Affine-MMVD and GPM-MMVD have been adopted to ECM as an extension of regular MMVD mode. It is natural to extend the MMVD mode to the IBC merge mode.
In IBC-MBVD, the distance set is {1-pel, 2-pel, 4-pel, 8-pel, 12-pel, 16-pel, 24-pel, 32-pel, 40-pel, 48-pel, 56-pel, 64-pel, 72-pel, 80-pel, 88-pel, 96-pel, 104-pel, 112-pel, 120-pel, 128-pel} , and the BVD directions are two horizontal and two vertical directions.
The base candidates are selected from the first five candidates in the reordered IBC merge list. And based on the SAD cost between the template (one row above and one column left to the current block) and its reference for each refinement position, all the possible MBVD refinement positions (20×4) for each base candidate are reordered. Finally, the top 8 refinement positions with the lowest template SAD costs are kept as available positions, consequently for MBVD index coding. The MBVD index is binarized by the rice code with the parameter equal to 1.
In IBC-MBVD list derivation, adaptive BVD offsets along MVBD directions are enabled for IBC MBVD mode. The MBVD candidates search is a two-step process, which starts with checking template SAD costs of offsets added to BVP along each direction with the interval of 1-pel. The second step of the search checks template SAD costs with 1/4-pel interval for the candidates around the selected candidates from the first step. For the integer MBVD (when existed in ECM ph_fpel_mbvd_enabled_flag is 0) , those intervals are multiplied by 4. The candidates with the lowest TM cost are included into the final MBVD list.
An IBC-MBVD coded block does not inherit flip type from a RR-IBC coded neighbor block.
2.1.2.34.2. Combined intra block copy and intra prediction
2.1.2.34.2. Combined intra block copy and intra prediction
Combined intra block copy and intra prediction (IBC-CIIP) is a coding tool for a CU which uses IBC and intra prediction to obtain two prediction signals, and the two prediction signals are weighted summed to generate the final prediction as follows:
P= (wibc*Pibc+ ( (1<<shift) -wibc) *Pintra+ (1<< (shift-1) ) ) >>shift
wherein Pibc and Pintra denote the IBC prediction signal and intra prediction signal. (wibc, shift) are set equal
to (13, 4) and (1, 1) for IBC merge mode and IBC AMVP mode.
P= (wibc*Pibc+ ( (1<<shift) -wibc) *Pintra+ (1<< (shift-1) ) ) >>shift
wherein Pibc and Pintra denote the IBC prediction signal and intra prediction signal. (wibc, shift) are set equal
to (13, 4) and (1, 1) for IBC merge mode and IBC AMVP mode.
An intra prediction mode (IPM) candidate list is used to generate the intra prediction signal, and the IPM candidate list size is pre-defined as 2. An IPM index is signalled to indicate which IPM is used.
2.1.2.34.3. IBC with Geometry Partitioning
2.1.2.34.3. IBC with Geometry Partitioning
Intra block copy with geometry partitioning mode (IBC-GPM) is a coding tool which divides a CU into two sub-partitions geometrically. The prediction signals of the two sub-partitions are generated using IBC and intra prediction. IBC-GPM can be applied to regular IBC merge mode or IBC TM merge mode. An intra prediction mode (IPM) candidate list is constructed using the same method as GPM with inter and intra prediction for intra prediction, and the IPM candidate list size is pre-defined as 3. There are 48 geometry partitioning modes in total, which are divided into two geometry partitioning mode sets as follows:
Table 7: Geometry partitioning modes in the first geometry partitioning mode set
Table 8: Geometry partitioning modes in the second geometry partitioning mode set
Table 7: Geometry partitioning modes in the first geometry partitioning mode set
Table 8: Geometry partitioning modes in the second geometry partitioning mode set
When IBC-GPM is used, an IBC-GPM geometry partitioning mode set flag is signalled to indicate whether the first or the second geometry partitioning mode set is selected, followed by the geometry partitioning mode index. An IBC-GPM intra flag is signalled to indicate whether intra prediction is used for the first sub-partition. When intra prediction is used for a sub-partition, an intra prediction mode index is signalled. When IBC is used for a sub-partition, a merge index is signalled.
In bi-predictive IBC GPM, two flags are signalled to indicate the prediction modes of two partitions, the first flag indicates whether the first partition is intra predicted, and if not then the second flag is signalled to indicate whether intra prediction is used for the second partition. This method is applied to SCC only.
2.1.2.34.4. IBC BVP-merge and bi-predictive IBC merge
2.1.2.34.4. IBC BVP-merge and bi-predictive IBC merge
IBC-BVP-merge is similar to AMVP-merge, derives one BV from IBC block vector prediction (BVP) and the second BV from IBC merge to form bi-prediction for IBC. Two different indices for the IBC BVP and the IBC merge candidates are signalled.
Bi-predictive IBC merge is enabled together with MBVD and uni-merge. In bi-predictive IBC merge, two BVs from the existing IBC merge candidate list are derived, utilizing two different indices, which are signalled. Bi-predictive IBC merge is applied to IBC regular merge and IBC MBVD. Bi-predictive IBC merge, IBC MBVD, and IBC uni-merge are enabled for non-SCC classes.
2.1.2.34.5. IBC MBVD list derivation
2.1.2.34.5. IBC MBVD list derivation
In the test 2.4a, adaptive BVD offsets along MVBD directions and enabled for IBC MBVD mode. The MBVD candidates search is a two-step process, which starts with checking template SAD costs of offsets added to BVP along each direction with the interval of 1-pel. The second step of the search checks template SAD costs with 1/4-pel interval for the candidates around the selected candidates from the first step. For the integer MBVD (when existed in ECM ph_fpel_mbvd_enabled_flag is 0) , those intervals are multiplied by 4. The candidates with the lowest TM cost are included into the final MBVD list.
2.1.2.34.6. IBC with Local Illumination Compensation
2.1.2.34.6. IBC with Local Illumination Compensation
Intra block copy with local illumination compensation (IBC-LIC) is a coding tool which compensates the local illumination variation within a picture between the CU coded with IBC and its prediction block with a linear equation. The parameters of the linear equation are derived same as LIC for inter prediction except that the reference template is generated using block vector in IBC-LIC. IBC-LIC can be applied to IBC AMVP mode and IBC merge mode. For IBC AMVP mode, an IBC-LIC flag is signalled to indicate the use of IBC-LIC. Top-only, left-only, or L-shape templates are allowed for deriving the single model parameters. MMLM is extended to IBC-LIC, which allows IBC-LIC to have two linear models in one CU. And only L-shape template is used in IBC-LIC MMLM. A mode index is signalled. For IBC merge mode, the IBC-LIC flag is inferred from the merge candidate. The IBC-LIC flag is inherited from an IBC HMVP candidate to harmonize IBC HMVP and IBC-LIC similar to the inter LIC case.
2.1.2.35. Template matching based BCW index derivation for merge mode
2.1.2.35. Template matching based BCW index derivation for merge mode
The BCW index for merge coded CUs is derived based on template matching cost instead of being derived from neighboring blocks. Given a selected merge candidate, the TM cost values are calculated with different bi-prediction weights, and then, the bi-prediction weight with minimum TM cost value is used to predict the merge CU.
When calculating TM cost for bi-predicted weights, the following rules are applied:
- Since the inherited bi-predicted weight is likely to have higher accuracy than others, only the inherited bi-
prediction weight and its two neighboring weights (i.e. ±1) are considered. For example, if the inherited bi-predicted weight is 4, then only three weights {3, 4, 5} are involved in TM cost calculation.
- The TM cost of the inherited BCW index is multiplied with 0.90625, that is, the cost is reduced by 3/32.
- The TM cost of the equal weight is multiplied with 0.90625 since bi-predicted samples are beneficial for
BDOF and BDOF is only applied to CU with equal weights.
- Since the inherited bi-predicted weight is likely to have higher accuracy than others, only the inherited bi-
prediction weight and its two neighboring weights (i.e. ±1) are considered. For example, if the inherited bi-predicted weight is 4, then only three weights {3, 4, 5} are involved in TM cost calculation.
- The TM cost of the inherited BCW index is multiplied with 0.90625, that is, the cost is reduced by 3/32.
- The TM cost of the equal weight is multiplied with 0.90625 since bi-predicted samples are beneficial for
BDOF and BDOF is only applied to CU with equal weights.
The template matching based BCW index derivation is applied to CUs coded in regular merge, template matching, adaptive decoder-side motion vector refinement and MMVD modes.
In addition, the bi-prediction weights for merge mode are extended from {-2, 3, 4, 5, 10} to {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7} . Furthermore, the negative bi-predicted weights for non-merge mode {-2, 10} are replaced with positive weights {1, 7} .
2.1.2.36. DMVR for affine merge coded blocks
2.1.2.36. DMVR for affine merge coded blocks
DMVR is applied to affine merge coded blocks and affine MMVD coded blocks when DMVR condition is satisfied. It is also extended to adaptive BM merge mode.
An affine motion field is modelized as follows (6-parameters affine case) :
wherein (mvx, mvy) is the motion vector at location (x, y) and (mv0x, mv0y) is the base MV representing the
translation motion of the affine model. Parametersandrepresent the non-translation parameters (rotation, scaling) .
wherein (mvx, mvy) is the motion vector at location (x, y) and (mv0x, mv0y) is the base MV representing the
translation motion of the affine model. Parametersandrepresent the non-translation parameters (rotation, scaling) .
Motion vectors (mv0x, mv0y) , (mv1x, mv1y) and (mv2x, mv2y) are called the control point motion vectors (CPMVs) of the considered affine coding unit. In the DMVR process applied to affine, the bilateral matching cost is calculated per subblock. Then, the subblock bilateral matching costs and refined subblock MVs are used to determine the overall best refined CPMVs for the affine block. More specific, the CPMVs are refined according to the following steps:
1) Perform integer-pel bilateral matching for subblocks. Accumulate the subblock bilateral matching cost
to determine the best integer-pel MV offset.
2) Perform half-pel bilateral matching search using the best integer MV offset as initial offset and output
the best MV offset that minimizes the bilateral matching cost for the same set of the subblocks of step 1.
3) Perform linear regression using the refined subblock MVs from step 1 as input and output a set of
control-point motion vectors.
4) Compare the bilateral matching cost of the output of the steps 2 and 3 to select the one with the smallest
cost.
1) Perform integer-pel bilateral matching for subblocks. Accumulate the subblock bilateral matching cost
to determine the best integer-pel MV offset.
2) Perform half-pel bilateral matching search using the best integer MV offset as initial offset and output
the best MV offset that minimizes the bilateral matching cost for the same set of the subblocks of step 1.
3) Perform linear regression using the refined subblock MVs from step 1 as input and output a set of
control-point motion vectors.
4) Compare the bilateral matching cost of the output of the steps 2 and 3 to select the one with the smallest
cost.
In addition, the non-translation parameters of affine model are refined after the base MV are determined. Each of CPMVs is fixed as base MV in turn, and an offset is added to the non-translation parameter of affine model by minimizing the bilateral matching cost, and then the other two CPMVs are calculated according to based MV and refined non-translation parameters.
For affine merge and affine MMVD modes, both CPMVs and non-translation parameters refinements are applied. When applying to affine MMVD mode, the MMVD offset is added to the affine DMVR refined affine merge base candidate if the base candidate meets the affine DMVR refinement condition. For adaptive BM merge mode, an affine merge list that only contains affine merge candidates that meet the affine DMVR conditions are constructed and then CPMVs refinement and non-translation parameters refinment are applied.
2.1.2.37. InterCCCM
2.1.2.37. InterCCCM
InterCCCM applies the CCCM method for predicting chroma samples from reconstructed luma samples when the CU uses inter prediction or intra block copy (IBC) . The cross-component filters are derived using the prediction blocks of luma and chroma. The derived filters are applied to the reconstructed luma block and blended with the prediction blocks of chroma to produce the final chroma prediction blocks. In the blending process the filtered reconstructed luma blocks use blending weight of 0.75 and chroma prediction blocks use blending weight of 0.25. Fig. 56 illustrates the InterCCCM method on the decoder.
The 8-tap filter consist of 6 spatial luma samples, a nonlinear term, and a bias term. The spatial luma samples (L0, …, L5) are obtained from the luma grid selecting the 6 luma samples closest to the chroma position C without down sampling. The predicted chroma value is obtained as,
predChromaVal = c0 L0+ c1L1 + c2L2 + c3L3 + c4L4 + c5L5 + c6 nonlinear ( (L0+L3+1) >> 1) + c7 B,
where nonlinear is CCCM’s nonlinear operator and B is bias. The filter coefficients are derived using ECM’s
division-free Gaussian elimination method and the necessary offsets are applied to samples prior to filter derivation. The offsets for division-free Gaussian elimination method are obtained using a four-point average of the luma and chroma prediction blocks, where the four points correspond to the top-left, top-right, bottom-left and bottom-right corners of the blocks. For filter coefficient derivation at most 256 chroma samples are used. Fig. 57 illustrates luma samples L0 to L5 in relation to the chroma sample C.
predChromaVal = c0 L0+ c1L1 + c2L2 + c3L3 + c4L4 + c5L5 + c6 nonlinear ( (L0+L3+1) >> 1) + c7 B,
where nonlinear is CCCM’s nonlinear operator and B is bias. The filter coefficients are derived using ECM’s
division-free Gaussian elimination method and the necessary offsets are applied to samples prior to filter derivation. The offsets for division-free Gaussian elimination method are obtained using a four-point average of the luma and chroma prediction blocks, where the four points correspond to the top-left, top-right, bottom-left and bottom-right corners of the blocks. For filter coefficient derivation at most 256 chroma samples are used. Fig. 57 illustrates luma samples L0 to L5 in relation to the chroma sample C.
Usage of the mode is signalled with a CABAC coded TU level flag. One new CABAC context was included to support this. The InterCCCM flag is only signalled if the TU’s luma Cbf is non-zero and the CU’s predMode is either MODE_INTER or MODE_IBC.
The encoder performs an RD decision in the transform selection loop for the chroma components when luma Cbf is non-zero and the CU’s predMode is either MODE_INTER or MODE_IBC.
2.1.2.38. CCP merge for chroma inter blocks
2.1.2.38. CCP merge for chroma inter blocks
The cross-component prediction merge mode is extended to chroma inter coding. The CCP models including CCLM, MMLM, CCCM, GLM, chroma fusion, CCP merge modes, and inter CCCM are stored and inherited for the following coding chroma intra and inter blocks. Similar to the CCP merge for chroma intra blocks, a flag is signaled to indicate whether a chroma inter block is coded using this mode. If the CCP merge mode is used, a CCP merge list is constructed in a similar way as that for chroma intra blocks except that additional shifted temporal candidate and on-the-fly derived candidates are included in the CCP merge list. The additional shifted temporal candidates are derived from the collocated picture. And, the position of these candidates are the same as those defined in ECM for regular inter merge prediction candidates with a shift obtained from the motion vector of the current block. The on-the-fly derived candidates are only used for low delay pictures and are obtained using the neighboring reconstructed samples of the current block. At most 1 on-the-fly derived candidates including single/multi-model CCCM and single/multi-model CCLM are added to the CCP merge list. After the CCP merge list is constructed, the candidate with the lowest template cost is selected for the chroma inter block. The chroma inter block is then predicted in the same way as that of inter CCCM. That is, the motion compensation predicted samples are blended with the cross-component predicted samples to form the final prediction.
3. Problems
3. Problems
There are several issues in the existing video coding techniques, which would be further improved for higher coding gain.
1. In an existing design, some temporal candidates are used in inter prediction and CCP prediction,
and the temporal motion vector is scaled to the collocated reference picture for the temporal candidate derivation. The temporal candidate derivation can be improved for higher coding efficiency.
2. In an existing design, non-adjacent spatial candidates are used in different motion lists, intra/inter
mode lists, CCP list, etc. However, the positions of non-adjacent candidates are not aligned for all relevant coding tools.
4. Detailed solutions
1. In an existing design, some temporal candidates are used in inter prediction and CCP prediction,
and the temporal motion vector is scaled to the collocated reference picture for the temporal candidate derivation. The temporal candidate derivation can be improved for higher coding efficiency.
2. In an existing design, non-adjacent spatial candidates are used in different motion lists, intra/inter
mode lists, CCP list, etc. However, the positions of non-adjacent candidates are not aligned for all relevant coding tools.
4. Detailed solutions
The detailed embodiments below should be considered as examples to explain general concepts. These embodiments should not be interpreted in a narrow way. Furthermore, these embodiments can be combined in any manner.
The terms “video unit” or “coding unit” or “block” may represent a picture, a slice, a tile, a coding tree block (CTB) , a coding tree unit (CTU) , a coding block (CB) , a CU, a PU, a TU, a PB, or a TB.
The term “prediction unit” may represent a prediction block, or a prediction sample.
The term “chained motion vector” may refer to a motion vector (or block vector) derived by at least one guided motion vector (or block vector) . It may also refer to an accumulated motion vector derived by adding up at least one motion vector (or block vector) and at least one guided motion vector (or block vector) .
The term “CCP” may refer to any cross-component prediction method such as any kind of LM/intraCCLM/interCCCM/MMLM/CCCM/GLM/GL-CCCM/BVG-CCCM/intraCCPmerge/interCCPmerge. It could be used for an intra block, inter block, or IBC block. It could be a type of CCP based fusion mode.
It is noted that the terminologies mentioned below are not limited to the specific ones defined in existing standards. Any variance of the coding tool is also applicable.
1) Intra/IBC prediction may be employed based on a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate.
a. For example, the Intra/IBC prediction may be employed in an inter slice.
b. For example, an intra luma mode may be derived based on a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-
adjacent candidate.
i. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an
intraTMP mode list.
1. For example, it may be inserted to intraTMP merge candidate list.
ii. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an
EIP mode list.
1. For example, it may be inserted to EIP merge candidate list.
iii. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an
intra merge mode list.
1. For example, the intra merge mode may be employed based on an intra mode list.
iv. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an
SGPM mode list.
v. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to a
OBIC (i.e., occurrence based intra coding) mode list.
vi. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an
TIMD/DIMD mode list.
1. For example, it may be inserted to TIMD candidate list.
2. For example, it may be inserted to TIMD merge candidate list.
3. For example, it may be inserted to DIMD merge candidate list.
vii. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an
intra MPM list.
viii. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an
IPM (intra prediction mode) list.
c. For example, an intra chroma mode may be derived based on a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-
adjacent candidate.
i. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to intra
chroma mode list.
ii. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to non-
CCP based intra chroma mode list.
iii. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to
DBV mode list.
iv. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to CCP
mode list.
1. For example, the CCP may refer to regular CCP mode, and/or CCP merge mode.
2. For example, the CCP may refer to BVG-CCCM mode.
d. For example, the intra part of an intra fusion mode may be derived based on a temporal candidate
and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate.
i. For example, the intra fusion mode may be CIIP mode (and/or its variant) .
1. For example, it may be regular CIIP mode.
2. For example, it may be CIIP variant mode which blends intra prediction with IBC prediction.
3. For example, it may be CIIP variant mode which blends intra prediction with intraTMP
prediction.
4. For example, it may be CIIP variant mode which blends intra prediction with subblock based
prediction (e.g., affine, sbtMVP, etc. ) .
5. For example, block based weighting method may be used for the CIIP mode and/or its variant.
ii. For example, the intra fusion mode may be GPM mode (and/or its variant) .
1. For example, it may be GPM-inter-intra mode.
2. For example, it may be GPM-IBC-intra mode.
3. For example, it may be GPM-subblock-intra mode, wherein the subblock based prediction may
be derived by affine and/or sbTMVP.
4. For example, sample based weighting method may be used for the GPM mode and/or its variant.
5. For example, geometric partitioning may be used for the GPM mode and/or its variant mode to
split a block into two sub-partitions and each partition has its own mode information.
iii. For example, the intra fused mode may be DIMD blend mode.
iv. For example, the intra fused mode may be TIMD blend mode.
v. For example, the intra fused mode may be intraTMP blend mode.
e. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be used for an intra/IBC
prediction/mode in inter slice.
i. For example, the temporal candidate (e.g., intra mode information, EIP mode information,
intraTMP mode information, DBV mode information, UBC mode information, block vector, SGPM mode information, CCP model information, OBIC mode information, etc. ) and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be derived based on the coding information of a temporal block located in a reference picture.
1. For example, the temporal block may be retrieved by a motion vector shift.
a. For example, the motion shift may be derived based on a motion vector of a
neighboring block.
b. For example, the motion shift may be derived based on a motion vector of the current
block.
i. For example, the current block is coded by a fusion mode
containing an inter prediction part (e.g., as listed in bullet c. ) .
ii. For example, a derived side block matching may be applied
to get a motion shift and locate a temporal reference block in a reference picture.
c. For example, the motion shift may be derived based on a chained motion/block vector.
i. For example, the chained motion vector may be derived by
accumulating at least two motion vectors.
ii. For example, the chained motion vector may be derived by
accumulating at least one motion vector and one block vector.
d. For example, the motion shift may be derived based on a motion/block vector of a
chained block.
i. For example, the chained block used to derive the motion
shift may be retrieved based on more than one motion vector, and the motion shift is associated with the chained block.
ii. For example, the motion shift may be derived without
accumulating more than one motion/block vector.
2. For example, the spatial non-adjacent candidate may be retrieved by a block vector shift.
3. For example, the temporal block and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be retrieved by a
pre-defined position.
a. For example, the pre-defined position may be defined based on the block width and/or
height of the current block.
b. For example, the pre-defined position may be defined based on the CTU size.
c. For example, more than one pre-defined position may be defined.
d. For example, the pre-defined position may be used for spatial blocks in the current
picture.
i. For example, if a spatial block locates at the pre-defined
position is inter coded, then a temporal block in a reference picture may be retrieved based on its motion vector.
e. For example, the block at the pre-defined position in a reference picture may be used
as a temporal block.
f. For example, the pre-defined position may be a position in a reference picture which
is collocated to at least one sample inside or neighboring to the current block in the current picture.
ii. For example, moreover, more than one temporal candidate and/or spatial non-adjacent candidate
may be used. Figs. 58A-58D illustrate examples of pre-defined positions, respectively.
2) The temporal candidates and/or spatial non-adjacent candidates for an intra/inter/IBC/ccp mode may be
defined based on pre-defined position (s) .
i) For example, the pre-defined position may be defined based on the block width and/or height of the
current block.
ii) For example, the pre-defined position may be defined based on the CTU size.
iii) For example, more than one pre-defined position may be defined.
iv) For example, the pre-defined position may be used to find a motion vector from spatial neighboring
block (s) in the current picture.
(1) For example, if a spatial block locates at the pre-defined position is inter coded, then a temporal
block in a reference picture may be retrieved based on its motion vector.
(2) For example, the spatial neighboring block (s) may be in one or more positions as illustrated in
Fig. 58A, wherein the rectangle denoted with “CUR” represents the current block, the grids filled with black are spatial adjacent blocks, and the slashed grids and backslashed grids are spatial non-adjacent blocks.
(a) For example, sparse positions may be defined for the non-adjacent neighboring blocks.
(b) For example, consecutive positions may be defined for the adjacent neighboring blocks.
(i) For example, the interval of block positions may be defined based on a granular of
NxN (such as N=4) .
v) For example, the block at the pre-defined position in a reference picture may be used as a temporal
block.
(1) For example, the temporal block (s) may be in one or more positions as illustrated in Fig. 58B,
wherein rectangle denoted with “COL” represents the collocated temporal block corresponding to the current block, the grids filled with black are temporal adjacent blocks, and the slashed grids and backslashed grids are temporal non-adjacent blocks.
(2) For example, the temporal block (s) may be in one or more positions as illustrated in Fig. 58C,
wherein rectangle denoted with “COL” represents the collocated temporal block corresponding to the current block, the 4x4 blocks filled with black are temporal adjacent blocks, the slashed grids and backslashed grids are temporal non-adjacent blocks, and the sparse dotted grids and dense dotted grids colored are temporal non-adjacent blocks.
(3) For example, the temporal block (s) may be in one or more positions as illustrated in Fig. 58D,
wherein rectangle denoted with “COL” represents the collocated temporal block corresponding to the current block, the sparse dotted grids and dense dotted grids are temporal non-adjacent blocks.
(4) For example, the temporal information may be derived based on the temporal block.
(5) For example, sparse positions may be defined for the non-adjacent neighboring blocks.
(6) For example, consecutive positions may be defined for the adjacent neighboring blocks.
(i) For example, the interval of block positions may be defined based on a granular of
NxN (such as N=4) .
vi) For example, the pre-defined position may be a position in a reference picture which is collocated
to at least one sample inside or neighboring to the current block in the current picture.
vii) For example, an inter mode (such as GPM inter-inter motion candidate list, interCCP merge list,
inter merge mode, subblock based inter mode, affine AMVP mode, regular AMVP mode, inter CCP mode, inter CCP merge mode, LIC mode, etc. ) may follow such pre-defined positions to derive a temporal candidate.
viii) For example, an intra/IBC mode may follow such pre-defined positions to derive a temporal
candidate.
3) The temporal candidates for an intra/inter/IBC/CCP mode may be defined based on a motion vector shift.
i) For example, the motion shift may be derived based on a motion vector of a neighboring block.
ii) For example, the motion shift may be derived based on a motion vector of the current block.
(1) For example, the current block is coded by a fusion mode containing an inter prediction part
(e.g., as listed in bullet c. ) .
(2) For example, a decoder derived block matching may be applied to get a motion shift and locate
a temporal reference block in a reference picture.
iii) For example, the motion shift may be derived based on a chained motion/block vector.
(1) For example, the chained motion vector may be derived by accumulating at least two motion
vectors.
(2) For example, the chained motion vector may be derived by accumulating at least one motion
vector and one block vector.
iv) For example, the motion shift may be derived based on a motion/block vector of a chained block.
(1) For example, the chained block used to derive the motion shift may be retrieved based on more
than one motion vector, and the motion shift is associated with the chained block.
(2) For example, the motion shift may be derived without accumulating more than one
motion/block vector.
v) For example, an inter mode (such as GPM inter-inter motion candidate list, affine AMVP mode,
regular AMVP mode, affine merge mode, interCCP merge list, etc. ) may follow such rule to derive a temporal candidate.
vi) For example, an intra/IBC mode may follow such rule to derive a temporal candidate.
4) For example, the temporal candidate may be derived from a temporal block in a reference picture, wherein
the reference picture may be any available reference picture in the reference picture list (e.g., not necessarily be the collocated picture) .
i) For example, alternatively, the reference picture may be fixed to a collocated picture.
ii) For example, alternatively, the reference picture may be fixed to a nearest reference picture (e.g.,
refIdx=0) of a reference list (e.g., refList=L0 and/or refList=L1) .
5) For example, if the temporal candidate or a spatial non-adjacent candidate is a motion vector (or block
vector) , it may be based on a chained motion vector (or block vector) .
i) For example, the chained motion vector may be derived by accumulating at least two motion vectors.
ii) For example, the chained motion vector may be derived by accumulating at least one motion vector
and one block vector.
iii) For example, an inter mode (such as GPM inter-inter motion candidate list, affine AMVP mode,
regular AMVP mode, affine merge mode, interCCP merge list, etc. ) may follow such rule to derive a temporal candidate or a spatial non-adjacent candidate.
6) For example, the pre-defined positions to looking up temporal candidates and/or spatial non-adjacent
candidates may be aligned/unified for all relevant intra and/or inter and/or IBC and/or CCP blocks in a codec.
a) Alternatively, intra and/or inter and/or IBC and/or CCP blocks may follow different patterns to look up
temporal candidates and/or spatial non-adjacent candidates.
7) For example, the pre-defined positions to looking up adjacent or non-adjacent spatial candidates may be
aligned/unified for all relevant intra and/or inter and/or IBC and/or CCP blocks in a codec.
a) Alternatively, intra and/or inter and/or IBC and/or CCP blocks may follow different patterns to look up
adjacent or non-adjacent spatial candidates.
8) For example, the pre-defined positions of non-adjacent (and/or adjacent) spatial candidates and non-adjacent
(and/or adjacent) temporal candidates may be aligned/unified for all relevant intra and/or inter and/or IBC and/or CCP blocks in a codec.
a) Alternatively, the pre-defined positions of spatial candidates and temporal candidates may be different
for different tools.
9) For example, an affine candidate may be derived from a non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) candidate.
a) For example, all the two or three CPMVs (depending on 4-parameters or 6-parameters affine type) of
an affine candidate may be derived based on one non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) block.
i) For example, the MVs of the top-left corner, top-right corner (if applicable) , bottom-left corner of
the non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) block may be used to construct one affine candidate.
b) For example, different CPMVs of the affine candidate may be derived based on different non-adjacent
spatial (or temporal) blocks.
i) For example, the top-left CPMV of the affine candidate may be derived based on a first non-adjacent
spatial (or temporal) block, while the top-right CPMV (if needed) of the affine candidate may be derived based on a second non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) block, and the bottom-left CPMV of the affine candidate may be derived based on a third non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) block.
(1) For example, the first control point motion vector may be derived based on the first NxN (such
as N=4) non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) block pointed by the current motion vector.
(2) For example, the second control point motion vector may be derived based on the second NxN
(such as N=4) non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) block, wherein the location of the second temporal block is derived based on the location of the first temporal block and the width of the current block.
(3) For example, the third control point motion vector may be derived based on the third NxN (such
as N=4) temporal block, wherein the location of the third non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) block is derived based on the location of the first temporal block and the height of the current block.
c) For example, for affine AMVP mode, if a candidate (spatial adjacent, non-adjacent, temporal, chained
MVP based, etc. ) points to another reference picture which is different from the target reference picture of the current AMVP mode, such candidate may be scaled to the target reference picture and inserted to the affine AMVP list.
i) For example, if there is a neighbor block coded with a motion vector which points to a first reference
picture, however the target reference picture for the current AMVP mode is the second reference picture. in such case, the motion vector of the neighbor block may be scaled to the target reference picture, and the scaled motion vector may be inserted to the AMVP list as a motion candidate.
ii) For example, moreover, such scheme may be applied to a regular inter AMVP based method.
d) For example, one or more temporal non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to the affine AMVP list.
i) For example, the temporal non-adjacent candidates may be reordered together with other candidates
(e.g., adjacent candidates, history based candidates) , and output a reordered affine AMVP list.
ii) For example, the temporal non-adjacent candidate in the affine AMVP list may be explicitly refined
(e.g., with an explicit indicator syntax, motion offset syntax, etc. ) or implicitly refined (e.g., decoder derived motion offsets without signalling, etc. ) .
e) For example, if a temporal candidate is affine coded, its affine coding information may be used for the
affine candidate list construction of the current affine block.
i) For example, the affine coding information of an affine coded block may be stored in a (temporal)
picture buffer and used for future block’s coding.
(1) For example, the affine coding information contains affine type, subblock motion vectors,
horizontal and vertical coordinators, width and height, of the temporal affine coded blocks, etc.
(a) For example, such information may be stored at 8x8 granularity.
(b) For example, such information may be stored at 4x4 granularity.
ii) For example, the temporal candidate may refer to an affine coded block which contains the
coordinators defined as the temporal candidate position.
iii) For example, the motion vectors of the top-left, top-right, bottom-left (if applicable) corner of the
temporal affine coded block may be scaled to a certain reference index and used for the affine candidate list construction of the current affine block.
(1) For example, the certain reference index may refer to the target reference picture for an affine
AMVP mode.
(2) For example, for an affine merge mode,
(a) For example, the certain reference index may be a reference picture with reference index
equal to 0.
(b) For example, the certain reference index may be a reference picture closest to the current
picture.
(c) For example, the certain reference index may be a reference picture farthest to the current
picture.
(d) For example, the certain reference index may be determined based on a reference picture
whose POC distance {current picture, reference picture} is similar to the POC distance {collocated reference frame, collocated picture} .
(e) For example, the certain reference index may be an arbitrary reference picture in the RPL.
iv) For example, the CPMV candidate of the current affine coded block may be calculated based on
the scaled motion vectors (e.g., top-left, top-right, bottom-left (if applicable) corner) of the temporal affine coded block.
(1) For example, the affine model may be constructed based on the {horizontal coordinator, vertical
coordinator, width, height, the scaled motion vectors} of the temporal affine coded block, as well as the {horizontal coordinator, vertical coordinator, width, height} of the current affine coded block.
(2) For example, the CPMV candidate of the current affine coded block may be computed based
on the affine model.
10) For example, an affine candidate may be derived from a chained motion vector.
a) For example, all the two or three CPMVs (depending on 4-parameters or 6-parameters affine type) of
an affine candidate may be set based on a same chained motion vector.
i) For example, all CPMVs of the affine candidate may be set equal to the chained motion vector.
b) For example, different CPMVs of an affine candidate may be set based on different chained motion
vectors.
(1) For example, the top-left CPMV of the affine candidate may be set equal to a first chained
motion vector, while the top-right CPMV (if needed) of the affine candidate may be set equal to a second chained motion vector, and the bottom-left CPMV of the affine candidate may be set equal to a third temporal block pointed by a third chained motion vector.
(a) For example, the first chained motion vector may be derived based on accumulating the
current motion vector and the motion vector of the first NxN (such as N=4) temporal block pointed by the current motion vector.
(b) For example, the second chained motion vector may be derived based on accumulating the
current motion vector and the motion vector of the second NxN (such as N=4) temporal block, wherein the location of the second temporal block is derived based on the location of the first temporal block and the width of the current block.
(c) For example, the third chained motion vector may be derived based on accumulating the
current motion vector and the motion vector of the third NxN (such as N=4) temporal block, wherein the location of the third temporal block is derived based on the location of the first temporal block and the height of the current block.
c) For example, a chained motion vector may be generated based on accumulating at least one BV.
i) For example, the BV may be derived from a BV list which is constructed by neighboring
IBC/intraTMP coded blocks.
ii) For example, the BV may be derived from the position displacement between the current block and
a spatial neighbor (adjacent, or non-adjacent) block.
iii) For example, the chained motion vector may be derived based on accumulating a BV and an MV.
iv) For example, the chained motion vector may be derived based on accumulating two BVs.
v) For example, the disclosed method may be used for an AMVP based method (e.g., inter AMVP,
affine AMVP, IBC AMVP, etc. ) .
vi) For example, the disclosed method may be used for a merge based method (e.g., inter merge, affine
mer, IBC merge, CCP merge, intra merge, etc. ) .
d) In one example, at least one CPMV of a temporal affine candidate (either affine AMVP candidate or
affine merge candidate) may be derived using the information of picture distance.
e) In one example, at least one CPMV of a temporal affine candidate (either affine AMVP candidate or
affine merge candidate) may be derived in a way same or similar to chained MV derivation.
11) For example, an affine candidate may be refined based on a decoder derived method (e.g., template matching
based, or bilateral matching based, etc. ) .
a) For example, an affine AMVP candidate may be refined based on template matching or bilateral
matching.
i) For example, the LIC flag is set to false when performing the affine AMVP candidate refinement.
b) For example, an affine merge candidate may be refined based on template matching or bilateral
matching.
c) For example, a non-translation affine parameter refinement process may be applied to refine an affine
candidate.
i) For example, different offset values may be added to top-left, top-right, bottom-left CPMV of an
affine candidate.
d) For example, a translation affine parameter refinement process may be applied to refine the base MV
of an affine candidate.
i) For example, a same offset may be added to all CPMVs of an affine candidate.
12) An AMVP candidate may be refined by SAD or SATD or weighted SAD.
a) Which cost function (metric) is used to refine a motion vector may be dependent on candidate index
and/or prediction method.
b) To refine an affine AMVP motion vector candidate,
i) For example, whether to use SAD or SATD may be dependent on the affine AMVP candidate
index in the AMVP list.
ii) For example, whether to use SAD or weighted SAD may be dependent on the affine AMVP
candidate index in the AMVP list.
c) To refine a regular inter AMVP motion vector candidate,
i) For example, whether to use SAD or SATD may be dependent on the inter AMVP candidate
index in the AMVP list.
ii) For example, whether to use SAD or weighted SAD may be dependent on the inter AMVP
candidate index in the AMVP list.
d) For example, the determination may be based on the parity of the AMVP candidate index.
i) For example, if the AMVP candidate index is an even number, the first cost function is selected
for the refinement process, otherwise the second cost function is selected.
ii) For example, alternatively, if the AMVP candidate index is a odd number, the first cost function
is selected for the refinement process, otherwise the second cost function is selected.
13) The candidates in the list may be sorted/reordered/pruned based on the distance between the current block
and the neighbor block (of which the candidate is derived from) .
a) For example, a penalty factor may be added to the decoder derived cost (e.g., template cost, bilateral
cost, etc. ) of a candidate.
i) For example, the penalty factor may be determined based on the distance between the current block
and the neighbor block which the candidate is derived from.
(1) For example, the decoder derived cost of a candidate father from the current block may be
multiplied by a larger penalty factor.
ii) Alternatively, for example, how to set the penalty factor may be determined based on the candidate
type.
(1) For example, larger penalty factor may be added to a certain type of candidate (e.g., temporal
candidates, chained motion vector based candidates, etc. ) .
b) For example, the candidate with a larger distance may be put after another candidate with a smaller
distance.
i) For example, the “distance” refers to the displacement between the current block and the candidate
block, wherein the candidate block is a block whose motion/model/mode parameters are going to be inserted to the candidate list.
c) For example, the candidate list pruning criteria may be based on the distance.
i) For example, candidates with similar distance values may be treated as redundant candidates and
may be pruned for the candidate list construction.
ii) Alternatively, for example, pruning criteria may be based on a diversity check, wherein the diversity
may be related to motion vector difference, reference indexes, POC distance, QP, lambda, etc.
iii) For example, candidates who are close to each other may be clustered, so that sparse candidates
that have enough distance from each other may be retained in the candidate list.
(1) For example, the clustering process may be conducted based on discarding latter adjacent
candidates which is close to a first one. In such case, only the first one of a group of adjacent candidates is retained in the list.
(2) For example, the clustering process may be conducted based on an intermediate block who
locates in-between those candidates who are close to each other.
(3) For example, moreover, the sparse candidates may be used as guided motion vector to generate
subsequent chained motion vector candidates.
(a) For example, it may be used for an inter prediction mode (e.g., affine, regular inter, etc. ) .
d) For example, the distance may be defined based on a horizontal displacement and/or a vertical
displacement between the coordination of the current block and the coordination of the neighbor block which the candidate is derived from.
e) For example, the candidates may refer to motion candidates, mode candidates, or CCP/filter model
candidates, etc.
f) For example, the distance may refer to a distance between a spatial neighbor block (e.g., in the current
picture) and the current block (e.g., in the current picture) .
g) For example, the distance may refer to a distance between a temporal neighbor block (e.g., in a reference
picture) and a temporal collocated block (e.g., in a reference picture) which is collocated to the current block.
14) A pair of bi-directional motion vector predictor candidates (i.e., one from L0, the other from L1) may be
determined based on a decoder derived method (e.g., bilateral cost based, template cost based, etc. ) .
a) For example, which motion vector predictors (e.g., motion vector predictor index) are used for L0 and
L1 may be determined based on bilateral cost (or template cost) .
i) For example, assume there are M motion vector predictors from L0, N motion vector predictors
from L1, then one optimum motion vector predictor pair {mvp-L0, mvp-L1} among the MxN possible motion vector predictor pairs may be selected for the bi-directional AMVP prediction, based on the pair which has the minimum bilateral cost (or template cost) .
(1) For example, in such case, there is no need to signal the motion vector predictor indexes in the
bitstream.
ii) For example, the claimed method may be by default used for a bi-directional AMVP coded block.
(1) For example, for example, on the other hand, a motion vector predictor index may be signalled
for a uni-directional AMVP coded block.
b) For example, which reference indexes are used for L0 and L1 may be determined based on bilateral cost
(or template cost) .
i) For example, assume there are M reference pictures from L0, N reference pictures from L1, then
one optimum reference picture pair {refIdx-L0, refIdx-L1} among the MxN possible reference picture pairs may be selected for the bi-directional AMVP prediction, based on the pair which has the minimum bilateral cost (or template cost) .
(1) For example, in such case, there is no need to signal the reference picture indexes in the
bitstream.
c) For example, the bi-directional motion vector predictor candidates may be refined based on a decoder
derived method.
i) For example, bilateral matching based method may be used to refine one or two of the bi-directional
motion vector predictors.
(1) For example, it may refine L0 or L1 only.
(2) Alternatively, it may refine both L0 and L1 motion vector predictors.
ii) For example, template matching based method may be used to refine one or two of the bi-directional
motion vector predictors.
iii) For example, whether to use bilateral matching or template matching to refine the bi-directional
motion vector predictors may be determined based on the POC distance.
(1) For example, template matching may be applied when the POC distance between L0 reference
and the current picture is NOT equal to the POC distance between L1 reference and the current picture.
(2) For example, bilateral matching may be applied when the POC distance between L0 reference
and the current picture is equal to the POC distance between L1 reference and the current picture.
iv) For example, moreover, bilateral matching may be applied when the POC distance between L0
reference and the current picture is NOT equal to the POC distance between L1 reference and the current picture.
(1) For example, when amvp-merge mode is used, bilateral matching may be applied to refine the
L0 and L1 motion vector pair.
v) For example, whether to refine both sides/directions or just one side/direction of the bi-directional
motion vector predictors may be determined based on BCW weights or POC distance or template cost.
(1) For example, the direction which has larger (or smaller) BCW weight may be refined.
(2) For example, the direction which has shorter (or longer) POC distance may be refined.
(3) For example, the direction which has smaller (or larger) template cost may be refined.
d) For example, the motion vector refinement may be applied before the motion vector reordering/sorting.
i) For example, all motion vector candidates may be refined first, then the motion vector reordering
may be applied based on the refined motion vector candidates.
e) Alternatively, the motion vector refinement may be applied after the motion vector reordering/sorting.
i) For example, the motion vector reordering may be applied first, then X (such as X=1) candidates
are selected, thereafter the motion vector refinement is applied for the selected candidates only.
f) For example, the claimed method may be used for an AMVP coded block (e.g., regular CU based
AMVP, affine based AMVP, SMVD, etc. ) .
i) Alternatively, for example, the claimed method may be used for SMVD mode only.
g) For example, the claimed method may be signalled at block level.
h) For example, the claimed method may be by default applied without explicit signalling.
i) For example, the claimed method may be allowed to be applied in case that the L0 reference is coded
prior to the current picture, and the L1 reference is coded after the current picture.
j) For example, the claimed method may be allowed to be applied in case that the POC distance between
L0 reference and the current picture is equal to the POC distance between L1 reference and the current picture.
k) For example, the claimed method may be allowed to be applied in case that the POC distance between
L0 reference and the current picture is NOT equal to the POC distance between L1 reference and the current picture.
i) Moreover, for example, SMVD may be allowed in case that the POC distance between L0 reference
and the current picture is NOT equal to the POC distance between L1 reference and the current picture.
l) For example, the claimed method may be allowed to be applied in case that BCW is used to the current
block.
i) Moreover, for example, SMVD may be allowed in case that BCW is used.
m) For example, the claimed method may be allowed to be applied in case that LIC is used to the current
block.
15) A spatial/temporal non-adjacent candidate (e.g., for affine, regular inter, intra, IBC, CCP, merge, amvp, etc. )
may be fetched from one or more of the positions in Fig. 59A and Fig. 59B, in which the distance between the non-adjacent position and the current block (or collocated block regarding a temporal candidate) may be defined based on the block width and/or height of the current block.
a) For example, the candidate may refer to a spatial adjacent or non-adjacent candidate of the current block
in the current picture.
b) For example, the candidate may refer to a temporal adjacent or non-adjacent candidate of the temporal
collocated block in a reference picture.
i) For example, the reference picture could be an available reference picture in the RPL.
ii) For example, the motion vector of the reference block (e.g., illustrated in Fig. 59A and Fig. 59B)
may be scaled to a certain reference index.
(1) For example, the certain reference index may be determined by the target reference picture of
an AMVP based coding method.
(2) For example, the certain reference index may be a reference picture with reference index equal
to 0.
(3) For example, the certain reference index may be a reference picture closest to the current picture.
(4) For example, the certain reference index may be a reference picture farthest to the current
picture.
(5) For example, the certain reference index may be determined based on a reference picture whose
POC distance {current picture, reference picture} is similar to the POC distance {collocated reference frame, collocated picture} .
(6) For example, the certain reference index may be an arbitrary reference picture in the RPL.
c) For example, the following coding method may be implemented based on the candidate:
i) affine amvp,
ii) regular inter amvp,
iii) sbtmvp based amvp,
iv) affine merge,
v) BM affine merge,
vi) regular inter merge, CIIP, GPM, etc.,
vii) BM merge,
viii) TM merge,
ix) IBC merge,
x) IBC amvp,
xi) intraTMP (e.g., merge list) ,
xii) intra/inter CCP merge,
xiii) OBIC, EIP, SGPM, DIMD merge, TIMD merge, etc.
d) For example, a separate non-adjacent candidate sub-group list may be constructed, and at least one
candidate from the sub-group list may be merged to the final candidate list for a block coding.
i) For example, an index of the final candidate list may be signalled in the bitstream.
ii) For example, a candidate in the final candidate list may be selected based on a decoder derive
method (i.e., without signaling an index) and used for the current block coding.
iii) For example, the non-adjacent candidates in the sub-group list may be reordered and the ones with
lower template costs may be further merged to the final candidate list.
(1) For example, how many non-adjacent candidates can be merged into the final list may be pre-
defined.
iv) The size of the sub-group list and the size of the final list may be different.
e) For example, the non-adjacent candidate may be refined based on a decoder derived method (e.g, ,
template matching based, bilateral matching based, etc. ) .
f) For example, the non-adjacent candidate may be refined based on a encoder selected method, and the
output delta/difference may be signalled in the bitstream. Fig. 59A and Fig. 59B illustrate another example of possible positions of adjacent and non-adjacent neighboring blocks relative to the current or collocated block, respectively. In Figs. 59A and 59B, the center block denoted with “C” represents the current block in the current picture or collocated block in the reference picture.
General aspects
16) The disclosed method may be used for a video unit coded with at least one of the following methods:
a) An intra coded method
i) For example, EIP, EIP merge, intraTMP, DBV, DIMD, DIMD merge, OBIC, TIMD, PDP, intra
merge mode, MRL, TMRL, EMRL, intra luma fusion, intra chroma fusion, SGPM, IBC, fractional BV, bi-IBC, PDPC, etc.
ii) For example, a variant mode of the above method.
b) A CCLM/CCCM/CCP/LM/CCRM based method
i) For example, LM, CCLM, MMLM, CCCM, GLM, NS-CCCM, MDF-CCCM, GL-CCCM, BVG-
CCCM, inter CCCM, CCRM, LBCCP, inter CCP merge mode, intra CCP merge mode, a CCP fusion mode, etc.
ii) For example, a variant mode of the above method.
c) An inter coded method
i) For example, an inter merge mode.
ii) For example, an inter AMVP mode.
iii) For example, AMVP-merge, Affine, sbTMVP, subblock merge, pixel affine, affine DMVR,
ADMVR, DMVR, BDOF, GPM-MMVD, GPM-TM, GPM, GPM inter-intra, CIIP-PDPC, CIIP-TM, CIIP-TIMD, CIIP, CIIP with subblock based motion compensation, MMVD, affine MMVD, MHP, OBMC, TM-OBMC, LIC, bi-LIC, etc.
iv) For example, a variant mode of the above method.
d) An IBC coded method
i) For example, an IBC merge mode.
ii) For example, an IBC AMVP mode.
iii) For example, RR-IBC, IBC-CIIP, IBC-GPM, IBC-LIC, IBC-MBVD, filtered IBC, IBC-TM, etc.
iv) For example, a variant mode of the above method.
e) Palette mode
i) For example, a variant mode of Palette mode.
f) A fusion/blending based method
i) For example, an intra and inter blended method.
(1) For example, CIIP-intra-inter, CIIP-PDPC-InterMerge, CIIP-TIMD-TMmerge, CIIP-intra-
affine/sbtmvp, GPM-intra-inter, etc.
ii) For example, an intra and intra blended method.
(1) For example, intraTMP fusion, DIMD fusion, TIMD fusion, intra luma fusion, intra chroma
fusion, SGPM intra-intra, etc.
iii) For example, an inter and inter blended method.
(1) For example, bi-predictive inter, BCW, GPM-inter-inter, MHP, etc.
iv) For example, a CCP and intra/inter/IBC blended method.
(1) For example, inter CCCM which blends inter and CCP.
(2) For example, inter CCCM merge which blends inter and CCP.
(3) For example, intra CCCM fusion which blends intra and CCP.
(4) For example, intra chroma fusion which blends intra and CCP.
v) For example, a CCP and CCP blended method.
(1) For example, intra CCCM fusion which blends one CCP and another CCP.
vi) For example, an intra and IBC blended method.
(1) For example, CIIP-intra-IBC, GPM-intra-IBC, SGPM intra-IBC, etc.
vii) For example, an inter and IBC blended method.
(1) For example, CIIP-IBC-inter, GPM-IBC-inter, etc.
viii) For example, an IBC and IBC blended method.
(1) For example, bi-IBC, GPM-IBC-IBC, etc.
ix) For example, a variant mode of the above method.
17) The disclosed method may be used for single tree coding.
18) The disclosed method may be used for dual tree coding.
19) The disclosed method may be used for chroma coding.
20) The disclosed method may be used for luma coding.
21) The disclosed method may be used for inter block coding.
22) The disclosed method may be used for intra block coding.
23) The disclosed method may be used for IBC/intraTMP/DBV block coding.
24) The disclosed method may be used in a intra (such as I) slice.
25) The disclosed method may be used in a inter (such as B or P or low-delay B) slice.
26) Whether to and/or how to apply the disclosed methods above may be signalled at sequence level/group of
pictures level/picture level/slice level/tile group level, such as in sequence header/picture header/SPS/VPS/DPS/DCI/PPS/APS/slice header/tile group header.
27) Whether to and/or how to apply the disclosed methods above may be signalled at
PB/TB/CB/PU/TU/CU/VPDU/CTU/CTU row/slice/tile/sub-picture/other kinds of region contain more than one sample or pixel.
28) Whether to and/or how to apply the disclosed methods above may be dependent on coded information, such
as block size, colour format, single/dual tree partitioning, colour component, slice/picture type.
1) Intra/IBC prediction may be employed based on a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate.
a. For example, the Intra/IBC prediction may be employed in an inter slice.
b. For example, an intra luma mode may be derived based on a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-
adjacent candidate.
i. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an
intraTMP mode list.
1. For example, it may be inserted to intraTMP merge candidate list.
ii. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an
EIP mode list.
1. For example, it may be inserted to EIP merge candidate list.
iii. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an
intra merge mode list.
1. For example, the intra merge mode may be employed based on an intra mode list.
iv. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an
SGPM mode list.
v. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to a
OBIC (i.e., occurrence based intra coding) mode list.
vi. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an
TIMD/DIMD mode list.
1. For example, it may be inserted to TIMD candidate list.
2. For example, it may be inserted to TIMD merge candidate list.
3. For example, it may be inserted to DIMD merge candidate list.
vii. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an
intra MPM list.
viii. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to an
IPM (intra prediction mode) list.
c. For example, an intra chroma mode may be derived based on a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-
adjacent candidate.
i. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to intra
chroma mode list.
ii. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to non-
CCP based intra chroma mode list.
iii. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to
DBV mode list.
iv. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to CCP
mode list.
1. For example, the CCP may refer to regular CCP mode, and/or CCP merge mode.
2. For example, the CCP may refer to BVG-CCCM mode.
d. For example, the intra part of an intra fusion mode may be derived based on a temporal candidate
and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate.
i. For example, the intra fusion mode may be CIIP mode (and/or its variant) .
1. For example, it may be regular CIIP mode.
2. For example, it may be CIIP variant mode which blends intra prediction with IBC prediction.
3. For example, it may be CIIP variant mode which blends intra prediction with intraTMP
prediction.
4. For example, it may be CIIP variant mode which blends intra prediction with subblock based
prediction (e.g., affine, sbtMVP, etc. ) .
5. For example, block based weighting method may be used for the CIIP mode and/or its variant.
ii. For example, the intra fusion mode may be GPM mode (and/or its variant) .
1. For example, it may be GPM-inter-intra mode.
2. For example, it may be GPM-IBC-intra mode.
3. For example, it may be GPM-subblock-intra mode, wherein the subblock based prediction may
be derived by affine and/or sbTMVP.
4. For example, sample based weighting method may be used for the GPM mode and/or its variant.
5. For example, geometric partitioning may be used for the GPM mode and/or its variant mode to
split a block into two sub-partitions and each partition has its own mode information.
iii. For example, the intra fused mode may be DIMD blend mode.
iv. For example, the intra fused mode may be TIMD blend mode.
v. For example, the intra fused mode may be intraTMP blend mode.
e. For example, a temporal candidate and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be used for an intra/IBC
prediction/mode in inter slice.
i. For example, the temporal candidate (e.g., intra mode information, EIP mode information,
intraTMP mode information, DBV mode information, UBC mode information, block vector, SGPM mode information, CCP model information, OBIC mode information, etc. ) and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be derived based on the coding information of a temporal block located in a reference picture.
1. For example, the temporal block may be retrieved by a motion vector shift.
a. For example, the motion shift may be derived based on a motion vector of a
neighboring block.
b. For example, the motion shift may be derived based on a motion vector of the current
block.
i. For example, the current block is coded by a fusion mode
containing an inter prediction part (e.g., as listed in bullet c. ) .
ii. For example, a derived side block matching may be applied
to get a motion shift and locate a temporal reference block in a reference picture.
c. For example, the motion shift may be derived based on a chained motion/block vector.
i. For example, the chained motion vector may be derived by
accumulating at least two motion vectors.
ii. For example, the chained motion vector may be derived by
accumulating at least one motion vector and one block vector.
d. For example, the motion shift may be derived based on a motion/block vector of a
chained block.
i. For example, the chained block used to derive the motion
shift may be retrieved based on more than one motion vector, and the motion shift is associated with the chained block.
ii. For example, the motion shift may be derived without
accumulating more than one motion/block vector.
2. For example, the spatial non-adjacent candidate may be retrieved by a block vector shift.
3. For example, the temporal block and/or a spatial non-adjacent candidate may be retrieved by a
pre-defined position.
a. For example, the pre-defined position may be defined based on the block width and/or
height of the current block.
b. For example, the pre-defined position may be defined based on the CTU size.
c. For example, more than one pre-defined position may be defined.
d. For example, the pre-defined position may be used for spatial blocks in the current
picture.
i. For example, if a spatial block locates at the pre-defined
position is inter coded, then a temporal block in a reference picture may be retrieved based on its motion vector.
e. For example, the block at the pre-defined position in a reference picture may be used
as a temporal block.
f. For example, the pre-defined position may be a position in a reference picture which
is collocated to at least one sample inside or neighboring to the current block in the current picture.
ii. For example, moreover, more than one temporal candidate and/or spatial non-adjacent candidate
may be used. Figs. 58A-58D illustrate examples of pre-defined positions, respectively.
2) The temporal candidates and/or spatial non-adjacent candidates for an intra/inter/IBC/ccp mode may be
defined based on pre-defined position (s) .
i) For example, the pre-defined position may be defined based on the block width and/or height of the
current block.
ii) For example, the pre-defined position may be defined based on the CTU size.
iii) For example, more than one pre-defined position may be defined.
iv) For example, the pre-defined position may be used to find a motion vector from spatial neighboring
block (s) in the current picture.
(1) For example, if a spatial block locates at the pre-defined position is inter coded, then a temporal
block in a reference picture may be retrieved based on its motion vector.
(2) For example, the spatial neighboring block (s) may be in one or more positions as illustrated in
Fig. 58A, wherein the rectangle denoted with “CUR” represents the current block, the grids filled with black are spatial adjacent blocks, and the slashed grids and backslashed grids are spatial non-adjacent blocks.
(a) For example, sparse positions may be defined for the non-adjacent neighboring blocks.
(b) For example, consecutive positions may be defined for the adjacent neighboring blocks.
(i) For example, the interval of block positions may be defined based on a granular of
NxN (such as N=4) .
v) For example, the block at the pre-defined position in a reference picture may be used as a temporal
block.
(1) For example, the temporal block (s) may be in one or more positions as illustrated in Fig. 58B,
wherein rectangle denoted with “COL” represents the collocated temporal block corresponding to the current block, the grids filled with black are temporal adjacent blocks, and the slashed grids and backslashed grids are temporal non-adjacent blocks.
(2) For example, the temporal block (s) may be in one or more positions as illustrated in Fig. 58C,
wherein rectangle denoted with “COL” represents the collocated temporal block corresponding to the current block, the 4x4 blocks filled with black are temporal adjacent blocks, the slashed grids and backslashed grids are temporal non-adjacent blocks, and the sparse dotted grids and dense dotted grids colored are temporal non-adjacent blocks.
(3) For example, the temporal block (s) may be in one or more positions as illustrated in Fig. 58D,
wherein rectangle denoted with “COL” represents the collocated temporal block corresponding to the current block, the sparse dotted grids and dense dotted grids are temporal non-adjacent blocks.
(4) For example, the temporal information may be derived based on the temporal block.
(5) For example, sparse positions may be defined for the non-adjacent neighboring blocks.
(6) For example, consecutive positions may be defined for the adjacent neighboring blocks.
(i) For example, the interval of block positions may be defined based on a granular of
NxN (such as N=4) .
vi) For example, the pre-defined position may be a position in a reference picture which is collocated
to at least one sample inside or neighboring to the current block in the current picture.
vii) For example, an inter mode (such as GPM inter-inter motion candidate list, interCCP merge list,
inter merge mode, subblock based inter mode, affine AMVP mode, regular AMVP mode, inter CCP mode, inter CCP merge mode, LIC mode, etc. ) may follow such pre-defined positions to derive a temporal candidate.
viii) For example, an intra/IBC mode may follow such pre-defined positions to derive a temporal
candidate.
3) The temporal candidates for an intra/inter/IBC/CCP mode may be defined based on a motion vector shift.
i) For example, the motion shift may be derived based on a motion vector of a neighboring block.
ii) For example, the motion shift may be derived based on a motion vector of the current block.
(1) For example, the current block is coded by a fusion mode containing an inter prediction part
(e.g., as listed in bullet c. ) .
(2) For example, a decoder derived block matching may be applied to get a motion shift and locate
a temporal reference block in a reference picture.
iii) For example, the motion shift may be derived based on a chained motion/block vector.
(1) For example, the chained motion vector may be derived by accumulating at least two motion
vectors.
(2) For example, the chained motion vector may be derived by accumulating at least one motion
vector and one block vector.
iv) For example, the motion shift may be derived based on a motion/block vector of a chained block.
(1) For example, the chained block used to derive the motion shift may be retrieved based on more
than one motion vector, and the motion shift is associated with the chained block.
(2) For example, the motion shift may be derived without accumulating more than one
motion/block vector.
v) For example, an inter mode (such as GPM inter-inter motion candidate list, affine AMVP mode,
regular AMVP mode, affine merge mode, interCCP merge list, etc. ) may follow such rule to derive a temporal candidate.
vi) For example, an intra/IBC mode may follow such rule to derive a temporal candidate.
4) For example, the temporal candidate may be derived from a temporal block in a reference picture, wherein
the reference picture may be any available reference picture in the reference picture list (e.g., not necessarily be the collocated picture) .
i) For example, alternatively, the reference picture may be fixed to a collocated picture.
ii) For example, alternatively, the reference picture may be fixed to a nearest reference picture (e.g.,
refIdx=0) of a reference list (e.g., refList=L0 and/or refList=L1) .
5) For example, if the temporal candidate or a spatial non-adjacent candidate is a motion vector (or block
vector) , it may be based on a chained motion vector (or block vector) .
i) For example, the chained motion vector may be derived by accumulating at least two motion vectors.
ii) For example, the chained motion vector may be derived by accumulating at least one motion vector
and one block vector.
iii) For example, an inter mode (such as GPM inter-inter motion candidate list, affine AMVP mode,
regular AMVP mode, affine merge mode, interCCP merge list, etc. ) may follow such rule to derive a temporal candidate or a spatial non-adjacent candidate.
6) For example, the pre-defined positions to looking up temporal candidates and/or spatial non-adjacent
candidates may be aligned/unified for all relevant intra and/or inter and/or IBC and/or CCP blocks in a codec.
a) Alternatively, intra and/or inter and/or IBC and/or CCP blocks may follow different patterns to look up
temporal candidates and/or spatial non-adjacent candidates.
7) For example, the pre-defined positions to looking up adjacent or non-adjacent spatial candidates may be
aligned/unified for all relevant intra and/or inter and/or IBC and/or CCP blocks in a codec.
a) Alternatively, intra and/or inter and/or IBC and/or CCP blocks may follow different patterns to look up
adjacent or non-adjacent spatial candidates.
8) For example, the pre-defined positions of non-adjacent (and/or adjacent) spatial candidates and non-adjacent
(and/or adjacent) temporal candidates may be aligned/unified for all relevant intra and/or inter and/or IBC and/or CCP blocks in a codec.
a) Alternatively, the pre-defined positions of spatial candidates and temporal candidates may be different
for different tools.
9) For example, an affine candidate may be derived from a non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) candidate.
a) For example, all the two or three CPMVs (depending on 4-parameters or 6-parameters affine type) of
an affine candidate may be derived based on one non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) block.
i) For example, the MVs of the top-left corner, top-right corner (if applicable) , bottom-left corner of
the non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) block may be used to construct one affine candidate.
b) For example, different CPMVs of the affine candidate may be derived based on different non-adjacent
spatial (or temporal) blocks.
i) For example, the top-left CPMV of the affine candidate may be derived based on a first non-adjacent
spatial (or temporal) block, while the top-right CPMV (if needed) of the affine candidate may be derived based on a second non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) block, and the bottom-left CPMV of the affine candidate may be derived based on a third non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) block.
(1) For example, the first control point motion vector may be derived based on the first NxN (such
as N=4) non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) block pointed by the current motion vector.
(2) For example, the second control point motion vector may be derived based on the second NxN
(such as N=4) non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) block, wherein the location of the second temporal block is derived based on the location of the first temporal block and the width of the current block.
(3) For example, the third control point motion vector may be derived based on the third NxN (such
as N=4) temporal block, wherein the location of the third non-adjacent spatial (or temporal) block is derived based on the location of the first temporal block and the height of the current block.
c) For example, for affine AMVP mode, if a candidate (spatial adjacent, non-adjacent, temporal, chained
MVP based, etc. ) points to another reference picture which is different from the target reference picture of the current AMVP mode, such candidate may be scaled to the target reference picture and inserted to the affine AMVP list.
i) For example, if there is a neighbor block coded with a motion vector which points to a first reference
picture, however the target reference picture for the current AMVP mode is the second reference picture. in such case, the motion vector of the neighbor block may be scaled to the target reference picture, and the scaled motion vector may be inserted to the AMVP list as a motion candidate.
ii) For example, moreover, such scheme may be applied to a regular inter AMVP based method.
d) For example, one or more temporal non-adjacent candidate may be inserted to the affine AMVP list.
i) For example, the temporal non-adjacent candidates may be reordered together with other candidates
(e.g., adjacent candidates, history based candidates) , and output a reordered affine AMVP list.
ii) For example, the temporal non-adjacent candidate in the affine AMVP list may be explicitly refined
(e.g., with an explicit indicator syntax, motion offset syntax, etc. ) or implicitly refined (e.g., decoder derived motion offsets without signalling, etc. ) .
e) For example, if a temporal candidate is affine coded, its affine coding information may be used for the
affine candidate list construction of the current affine block.
i) For example, the affine coding information of an affine coded block may be stored in a (temporal)
picture buffer and used for future block’s coding.
(1) For example, the affine coding information contains affine type, subblock motion vectors,
horizontal and vertical coordinators, width and height, of the temporal affine coded blocks, etc.
(a) For example, such information may be stored at 8x8 granularity.
(b) For example, such information may be stored at 4x4 granularity.
ii) For example, the temporal candidate may refer to an affine coded block which contains the
coordinators defined as the temporal candidate position.
iii) For example, the motion vectors of the top-left, top-right, bottom-left (if applicable) corner of the
temporal affine coded block may be scaled to a certain reference index and used for the affine candidate list construction of the current affine block.
(1) For example, the certain reference index may refer to the target reference picture for an affine
AMVP mode.
(2) For example, for an affine merge mode,
(a) For example, the certain reference index may be a reference picture with reference index
equal to 0.
(b) For example, the certain reference index may be a reference picture closest to the current
picture.
(c) For example, the certain reference index may be a reference picture farthest to the current
picture.
(d) For example, the certain reference index may be determined based on a reference picture
whose POC distance {current picture, reference picture} is similar to the POC distance {collocated reference frame, collocated picture} .
(e) For example, the certain reference index may be an arbitrary reference picture in the RPL.
iv) For example, the CPMV candidate of the current affine coded block may be calculated based on
the scaled motion vectors (e.g., top-left, top-right, bottom-left (if applicable) corner) of the temporal affine coded block.
(1) For example, the affine model may be constructed based on the {horizontal coordinator, vertical
coordinator, width, height, the scaled motion vectors} of the temporal affine coded block, as well as the {horizontal coordinator, vertical coordinator, width, height} of the current affine coded block.
(2) For example, the CPMV candidate of the current affine coded block may be computed based
on the affine model.
10) For example, an affine candidate may be derived from a chained motion vector.
a) For example, all the two or three CPMVs (depending on 4-parameters or 6-parameters affine type) of
an affine candidate may be set based on a same chained motion vector.
i) For example, all CPMVs of the affine candidate may be set equal to the chained motion vector.
b) For example, different CPMVs of an affine candidate may be set based on different chained motion
vectors.
(1) For example, the top-left CPMV of the affine candidate may be set equal to a first chained
motion vector, while the top-right CPMV (if needed) of the affine candidate may be set equal to a second chained motion vector, and the bottom-left CPMV of the affine candidate may be set equal to a third temporal block pointed by a third chained motion vector.
(a) For example, the first chained motion vector may be derived based on accumulating the
current motion vector and the motion vector of the first NxN (such as N=4) temporal block pointed by the current motion vector.
(b) For example, the second chained motion vector may be derived based on accumulating the
current motion vector and the motion vector of the second NxN (such as N=4) temporal block, wherein the location of the second temporal block is derived based on the location of the first temporal block and the width of the current block.
(c) For example, the third chained motion vector may be derived based on accumulating the
current motion vector and the motion vector of the third NxN (such as N=4) temporal block, wherein the location of the third temporal block is derived based on the location of the first temporal block and the height of the current block.
c) For example, a chained motion vector may be generated based on accumulating at least one BV.
i) For example, the BV may be derived from a BV list which is constructed by neighboring
IBC/intraTMP coded blocks.
ii) For example, the BV may be derived from the position displacement between the current block and
a spatial neighbor (adjacent, or non-adjacent) block.
iii) For example, the chained motion vector may be derived based on accumulating a BV and an MV.
iv) For example, the chained motion vector may be derived based on accumulating two BVs.
v) For example, the disclosed method may be used for an AMVP based method (e.g., inter AMVP,
affine AMVP, IBC AMVP, etc. ) .
vi) For example, the disclosed method may be used for a merge based method (e.g., inter merge, affine
mer, IBC merge, CCP merge, intra merge, etc. ) .
d) In one example, at least one CPMV of a temporal affine candidate (either affine AMVP candidate or
affine merge candidate) may be derived using the information of picture distance.
e) In one example, at least one CPMV of a temporal affine candidate (either affine AMVP candidate or
affine merge candidate) may be derived in a way same or similar to chained MV derivation.
11) For example, an affine candidate may be refined based on a decoder derived method (e.g., template matching
based, or bilateral matching based, etc. ) .
a) For example, an affine AMVP candidate may be refined based on template matching or bilateral
matching.
i) For example, the LIC flag is set to false when performing the affine AMVP candidate refinement.
b) For example, an affine merge candidate may be refined based on template matching or bilateral
matching.
c) For example, a non-translation affine parameter refinement process may be applied to refine an affine
candidate.
i) For example, different offset values may be added to top-left, top-right, bottom-left CPMV of an
affine candidate.
d) For example, a translation affine parameter refinement process may be applied to refine the base MV
of an affine candidate.
i) For example, a same offset may be added to all CPMVs of an affine candidate.
12) An AMVP candidate may be refined by SAD or SATD or weighted SAD.
a) Which cost function (metric) is used to refine a motion vector may be dependent on candidate index
and/or prediction method.
b) To refine an affine AMVP motion vector candidate,
i) For example, whether to use SAD or SATD may be dependent on the affine AMVP candidate
index in the AMVP list.
ii) For example, whether to use SAD or weighted SAD may be dependent on the affine AMVP
candidate index in the AMVP list.
c) To refine a regular inter AMVP motion vector candidate,
i) For example, whether to use SAD or SATD may be dependent on the inter AMVP candidate
index in the AMVP list.
ii) For example, whether to use SAD or weighted SAD may be dependent on the inter AMVP
candidate index in the AMVP list.
d) For example, the determination may be based on the parity of the AMVP candidate index.
i) For example, if the AMVP candidate index is an even number, the first cost function is selected
for the refinement process, otherwise the second cost function is selected.
ii) For example, alternatively, if the AMVP candidate index is a odd number, the first cost function
is selected for the refinement process, otherwise the second cost function is selected.
13) The candidates in the list may be sorted/reordered/pruned based on the distance between the current block
and the neighbor block (of which the candidate is derived from) .
a) For example, a penalty factor may be added to the decoder derived cost (e.g., template cost, bilateral
cost, etc. ) of a candidate.
i) For example, the penalty factor may be determined based on the distance between the current block
and the neighbor block which the candidate is derived from.
(1) For example, the decoder derived cost of a candidate father from the current block may be
multiplied by a larger penalty factor.
ii) Alternatively, for example, how to set the penalty factor may be determined based on the candidate
type.
(1) For example, larger penalty factor may be added to a certain type of candidate (e.g., temporal
candidates, chained motion vector based candidates, etc. ) .
b) For example, the candidate with a larger distance may be put after another candidate with a smaller
distance.
i) For example, the “distance” refers to the displacement between the current block and the candidate
block, wherein the candidate block is a block whose motion/model/mode parameters are going to be inserted to the candidate list.
c) For example, the candidate list pruning criteria may be based on the distance.
i) For example, candidates with similar distance values may be treated as redundant candidates and
may be pruned for the candidate list construction.
ii) Alternatively, for example, pruning criteria may be based on a diversity check, wherein the diversity
may be related to motion vector difference, reference indexes, POC distance, QP, lambda, etc.
iii) For example, candidates who are close to each other may be clustered, so that sparse candidates
that have enough distance from each other may be retained in the candidate list.
(1) For example, the clustering process may be conducted based on discarding latter adjacent
candidates which is close to a first one. In such case, only the first one of a group of adjacent candidates is retained in the list.
(2) For example, the clustering process may be conducted based on an intermediate block who
locates in-between those candidates who are close to each other.
(3) For example, moreover, the sparse candidates may be used as guided motion vector to generate
subsequent chained motion vector candidates.
(a) For example, it may be used for an inter prediction mode (e.g., affine, regular inter, etc. ) .
d) For example, the distance may be defined based on a horizontal displacement and/or a vertical
displacement between the coordination of the current block and the coordination of the neighbor block which the candidate is derived from.
e) For example, the candidates may refer to motion candidates, mode candidates, or CCP/filter model
candidates, etc.
f) For example, the distance may refer to a distance between a spatial neighbor block (e.g., in the current
picture) and the current block (e.g., in the current picture) .
g) For example, the distance may refer to a distance between a temporal neighbor block (e.g., in a reference
picture) and a temporal collocated block (e.g., in a reference picture) which is collocated to the current block.
14) A pair of bi-directional motion vector predictor candidates (i.e., one from L0, the other from L1) may be
determined based on a decoder derived method (e.g., bilateral cost based, template cost based, etc. ) .
a) For example, which motion vector predictors (e.g., motion vector predictor index) are used for L0 and
L1 may be determined based on bilateral cost (or template cost) .
i) For example, assume there are M motion vector predictors from L0, N motion vector predictors
from L1, then one optimum motion vector predictor pair {mvp-L0, mvp-L1} among the MxN possible motion vector predictor pairs may be selected for the bi-directional AMVP prediction, based on the pair which has the minimum bilateral cost (or template cost) .
(1) For example, in such case, there is no need to signal the motion vector predictor indexes in the
bitstream.
ii) For example, the claimed method may be by default used for a bi-directional AMVP coded block.
(1) For example, for example, on the other hand, a motion vector predictor index may be signalled
for a uni-directional AMVP coded block.
b) For example, which reference indexes are used for L0 and L1 may be determined based on bilateral cost
(or template cost) .
i) For example, assume there are M reference pictures from L0, N reference pictures from L1, then
one optimum reference picture pair {refIdx-L0, refIdx-L1} among the MxN possible reference picture pairs may be selected for the bi-directional AMVP prediction, based on the pair which has the minimum bilateral cost (or template cost) .
(1) For example, in such case, there is no need to signal the reference picture indexes in the
bitstream.
c) For example, the bi-directional motion vector predictor candidates may be refined based on a decoder
derived method.
i) For example, bilateral matching based method may be used to refine one or two of the bi-directional
motion vector predictors.
(1) For example, it may refine L0 or L1 only.
(2) Alternatively, it may refine both L0 and L1 motion vector predictors.
ii) For example, template matching based method may be used to refine one or two of the bi-directional
motion vector predictors.
iii) For example, whether to use bilateral matching or template matching to refine the bi-directional
motion vector predictors may be determined based on the POC distance.
(1) For example, template matching may be applied when the POC distance between L0 reference
and the current picture is NOT equal to the POC distance between L1 reference and the current picture.
(2) For example, bilateral matching may be applied when the POC distance between L0 reference
and the current picture is equal to the POC distance between L1 reference and the current picture.
iv) For example, moreover, bilateral matching may be applied when the POC distance between L0
reference and the current picture is NOT equal to the POC distance between L1 reference and the current picture.
(1) For example, when amvp-merge mode is used, bilateral matching may be applied to refine the
L0 and L1 motion vector pair.
v) For example, whether to refine both sides/directions or just one side/direction of the bi-directional
motion vector predictors may be determined based on BCW weights or POC distance or template cost.
(1) For example, the direction which has larger (or smaller) BCW weight may be refined.
(2) For example, the direction which has shorter (or longer) POC distance may be refined.
(3) For example, the direction which has smaller (or larger) template cost may be refined.
d) For example, the motion vector refinement may be applied before the motion vector reordering/sorting.
i) For example, all motion vector candidates may be refined first, then the motion vector reordering
may be applied based on the refined motion vector candidates.
e) Alternatively, the motion vector refinement may be applied after the motion vector reordering/sorting.
i) For example, the motion vector reordering may be applied first, then X (such as X=1) candidates
are selected, thereafter the motion vector refinement is applied for the selected candidates only.
f) For example, the claimed method may be used for an AMVP coded block (e.g., regular CU based
AMVP, affine based AMVP, SMVD, etc. ) .
i) Alternatively, for example, the claimed method may be used for SMVD mode only.
g) For example, the claimed method may be signalled at block level.
h) For example, the claimed method may be by default applied without explicit signalling.
i) For example, the claimed method may be allowed to be applied in case that the L0 reference is coded
prior to the current picture, and the L1 reference is coded after the current picture.
j) For example, the claimed method may be allowed to be applied in case that the POC distance between
L0 reference and the current picture is equal to the POC distance between L1 reference and the current picture.
k) For example, the claimed method may be allowed to be applied in case that the POC distance between
L0 reference and the current picture is NOT equal to the POC distance between L1 reference and the current picture.
i) Moreover, for example, SMVD may be allowed in case that the POC distance between L0 reference
and the current picture is NOT equal to the POC distance between L1 reference and the current picture.
l) For example, the claimed method may be allowed to be applied in case that BCW is used to the current
block.
i) Moreover, for example, SMVD may be allowed in case that BCW is used.
m) For example, the claimed method may be allowed to be applied in case that LIC is used to the current
block.
15) A spatial/temporal non-adjacent candidate (e.g., for affine, regular inter, intra, IBC, CCP, merge, amvp, etc. )
may be fetched from one or more of the positions in Fig. 59A and Fig. 59B, in which the distance between the non-adjacent position and the current block (or collocated block regarding a temporal candidate) may be defined based on the block width and/or height of the current block.
a) For example, the candidate may refer to a spatial adjacent or non-adjacent candidate of the current block
in the current picture.
b) For example, the candidate may refer to a temporal adjacent or non-adjacent candidate of the temporal
collocated block in a reference picture.
i) For example, the reference picture could be an available reference picture in the RPL.
ii) For example, the motion vector of the reference block (e.g., illustrated in Fig. 59A and Fig. 59B)
may be scaled to a certain reference index.
(1) For example, the certain reference index may be determined by the target reference picture of
an AMVP based coding method.
(2) For example, the certain reference index may be a reference picture with reference index equal
to 0.
(3) For example, the certain reference index may be a reference picture closest to the current picture.
(4) For example, the certain reference index may be a reference picture farthest to the current
picture.
(5) For example, the certain reference index may be determined based on a reference picture whose
POC distance {current picture, reference picture} is similar to the POC distance {collocated reference frame, collocated picture} .
(6) For example, the certain reference index may be an arbitrary reference picture in the RPL.
c) For example, the following coding method may be implemented based on the candidate:
i) affine amvp,
ii) regular inter amvp,
iii) sbtmvp based amvp,
iv) affine merge,
v) BM affine merge,
vi) regular inter merge, CIIP, GPM, etc.,
vii) BM merge,
viii) TM merge,
ix) IBC merge,
x) IBC amvp,
xi) intraTMP (e.g., merge list) ,
xii) intra/inter CCP merge,
xiii) OBIC, EIP, SGPM, DIMD merge, TIMD merge, etc.
d) For example, a separate non-adjacent candidate sub-group list may be constructed, and at least one
candidate from the sub-group list may be merged to the final candidate list for a block coding.
i) For example, an index of the final candidate list may be signalled in the bitstream.
ii) For example, a candidate in the final candidate list may be selected based on a decoder derive
method (i.e., without signaling an index) and used for the current block coding.
iii) For example, the non-adjacent candidates in the sub-group list may be reordered and the ones with
lower template costs may be further merged to the final candidate list.
(1) For example, how many non-adjacent candidates can be merged into the final list may be pre-
defined.
iv) The size of the sub-group list and the size of the final list may be different.
e) For example, the non-adjacent candidate may be refined based on a decoder derived method (e.g, ,
template matching based, bilateral matching based, etc. ) .
f) For example, the non-adjacent candidate may be refined based on a encoder selected method, and the
output delta/difference may be signalled in the bitstream. Fig. 59A and Fig. 59B illustrate another example of possible positions of adjacent and non-adjacent neighboring blocks relative to the current or collocated block, respectively. In Figs. 59A and 59B, the center block denoted with “C” represents the current block in the current picture or collocated block in the reference picture.
General aspects
16) The disclosed method may be used for a video unit coded with at least one of the following methods:
a) An intra coded method
i) For example, EIP, EIP merge, intraTMP, DBV, DIMD, DIMD merge, OBIC, TIMD, PDP, intra
merge mode, MRL, TMRL, EMRL, intra luma fusion, intra chroma fusion, SGPM, IBC, fractional BV, bi-IBC, PDPC, etc.
ii) For example, a variant mode of the above method.
b) A CCLM/CCCM/CCP/LM/CCRM based method
i) For example, LM, CCLM, MMLM, CCCM, GLM, NS-CCCM, MDF-CCCM, GL-CCCM, BVG-
CCCM, inter CCCM, CCRM, LBCCP, inter CCP merge mode, intra CCP merge mode, a CCP fusion mode, etc.
ii) For example, a variant mode of the above method.
c) An inter coded method
i) For example, an inter merge mode.
ii) For example, an inter AMVP mode.
iii) For example, AMVP-merge, Affine, sbTMVP, subblock merge, pixel affine, affine DMVR,
ADMVR, DMVR, BDOF, GPM-MMVD, GPM-TM, GPM, GPM inter-intra, CIIP-PDPC, CIIP-TM, CIIP-TIMD, CIIP, CIIP with subblock based motion compensation, MMVD, affine MMVD, MHP, OBMC, TM-OBMC, LIC, bi-LIC, etc.
iv) For example, a variant mode of the above method.
d) An IBC coded method
i) For example, an IBC merge mode.
ii) For example, an IBC AMVP mode.
iii) For example, RR-IBC, IBC-CIIP, IBC-GPM, IBC-LIC, IBC-MBVD, filtered IBC, IBC-TM, etc.
iv) For example, a variant mode of the above method.
e) Palette mode
i) For example, a variant mode of Palette mode.
f) A fusion/blending based method
i) For example, an intra and inter blended method.
(1) For example, CIIP-intra-inter, CIIP-PDPC-InterMerge, CIIP-TIMD-TMmerge, CIIP-intra-
affine/sbtmvp, GPM-intra-inter, etc.
ii) For example, an intra and intra blended method.
(1) For example, intraTMP fusion, DIMD fusion, TIMD fusion, intra luma fusion, intra chroma
fusion, SGPM intra-intra, etc.
iii) For example, an inter and inter blended method.
(1) For example, bi-predictive inter, BCW, GPM-inter-inter, MHP, etc.
iv) For example, a CCP and intra/inter/IBC blended method.
(1) For example, inter CCCM which blends inter and CCP.
(2) For example, inter CCCM merge which blends inter and CCP.
(3) For example, intra CCCM fusion which blends intra and CCP.
(4) For example, intra chroma fusion which blends intra and CCP.
v) For example, a CCP and CCP blended method.
(1) For example, intra CCCM fusion which blends one CCP and another CCP.
vi) For example, an intra and IBC blended method.
(1) For example, CIIP-intra-IBC, GPM-intra-IBC, SGPM intra-IBC, etc.
vii) For example, an inter and IBC blended method.
(1) For example, CIIP-IBC-inter, GPM-IBC-inter, etc.
viii) For example, an IBC and IBC blended method.
(1) For example, bi-IBC, GPM-IBC-IBC, etc.
ix) For example, a variant mode of the above method.
17) The disclosed method may be used for single tree coding.
18) The disclosed method may be used for dual tree coding.
19) The disclosed method may be used for chroma coding.
20) The disclosed method may be used for luma coding.
21) The disclosed method may be used for inter block coding.
22) The disclosed method may be used for intra block coding.
23) The disclosed method may be used for IBC/intraTMP/DBV block coding.
24) The disclosed method may be used in a intra (such as I) slice.
25) The disclosed method may be used in a inter (such as B or P or low-delay B) slice.
26) Whether to and/or how to apply the disclosed methods above may be signalled at sequence level/group of
pictures level/picture level/slice level/tile group level, such as in sequence header/picture header/SPS/VPS/DPS/DCI/PPS/APS/slice header/tile group header.
27) Whether to and/or how to apply the disclosed methods above may be signalled at
PB/TB/CB/PU/TU/CU/VPDU/CTU/CTU row/slice/tile/sub-picture/other kinds of region contain more than one sample or pixel.
28) Whether to and/or how to apply the disclosed methods above may be dependent on coded information, such
as block size, colour format, single/dual tree partitioning, colour component, slice/picture type.
More details of the embodiments of the present disclosure will be described below which are related to temporal and spatial candidates. The embodiments of the present disclosure should be considered as examples to explain the general concepts and should not be interpreted in a narrow way. Furthermore, these embodiments can be applied individually or combined in any manner.
As used herein, the term “block” may represent a coding tree block (CTB) , a coding tree unit (CTU) , a coding block (CB) , a coding unit (CU) , a prediction unit (PU) , a transform unit (TU) , a prediction block (PB) , a transform block (TB) , a subblock, a tile, a slice, a subpicture, a video processing unit comprising multiple samples/pixels, and/or the like. A block may be rectangular or non-rectangular. Moreover, an adjacent spatial candidate may also be referred to as a spatial adjacent candidate, a non-adjacent spatial candidate may also be referred to as a spatial non-adjacent candidate, an adjacent temporal candidate may also be referred to as a temporal adjacent candidate, and a non-adjacent temporal candidate may also be referred to as a temporal non-adjacent candidate.
Moreover, the term “chained motion vector” may refer to a motion vector or a block vector that is determined based on a guiding motion vector or a guiding block vector. In a case where the chained motion vector is a block vector, the chained motion vector may also be referred to as a chained block vector. In one example embodiment, a motion vector or a block vector for a block that is pointed by the guiding motion vector (or the guiding block vector) may be determined to be the chained motion vector. In another example embodiment, a vector sum of the guiding motion vector (or the guiding block vector) and the motion vector or the block vector for the block that is pointed by the guiding motion vector (or the guiding block vector) may be determined to be the chained motion vector. In a further example embodiment, such a tracing process may be iterated for several rounds so as to obtain a chained motion vector. By way of example, in order to determine the at least one chained motion vector of the current block, the motion vector (or block vector) of the current block may be set as a guiding motion vector, and the following tracing process is performed iteratively: determining a chained motion vector of the current block based on the guiding motion vector and at least one motion vector (or block vector) of a reference block pointed by the guiding motion vector; and setting the determined chained motion vector as the guiding motion vector. That is, in the initial iteration, the initial motion information of the current block is used as a guiding motion vector, and in the following iterations, the chained motion vector from the previous iteration is used as the guiding motion vector. In some example embodiments, the tracing process may be terminated when a terminating condition is met. By way of example rather than limitation, the terminating condition may be that a predetermined number of iterations have been performed. An example for chained block vectors is shown in Fig. 46. It should be understood that the possible implementations of the chained motion vector described here are merely illustrative and therefore should not be construed as limiting the present disclosure in any way.
Fig. 60 illustrates a flowchart of a method 6000 for video processing in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure. The method 6000 may be implemented during a conversion between a current block of a current picture of a video and a bitstream of the video. As shown in Fig. 60, the method 6000 starts at 6002 where a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for the current block are determined, and the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates are not indicated in the bitstream. For example, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may be derived at an encoder and/or a decoder without being signaled in the bitstream. By way of example, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may be determined based on a decoder derived scheme, such as a template cost based scheme or a bilateral cost based scheme.
At 6004, the conversion is performed based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates. In some embodiments, the conversion may include encoding the current block into the bitstream. Alternatively or additionally, the conversion may include decoding the current block from the bitstream. It should be understood that the above illustrations and/or examples are described merely for purpose of description. The scope of the present disclosure is not limited in this respect.
In view of the above, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates for the current block are determined without being indicated in the bitstream. Compared with the conventional solution, the proposed method can advantageously save the bits for signaling such a pair of bi-directional MVP candidates, and thus the coding efficiency can be improved.
In some embodiments, a first MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may be determined based on a first reference picture list (RPL) for the current block, and a second MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may be determined based on a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL. In one example embodiment, the first RPL may be RPL0, and the second RPL may be RPL1. Alternatively, the first RPL may be RPL1, and the second RPL may be RPL0. It should be understood that the above examples are described merely for purpose of description. The scope of the present disclosure is not limited in this respect.
In some embodiments, the first MVP candidate and the second MVP candidate may be determined based on a cost metric, such as a bilateral cost, a template cost, or the like. In one example embodiment, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may be one of all possible combinations of MVP candidates based on the first RPL and MVP candidates based on the second RPL that has a minimum value of the cost metric. For example, assume that there are M MVP candidates from RPL0, and N MVP candidates from RPL1, where M and N are integers. In this case, one MVP candidate pair {mvp-L0, mvp-L1} among the M×N possible MVP candidate pairs may be selected for the bi-directional AMVP prediction, based on the pair which has the minimum bilateral cost (or template cost) . In this case, indexes of the first and second MVP candidates among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may be not indicated in the bitstream, so as to save the bits for signaling such a pair of MVP candidates.
In some embodiments, the method may be by default used for a bi-directional advanced motion vector prediction (AMVP) coding mode. In addition, an MVP index may be indicated in the bitstream for a uni-directional AMVP coded block.
In some embodiments, a first reference picture used for a first RPL for the current block and a second reference picture used for a second RPL for the current block may be determined based on a cost metric, such as a bilateral cost, a template cost, or the like. In one example embodiment, a pair of the first reference picture and the second reference picture may be one of all possible combinations of reference pictures from the first RPL and reference pictures from the second RPL that has a minimum value of the cost metric. For example, assume there are M reference pictures from RPL0, and N reference pictures from RPL1, where M and N are integers. In this case, one reference picture pair {refIdx-L0, refIdx-L1} among the M×N possible reference picture pairs may be selected for the bi-directional AMVP prediction, based on the pair which has the minimum bilateral cost (or template cost) . In this case, an index of the first reference picture and an index of the second reference picture may be not indicated in the bitstream, so as to save the bits for signaling such a pair of reference pictures.
In some embodiments, at least one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may be refined based on a decoder derived scheme, such as a bilateral matching based scheme, a template matching based scheme or the like. In one example embodiment, the at least one MVP candidate may only comprise a first MVP candidate based on a first RPL for the current block. In another example embodiment, the at least one MVP candidate may only comprise a second MVP candidate based on a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL. In a further example embodiment, the at least one MVP candidate may comprise both the first MVP candidate and the second MVP candidate.
In some embodiments, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may comprise a first MVP candidate based on a first reference picture from a first RPL for the current block and a second MVP candidate based on a second reference picture from a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL. Information regarding whether to apply the bilateral matching based scheme or the template matching based scheme to refine the at least one MVP candidate may be determined based on at least one of the following: a first picture order count (POC) distance between the current picture and the first reference picture or a second POC distance between the current picture and the second reference picture. For example, if the first POC distance is not equal to the second POC distance, the template matching based scheme may be applied to refine the at least one MVP candidate. If the first POC distance is equal to the second POC distance, the bilateral matching based scheme may be applied to refine the at least one MVP candidate.
In some alternative embodiments, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may comprise a first MVP candidate based on a first reference picture from a first RPL for the current block and a second MVP candidate based on a second reference picture from a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL, and if a POC distance between the current picture and the first reference picture is not equal to a POC distance between the current picture and the second reference picture, a bilateral matching may be applied to the current block. In some embodiments, if an AMVP-merge mode is applied to the current block, bilateral matching may be applied to refine a pair of bi-directional motion vector (MV) candidates for the current block.
In some embodiments, whether to refine both of the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates or only one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates may be determined based on at least one of the following: bi-prediction with CU-level weight (BCW) weights associated with the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates, POC distances associated with the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates, or template costs associated with the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates.
In one example embodiment, one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a larger BCW weight may be refined. Alternatively, one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a smaller BCW weight may be refined. In another example embodiment, one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a shorter POC distance may be refined. Alternatively, one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a longer POC distance may be refined. In a further example embodiment, one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a smaller template cost may be refined. Alternatively, one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a larger template cost may be refined.
In some embodiments, motion vector refinement may be applied before motion vector reordering. For example, at least one MV candidate for the current block may be refined, and the motion vector reordering may be applied based on the refined at least one MV candidate. In some alternative embodiments, motion vector refinement may be applied after motion vector reordering. For example, a set of MV candidates for the current block may be reordered, and at least one MV candidate may be selected from the reordered set of MV candidates, and the selected at least one MV candidate may be refined.
In some embodiments, the proposed method may be applied for an AMVP-based mode. By way of example, the AMVP-based mode may comprise a coding unit (CU) based AMVP mode, an affine-based AMVP mode, a symmetric motion vector difference (SMVD) mode, and/or the like. In some alternative embodiments, the method may be only applied for an SMVD mode.
In some embodiments, information regarding whether the proposed method is applied may be signaled at a block level. For example, such information may be signaled for each video block. In some alternative embodiments, the proposed method may be applied by default without explicit signaling.
In some embodiments, if a reference picture from a first RPL for the current block precedes the current picture in a display order and a reference picture from a second RPL for the current block follows the current picture in the display order, the proposed method may be allowed to be applied. In some embodiments, if a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a first RPL for the current block is equal to a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a second RPL for the current block, the proposed method may be allowed to be applied.
In some additional or alternative embodiments, if a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a first RPL for the current block is not equal to a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a second RPL for the current block, the proposed method may be allowed to be applied. In some embodiments, if a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a first RPL for the current block is not equal to a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a second RPL for the current block, an SMVD mode may be allowed to be applied.
In some embodiments, if a BCW mode is applied to the current block, the proposed method may be allowed to be applied to the current block. In some embodiments, if a BCW mode is applied to the current block, an SMVD mode may be allowed to be applied to the current block. In some embodiments, if a local illumination compensation (LIC) mode is applied to the current block, the proposed method may be allowed to be applied to the current block.
In view of the above, the solutions in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure can advantageously improve coding efficiency and coding quality.
According to further embodiments of the present disclosure, a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium is provided. The non-transitory computer-readable recording medium stores a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing. The method comprises: determining a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for a current block of a current picture of the video, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream; and generating the bitstream based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates.
According to still further embodiments of the present disclosure, a method for storing bitstream of a video is provided. The method comprises: determining a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for a current block of a current picture of the video, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream; generating the bitstream based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates; and storing the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
Fig. 61 illustrates a flowchart of another method 6100 for video processing in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure. The method 6100 may be implemented during a conversion between a current block of a video and a bitstream of the video. As shown in Fig. 61, the method 6100 starts at 6102 where an AMVP motion vector candidate for the current block is obtained. By way of example rather than limitation, the AMVP motion vector candidate may be derived based on a spatial neighboring block for the current block or a temporal neighboring block for the current block.
At 6104, the AMVP motion vector candidate is refined based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate. For example, the target cost metric may comprise a sum of absolute difference (SAD) , a sum of absolute transformed difference (SATD) , a weighted SAD, a sum of squares for error (SSE) , mean squared error (MSE) , or the like. It should be understood that the possible implementations of the target cost metric described here are merely illustrative and therefore should not be construed as limiting the present disclosure in any way.
In some embodiments, the first set of samples associated with the current block may correspond to a template of the current block, and the second set of samples associated with the reference block may correspond to a template of the reference block. In this case, the target cost metric indicates a difference between the template of the current block and the template of the reference block. At the encoder side, the first set of samples associated with the current block may comprise one or more samples of the current block, and the second set of samples associated with the reference block may comprise one or more samples of the reference block. It should be understood that the above examples are described merely for purpose of description. The scope of the present disclosure is not limited in this respect.
At 6106, the conversion is performed based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate. In some embodiments, the conversion may include encoding the current block into the bitstream. Alternatively or additionally, the conversion may include decoding the current block from the bitstream. It should be understood that the above illustrations and/or examples are described merely for purpose of description. The scope of the present disclosure is not limited in this respect.
In view of the above, the AMVP motion vector candidate is refined based on a cost metric. Compared with the conventional solution, the proposed method can advantageously improve a quality of the AMVP motion vector candidate that is finally used for coding the current block, and thus the coding quality can be improved.
In some embodiments, the target cost metric that is used may be dependent on an index of the AMVP motion vector candidate, a prediction scheme for the current block, and/or the like. In one example embodiment, the AMVP motion vector candidate may be an affine AMVP motion vector candidate. In this case, whether the target cost metric is SAD or SATD may be dependent on an index of the affine AMVP motion vector candidate in an AMVP list for the current block. Alternatively, whether the target cost metric is SAD or weighted SAD may be dependent on an index of the affine AMVP motion vector candidate in an AMVP list for the current block.
In another example embodiment, the AMVP motion vector candidate may be an inter AMVP motion vector candidate. In this case, whether the target cost metric is SAD or SATD may be dependent on an index of the inter AMVP motion vector candidate in an AMVP list for the current block. Alternatively, whether the target cost metric is SAD or weighted SAD may be dependent on an index of the inter AMVP motion vector candidate in an AMVP list for the current block.
In some embodiments, the target cost metric may be determined based on a parity of an index of the AMVP motion vector candidate. For example, if the index is an even number, a first candidate cost metric may be selected as the target cost metric, and if the index is an odd number, a second candidate cost metric may be selected as the target cost metric. Alternatively, if the index is an even number, the second candidate cost metric may be selected as the target cost metric, and if the index is an odd number, the first candidate cost metric may be selected as the target cost metric.
In view of the above, the solutions in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure can advantageously improve coding efficiency and coding quality.
According to further embodiments of the present disclosure, a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium is provided. The non-transitory computer-readable recording medium stores a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing. The method comprises: obtaining an AMVP motion vector candidate for a current block of the video; refining the AMVP motion vector candidate based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate; and generating the bitstream based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate.
According to still further embodiments of the present disclosure, a method for storing bitstream of a video is provided. The method comprises: obtaining an AMVP motion vector candidate for a current block of the video; refining the AMVP motion vector candidate based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate; generating the bitstream based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate; and storing the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
Fig. 62 illustrates a flowchart of another method 6200 for video processing in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure. The method 6200 may be implemented during a conversion between a current block of a video and a bitstream of the video. As shown in Fig. 62, the method 6200 starts at 6202 where a set of candidates for the current block is obtained. For example, a candidate may comprise a motion candidate, a mode candidate, a cross-component prediction (CCP) model candidate, a filter model candidate, and/or the like. By way of example rather than limitation, the set of candidates may be derived based on at least one spatial neighboring block for the current block and/or at least one temporal neighboring block for the current block.
At 6204, a reordering process or a pruning process is applied on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates. A distance metric for a candidate indicates a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined. In one example embodiment, the distance indicated by the distance metric may be a displacement between the current block and the first block. In another example embodiment, the distance indicated by the distance metric may be determined based on a horizontal displacement between the current block and the first block and/or a vertical displacement between the current block and the first block.
In some embodiments, if the first block and the current block are located in a same picture, the distance indicated by the distance metric measures a distance between the current block and the first block. If the first block and the current block are located in different pictures, the distance indicated by the distance metric measures a distance between the first block and a collocated block of the current block in a picture comprising the first block. It should be understood that the above illustrations and/or examples are described merely for purpose of description. The scope of the present disclosure is not limited in this respect.
At 6206, the conversion is performed based on the applying. In some embodiments, the conversion may include encoding the current block into the bitstream. Alternatively or additionally, the conversion may include decoding the current block from the bitstream. It should be understood that the above illustrations and/or examples are described merely for purpose of description. The scope of the present disclosure is not limited in this respect.
In view of the above, the set of candidate is reordered or pruned based on a distance metric. Compared with the conventional solution, the proposed method can advantageously improve a quality of the candidate that is finally used for coding the current block, and thus the coding quality can be improved.
In some embodiments, a penalty factor may be applied to a value of a cost metric (such as a template cost, a bilateral cost or the like) for a candidate among the set of candidates. For example, the value of the cost metric for the candidate may be multiplied by the penalty factor. Alternatively, the penalty factor may be added to the value of the cost metric for the candidate. It should be understood that the above examples are described merely for purpose of description. The scope of the present disclosure is not limited in this respect.
In one example embodiment, the penalty factor may be determined based on a value of the distance metric for the candidate. By way of example, the penalty factor may be positively correlated with the value of the distance metric for the candidate. Alternatively, the penalty factor may also be negatively correlated with the value of the distance metric for the candidate.
In some embodiments, the penalty factor may be determined based on a type of the candidate. For example, a penalty factor for a candidate of one of at least one predetermined type may be larger than a penalty factor for a candidate of a type different from the at least one predetermined type. By way of example rather than limitation, the at least one predetermined type comprise a temporal candidate, a chained motion vector based candidate, and/or the like.
In some embodiments, in the reordering process, a candidate with a larger value of the distance metric may be put after a candidate with a smaller value of the distance metric. Alternatively, a candidate with a larger value of the distance metric may be put before a candidate with a smaller value of the distance metric.
In some embodiments, a pruning criterion of the pruning process may be based on the value of the distance metric. For example, a plurality of candidates with similar values of the distance metric may be determined to be redundant candidates, and the plurality of candidates may be pruned.
In some embodiments, a pruning criterion of the pruning process may be based on diversity check related to at least one of the following: a motion vector difference, a reference picture index, a POC distance, a quantization parameter, or a parameter for determining a rate-distortion cost.
In some embodiments, a plurality of candidates among the set of candidates close to each other may be clustered to obtain a set of sparse candidates. In one example embodiment, the clustering may be performed based on discarding one or more subsequent candidate close to the first candidate among a set of adjacent candidates. In another example embodiment, the clustering may be performed based on an intermediate block that locates in-between blocks corresponding to the plurality of candidates.
In some embodiments, one or more chained motion vector candidates may be generated by using one of the set of sparse candidates as a guiding motion vector. For example, this method may be used for an inter prediction mode, such as an affine mode, a regular inter mode, or the like.
In view of the above, the solutions in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure can advantageously improve coding efficiency and coding quality.
According to further embodiments of the present disclosure, a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium is provided. The non-transitory computer-readable recording medium stores a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing. The method comprises: obtaining a set of candidates for a current block of the video; applying a reordering process or a pruning process on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates, a distance metric for a candidate indicating a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined; and generating the bitstream based on the applying.
According to still further embodiments of the present disclosure, a method for storing bitstream of a video is provided. The method comprises: obtaining a set of candidates for a current block of the video; applying a reordering process or a pruning process on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates, a distance metric for a candidate indicating a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined; generating the bitstream based on the applying; and storing the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
In some embodiments, any of the above-described methods may be allowed to be applied to a block coded with an intra mode, a cross-component based mode, an inter mode, an intra block copy (IBC) based mode, a palette mode, or a blending-based mode, and/or the like.
By way of example rather than limitation, the intra mode may comprise at least one of the following: an extrapolation filter-based intra prediction (EIP) mode, an EIP merge mode, an intra template matching prediction (IntraTMP) mode, a direct block vector (DBV) mode, a decoder side intra mode derivation (DIMD) mode, a DIMD merge mode, an occurrence based intra coding (OBIC) mode, a template-based intra mode derivation (TIMD) mode, a matrix-based position dependent intra prediction (PDP) mode, an intra merge mode, a multiple reference line (MRL) mode, a template-based multiple reference line (TMRL) mode, an extended multiple reference line (EMRL) mode, an intra luma fusion mode, an intra chroma fusion mode, a spatial geometric partitioning mode (SGPM) , an intra block copy (IBC) , a fractional block vector (BV) , a bidirectional IBC (bi-IBC) mode, or a position dependent intra prediction combination (PDPC) mode.
By way of example rather than limitation, the cross-component based mode may comprise at least one of the following: a linear model (LM) mode, a cross-component prediction (CCP) mode, a cross-component linear model (CCLM) mode, a multi-model linear model (MMLM) mode, a convolutional cross-component model (CCCM) mode, a gradient linear model (GLM) mode, a non-downsampled convolutional cross-component model (NS-CCCM) , a multiple downsample filter based convolutional cross-component model (MDF-CCCM) mode, a gradient and location based convolutional cross-component model (GL-CCCM) , a block-vector guided convolutional cross-component model (BVG-CCCM) , a convolutional cross-component model for inter block (inter CCCM) mode, a cross-component residual model (CCRM) mode, a local boosting cross-component prediction (LBCCP) mode, an inter CCP merge mode, an intra CCP merge mode, or a CCP fusion mode.
By way of example rather than limitation, the inter mode may comprise at least one of the following: an inter merge mode, an inter advanced motion vector prediction (AMVP) mode, an AMVP-merge mode, an affine mode, a subblock-based temporal motion vector prediction (SbTMVP) mode, a subblock merge mode, a pixel affine mode, a decoder side motion vector refinement (DMVR) , a bi-directional optical flow (BDOF) mode, a geometric partitioning mode (GPM) mode, a GPM with merge mode with motion vector difference (GPM-MMVD) mode, a GPM with template matching (GPM-TM) mode, a GPM inter-intra mode, a combined inter and intra prediction (CIIP) mode, a CIIP-PDPC mode, a CIIP-TM mode, a CIIP-TIMD mode, a CIIP with subblock based motion compensation mode, a MMVD mode, an affine MMVD mode, a multi-hypothesis prediction (MHP) , an overlap subblock based motion compensation (OBMC) , a TM-OBMC, a local illumination compensation (LIC) , or a bidirectional LIC (bi-LIC mode) .
By way of example rather than limitation, the IBC-based mode may comprise at least one of the following: an IBC merge mode, an IBC AMVP mode, a reconstruction-reordered IBC (RR-IBC) mode, an IBC merge mode with block vector differences (IBC-MBVD) mode, a combined intra block copy and intra prediction (IBC-CIIP) mode, an IBC with geometric partitioning mode (IBC-GPM) mode, an IBC with local illumination compensation (IBC-LIC) mode, a filter IBC mode, or an IBC with template matching (IBC-TM) mode.
By way of example rather than limitation, the blending-based mode may comprise at least one of the following: an intra and inter blending mode, an intra and intra blending mode, an inter and inter blending mode, a CCP and intra blending mode, a CCP and inter blending mode, a CCP and IBC blending mode, a CCP and CCP blending mode, an intra and IBC blending mode, an inter and IBC blending mode, or an IBC and IBC blending mode.
By way of example rather than limitation, the intra and inter blending mode may comprise at least one of the following: a CIIP-intra-inter mode, a CIIP-PDPC-InterMerge mode, a CIIP-TIMD-TMmerge mode, a CIIP-intra-affine mode, a CIIP-intra-SbTMVP mode, or a GPM-intra-inter mode.
By way of example rather than limitation, the intra and intra blending mode may comprise at least one of the following: an intraTMP fusion mode, a DIMD fusion mode, a TIMD fusion mode, an intra luma fusion mode, an intra chroma fusion mode, or an SGPM intra-intra mode.
By way of example rather than limitation, the inter and inter blending mode may comprise at least one of the following: a bi-predictive inter mode, a BCW mode, a GPM-inter-inter mode, or an MHP mode.
By way of example rather than limitation, the CCP and intra blending mode may comprise at least one of the following: an intra CCCM fusion mode blending an intra prediction and a CCP prediction, or an intra chroma fusion blending an intra prediction and a CCP prediction.
By way of example rather than limitation, the CCP and inter blending mode may comprise at least one of the following: an inter CCCM blending an inter prediction and a CCP prediction, or an inter CCCM merge blending an inter prediction and a CCP prediction.
By way of example rather than limitation, the CCP and CCP blending mode may comprise an intra CCCM fusion blending more than one CCP prediction.
By way of example rather than limitation, the intra and IBC blending mode may comprise at least one of the following: a CIIP-intra-IBC mode, a GPM-intra-IBC mode, an SGPM intra-IBC mode.
By way of example rather than limitation, the inter and IBC blending mode may comprise at least one of the following: a CIIP-IBC-inter mode or a GPM-IBC-inter mode.
By way of example rather than limitation, the IBC and IBC blending mode may comprise at least one of the following: a bi-IBC mode, or a GPM-IBC-IBC mode.
In some embodiments, any of the above-described methods may be applied for a single tree coding, a dual tree coding, a chroma coding, a luma coding, an inter block coding, an intra block coding, an IBC coding, an intraTMP coding, or a DBV block coding, an intra slice, an inter slice, and/or the like.
In some embodiments, whether to and/or how to apply any of the above-described methods may be indicated at one of the following: a sequence level, a group of pictures level, a picture level, a slice level, or a tile group level. Additionally or alternatively, whether to and/or how to apply any of the above-described methods may be indicated in one of the following: a sequence header, a picture header, a sequence parameter set (SPS) , a video parameter set (VPS) , a decoding parameter set (DPS) , a decoding capability information (DCI) , a picture parameter set (PPS) , an adaptation parameter sets (APS) , a slice header, or a tile group header.
In some embodiments, whether to and/or how to apply any of the above-described methods may be indicated at a region containing more than one sample or pixel. By way of example rather than limitation, the region may comprise a prediction block (PB) , a transform block (TB) , a coding block (CB) , a prediction unit (PU) , a transform unit (TU) , a coding unit (CU) , a virtual pipeline data unit (VPDU) , a coding tree unit (CTU) , a CTU row, a slice, a tile, a sub-picture, or the like.
In some embodiments, whether to and/or how to apply any of the above-described methods may be dependent on coded information. For example, the coded information may comprise a block size, a color format, a single tree partitioning, a dual tree partitioning, a color component, a slice type, or a picture type. It should be understood that the possible implementations of the coded information described here are merely illustrative and therefore should not be construed as limiting the present disclosure in any way.
Implementations of the present disclosure can be described in view of the following clauses, the features of which can be combined in any reasonable manner.
Clause 1. A method for video processing, comprising: determining, for a conversion between a current block of a current picture of a video and a bitstream of the video, a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for the current block, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream; and performing the conversion based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates.
Clause 2. The method of clause 1, wherein a first MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates is determined based on a first reference picture list (RPL) for the current block, and a second MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates is determined based on a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL.
Clause 3. The method of clause any of claims 1-2, wherein the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates is determined based on a decoder derived scheme.
Clause 4. The method of clause 3, wherein the decoder derived scheme comprises a template cost based scheme or a bilateral cost based scheme.
Clause 5. The method of any of clauses 2-4, wherein the first MVP candidate and the second MVP candidate are determined based on a cost metric.
Clause 6. The method of clause 5, wherein the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates is one of all possible combinations of MVP candidates based on the first RPL and MVP candidates based on the second RPL that has a minimum value of the cost metric.
Clause 7. The method of any of clauses 5-6, wherein indexes of the first and second MVP candidates among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates are not indicated in the bitstream.
Clause 8. The method of any of clauses 1-7, wherein the method is used for a bi-directional advanced motion vector prediction (AMVP) coding mode.
Clause 9. The method of any of clauses 1-8, wherein an MVP index is indicated in the bitstream for a uni-directional AMVP coded block.
Clause 10. The method of any of clauses 1-9, wherein a first reference picture used for a first RPL for the current block and a second reference picture used for a second RPL for the current block are determined based on a cost metric.
Clause 11. The method of clause 10, wherein a pair of the first reference picture and the second reference picture is one of all possible combinations of reference pictures from the first RPL and reference pictures from the second RPL that has a minimum value of the cost metric.
Clause 12. The method of any of clauses 10-11, wherein an index of the first reference picture and an index of the second reference picture are not indicated in the bitstream.
Clause 13. The method of any of clauses 5-12, wherein the cost metric comprises a bilateral cost or a template cost.
Clause 14. The method of any of clauses 1-14, wherein at least one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates are refined based on a decoder derived scheme.
Clause 15. The method of clause 14, wherein the at least one MVP candidate only comprises a first MVP candidate based on a first RPL for the current block, or the at least one MVP candidate only comprises a second MVP candidate based on a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL, or the at least one MVP candidate comprises both the first MVP candidate and the second MVP candidate.
Clause 16. The method of any of clauses 14-15, wherein the decoder derived scheme comprises a bilateral matching based scheme or a template matching based scheme.
Clause 17. The method of clause 16, wherein the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates comprises a first MVP candidate based on a first reference picture from a first RPL for the current block and a second MVP candidate based on a second reference picture from a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL, and whether to apply the bilateral matching based scheme or the template matching based scheme to refine the at least one MVP candidate is determined based on at least one of the following: a first picture order count (POC) distance between the current picture and the first reference picture or a second POC distance between the current picture and the second reference picture.
Clause 18. The method of clause 17, wherein in accordance with a determination that the first POC distance is not equal to the second POC distance, the template matching based scheme is applied to refine the at least one MVP candidate, or in accordance with a determination that the first POC distance is equal to the second POC distance, the bilateral matching based scheme is applied to refine the at least one MVP candidate.
Clause 19. The method of any of clauses 1-14, wherein the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates comprises a first MVP candidate based on a first reference picture from a first RPL for the current block and a second MVP candidate based on a second reference picture from a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL, and in accordance with a determination that a POC distance between the current picture and the first reference picture is not equal to a POC distance between the current picture and the second reference picture, a bilateral matching is applied to the current block.
Clause 20. The method of any of clauses 1-19, wherein in accordance with a determination that an AMVP-merge mode is applied to the current block, bilateral matching is applied to refine a pair of bi-directional motion vector (MV) candidates for the current block.
Clause 21. The method of any of clauses 1-20, wherein whether to refine both of the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates or only one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates is determined based on at least one of the following: bi-prediction with CU-level weight (BCW) weights associated with the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates, POC distances associated with the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates, or template costs associated with the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates.
Clause 22. The method of clause 21, wherein one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a larger BCW weight is refined, or one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a smaller BCW weight is refined, or one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a shorter POC distance is refined, or one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a longer POC distance is refined, or one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a smaller template cost is refined, or one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a larger template cost is refined.
Clause 23. The method of any of clauses 1-22, wherein motion vector refinement is applied before motion vector reordering.
Clause 24. The method of clause 23, wherein at least one MV candidate for the current block is refined, and the motion vector reordering is applied based on the refined at least one MV candidate.
Clause 25. The method of any of clauses 1-22, wherein motion vector refinement is applied after motion vector reordering.
Clause 26. The method of clause 25, wherein a set of MV candidates for the current block is reordered, and at least one MV candidate is selected from the reordered set of MV candidates, and the selected at least one MV candidate is refined.
Clause 27. The method of any of clauses 1-26, wherein the method is applied for an AMVP-based mode.
Clause 28. The method of clause 27, wherein the AMVP-based mode comprises at least one of the following: a coding unit (CU) based AMVP mode, an affine-based AMVP mode, or a symmetric motion vector difference (SMVD) mode.
Clause 29. The method of any of clauses 1-26, wherein the method is only applied for an SMVD mode.
Clause 30. The method of any of clauses 1-29, wherein information regarding whether the method is applied is signaled at a block level.
Clause 31. The method of any of clauses 1-29, wherein the method is applied by default without explicit signaling.
Clause 32. The method of any of clauses 1-31, wherein in accordance with a determination that a reference picture from a first RPL for the current block precedes the current picture in a display order and a reference picture from a second RPL for the current block follows the current picture in the display order, the method is allowed to be applied.
Clause 33. The method of any of clauses 1-32, wherein in accordance with a determination that a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a first RPL for the current block is equal to a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a second RPL for the current block, the method is allowed to be applied.
Clause 34. The method of any of clauses 1-33, wherein in accordance with a determination that a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a first RPL for the current block is not equal to a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a second RPL for the current block, the method is allowed to be applied.
Clause 35. The method of any of clauses 1-34, wherein in accordance with a determination that a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a first RPL for the current block is not equal to a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a second RPL for the current block, an SMVD mode is allowed to be applied.
Clause 36. The method of any of clauses 1-35, wherein in accordance with a determination that a BCW mode is applied to the current block, the method is allowed to be applied to the current block.
Clause 37. The method of any of clauses 1-36, wherein in accordance with a determination that a BCW mode is applied to the current block, an SMVD mode is allowed to be applied to the current block.
Clause 38. The method of any of clauses 1-37, wherein in accordance with a determination that a local illumination compensation (LIC) mode is applied to the current block, the method is allowed to be applied to the current block.
Clause 39. A method for video processing, comprising: obtaining, for a conversion between a current block of a video and a bitstream of the video, an AMVP motion vector candidate for the current block; refining the AMVP motion vector candidate based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate; and performing the conversion based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate.
Clause 40. The method of clause 39, wherein the target cost metric comprises at least one of the following: a sum of absolute difference (SAD) , a sum of absolute transformed difference (SATD) , or a weighted SAD.
Clause 41. The method of any of clauses 39-40, wherein the first set of samples associated with the current block corresponds to a template of the current block, and the second set of samples associated with the reference block corresponds to a template of the reference block.
Clause 42. The method of any of clauses 39-41, wherein the target cost metric is dependent on at least one of the following: an index of the AMVP motion vector candidate or a prediction scheme for the current block.
Clause 43. The method of any of clauses 39-41, wherein the AMVP motion vector candidate is an affine AMVP motion vector candidate, and whether the target cost metric is SAD or SATD is dependent on an index of the affine AMVP motion vector candidate in an AMVP list for the current block.
Clause 44. The method of any of clauses 39-41, wherein the AMVP motion vector candidate is an affine AMVP motion vector candidate, and whether the target cost metric is SAD or weighted SAD is dependent on an index of the affine AMVP motion vector candidate in an AMVP list for the current block.
Clause 45. The method of any of clauses 39-41, wherein the AMVP motion vector candidate is an inter AMVP motion vector candidate, and whether the target cost metric is SAD or SATD is dependent on an index of the inter AMVP motion vector candidate in an AMVP list for the current block.
Clause 46. The method of any of clauses 39-41, wherein the AMVP motion vector candidate is an inter AMVP motion vector candidate, and whether the target cost metric is SAD or weighted SAD is dependent on an index of the inter AMVP motion vector candidate in an AMVP list for the current block.
Clause 47. The method of any of clauses 39-46, wherein the target cost metric is determined based on a parity of an index of the AMVP motion vector candidate.
Clause 48. The method of clause 47, wherein in accordance with a determination that the index is an even number, a first candidate cost metric is selected as the target cost metric, and in accordance with a determination that the index is an odd number, a second candidate cost metric is selected as the target cost metric, or wherein in accordance with a determination that the index is an even number, the second candidate cost metric is selected as the target cost metric, and in accordance with a determination that the index is an odd number, the first candidate cost metric is selected as the target cost metric.
Clause 49. A method for video processing, comprising: obtaining, for a conversion between a current block of a video and a bitstream of the video, a set of candidates for the current block; applying a reordering process or a pruning process on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates, a distance metric for a candidate indicating a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined; and performing the conversion based on the applying.
Clause 50. The method of clause 49, wherein a candidate comprises at least one of the following: a motion candidate, a mode candidate, a cross-component prediction (CCP) model candidate, or a filter model candidate.
Clause 51. The method of any of clauses 49-50, wherein a penalty factor is applied to a value of a cost metric for a candidate among the set of candidates.
Clause 52. The method of clause 51, wherein the cost metric comprises a template cost or a bilateral cost.
Clause 53. The method of any of clauses 51-52, wherein the penalty factor is determined based on a value of the distance metric for the candidate.
Clause 54. The method of clause 53, wherein the penalty factor is positively correlated with the value of the distance metric for the candidate.
Clause 55. The method of any of clauses 51-54, wherein the value of the cost metric for the candidate is multiplied by the penalty factor.
Clause 56. The method of any of clauses 51-55, wherein the penalty factor is determined based on a type of the candidate.
Clause 57. The method of clause 56, wherein a penalty factor for a candidate of one of at least one predetermined type is larger than a penalty factor for a candidate of a type different from the at least one predetermined type.
Clause 58. The method of clause 57, wherein the at least one predetermined type comprise at least one of the following: a temporal candidate or a chained motion vector based candidate.
Clause 59. The method of any of clauses 49-48, wherein in the reordering process, a candidate with a larger value of the distance metric is put after a candidate with a smaller value of the distance metric.
Clause 60. The method of any of clauses 49-59, wherein the distance indicated by the distance metric is a displacement between the current block and the first block.
Clause 61. The method of any of clauses 49-60, wherein a pruning criterion of the pruning process is based on the value of the distance metric.
Clause 62. The method of clause 61, wherein a plurality of candidates with similar values of the distance metric are determined to be redundant candidates, and the plurality of candidates are pruned.
Clause 63. The method of any of clauses 49-60, wherein a pruning criterion of the pruning process is based on diversity check related to at least one of the following: a motion vector difference, a reference picture index, a POC distance, a quantization parameter, or a parameter for determining a rate-distortion cost.
Clause 64. The method of any of clauses 61-63, wherein a plurality of candidates among the set of candidates close to each other are clustered to obtain a set of sparse candidates.
Clause 65. The method of clause 64, wherein the clustering is performed based on discarding one or more subsequent candidate close to the first candidate among a set of adjacent candidates, or the clustering is performed based on an intermediate block that locates in-between blocks corresponding to the plurality of candidates.
Clause 66. The method of any of clauses 64-65, wherein one or more chained motion vector candidates are generated by using one of the set of sparse candidates as a guiding motion vector.
Clause 67. The method of clause 66, wherein the method is used for an inter prediction mode.
Clause 68. The method of any of clauses 49-67, wherein the distance indicated by the distance metric is determined based on at least one of the following: a horizontal displacement between the current block and the first block, or a vertical displacement between the current block and the first block.
Clause 69. The method of any of clauses 49-68, wherein in accordance with a determination that the first block and the current block are located in a same picture, the distance indicated by the distance metric measures a distance between the current block and the first block, or in accordance with a determination that the first block and the current block are located in different pictures, the distance indicated by the distance metric measures a distance between the first block and a collocated block of the current block in a picture comprising the first block.
Clause 70. The method of any of clauses 1-69, wherein the method is allowed to be applied to a block coded with at least one of the following: an intra mode, a cross-component based mode, an inter mode, an intra block copy (IBC) based mode, a palette mode, or a blending-based mode.
Clause 71. The method of clause 70, wherein the intra mode comprises at least one of the following: an extrapolation filter-based intra prediction (EIP) mode, an EIP merge mode, an intra template matching prediction (IntraTMP) mode, a direct block vector (DBV) mode, a decoder side intra mode derivation (DIMD) mode, a DIMD merge mode, an occurrence based intra coding (OBIC) mode, a template-based intra mode derivation (TIMD) mode, a matrix-based position dependent intra prediction (PDP) mode, an intra merge mode, a multiple reference line (MRL) mode, a template-based multiple reference line (TMRL) mode, an extended multiple reference line (EMRL) mode, an intra luma fusion mode, an intra chroma fusion mode, a spatial geometric partitioning mode (SGPM) , an intra block copy (IBC) , a fractional block vector (BV) , a bidirectional IBC (bi-IBC) mode, or a position dependent intra prediction combination (PDPC) mode, or wherein the cross-component based mode comprises at least one of the following: a linear model (LM) mode, a cross-component prediction (CCP) mode, a cross-component linear model (CCLM) mode, a multi-model linear model (MMLM) mode, a convolutional cross-component model (CCCM) mode, a gradient linear model (GLM) mode, a non-downsampled convolutional cross-component model (NS-CCCM) , a multiple downsample filter based convolutional cross-component model (MDF-CCCM) mode, a gradient and location based convolutional cross-component model (GL-CCCM) , a block-vector guided convolutional cross-component model (BVG-CCCM) , a convolutional cross-component model for inter block (inter CCCM) mode, a cross-component residual model (CCRM) mode, a local boosting cross-component prediction (LBCCP) mode, an inter CCP merge mode, an intra CCP merge mode, or a CCP fusion mode, or wherein the inter mode comprises at least one of the following: an inter merge mode, an inter advanced motion vector prediction (AMVP) mode, an AMVP-merge mode, an affine mode, a subblock-based temporal motion vector prediction (SbTMVP) mode, a subblock merge mode, a pixel affine mode, a decoder side motion vector refinement (DMVR) , a bi-directional optical flow (BDOF) mode, a geometric partitioning mode (GPM) mode, a GPM with merge mode with motion vector difference (GPM-MMVD) mode, a GPM with template matching (GPM-TM) mode, a GPM inter-intra mode, a combined inter and intra prediction (CIIP) mode, a CIIP-PDPC mode, a CIIP-TM mode, a CIIP-TIMD mode, a CIIP with subblock based motion compensation mode, a MMVD mode, an affine MMVD mode, a multi-hypothesis prediction (MHP) , an overlap subblock based motion compensation (OBMC) , a TM-OBMC, a local illumination compensation (LIC) , or a bidirectional LIC (bi-LIC mode) , or wherein the IBC-based mode comprises at least one of the following: an IBC merge mode, an IBC AMVP mode, a reconstruction-reordered IBC (RR-IBC) mode, an IBC merge mode with block vector differences (IBC-MBVD) mode, a combined intra block copy and intra prediction (IBC-CIIP) mode, an IBC with geometric partitioning mode (IBC-GPM) mode, an IBC with local illumination compensation (IBC-LIC) mode, a filter IBC mode, or an IBC with template matching (IBC-TM) mode, or wherein the blending-based mode comprises at least one of the following: an intra and inter blending mode, an intra and intra blending mode, an inter and inter blending mode, a CCP and intra blending mode, a CCP and inter blending mode, a CCP and IBC blending mode, a CCP and CCP blending mode, an intra and IBC blending mode, an inter and IBC blending mode, or an IBC and IBC blending mode.
Clause 72. The method of clause 71, wherein the intra and inter blending mode comprises at least one of the following: a CIIP-intra-inter mode, a CIIP-PDPC-InterMerge mode, a CIIP-TIMD-TMmerge mode, a CIIP-intra-affine mode, a CIIP-intra-SbTMVP mode, or a GPM-intra-inter mode, or wherein the intra and intra blending mode comprises at least one of the following: an intraTMP fusion mode, a DIMD fusion mode, a TIMD fusion mode, an intra luma fusion mode, an intra chroma fusion mode, or an SGPM intra-intra mode, or wherein the inter and inter blending mode comprises at least one of the following: a bi-predictive inter mode, a BCW mode, a GPM-inter-inter mode, or an MHP mode, or wherein the CCP and intra blending mode comprises at least one of the following: an intra CCCM fusion mode blending an intra prediction and a CCP prediction, or an intra chroma fusion blending an intra prediction and a CCP prediction, or wherein the CCP and inter blending mode comprises at least one of the following: an inter CCCM blending an inter prediction and a CCP prediction, or an inter CCCM merge blending an inter prediction and a CCP prediction, or wherein the CCP and CCP blending mode comprises an intra CCCM fusion blending more than one CCP prediction, or wherein the intra and IBC blending mode comprises at least one of the following: a CIIP-intra-IBC mode, a GPM-intra-IBC mode, an SGPM intra-IBC mode, or wherein the inter and IBC blending mode comprises at least one of the following: a CIIP-IBC-inter mode or a GPM-IBC-inter mode, or wherein the IBC and IBC blending mode comprises at least one of the following: a bi-IBC mode, or a GPM-IBC-IBC mode.
Clause 73. The method of any of clauses 1-72, wherein the method is applied for at least one of the following: a single tree coding, a dual tree coding, a chroma coding, a luma coding, an inter block coding, an intra block coding, an IBC coding, an intraTMP coding, or a DBV block coding, an intra slice, or an inter slice.
Clause 74. The method of any of clauses 1-73, wherein whether to and/or how to apply the method is indicated at one of the following: a sequence level, a group of pictures level, a picture level, a slice level, or a tile group level.
Clause 75. The method of any of clauses 1-74, wherein whether to and/or how to apply the method is indicated in one of the following: a sequence header, a picture header, a sequence parameter set (SPS) , a video parameter set (VPS) , a decoding parameter set (DPS) , a decoding capability information (DCI) , a picture parameter set (PPS) , an adaptation parameter sets (APS) , a slice header, or a tile group header.
Clause 76. The method of any of clauses 1-73, wherein whether to and/or how to apply the method is indicated at a region containing more than one sample or pixel.
Clause 77. The method of clause 76, wherein the region comprises at least one of the following: a prediction block (PB) , a transform block (TB) , a coding block (CB) , a prediction unit (PU) , a transform unit (TU) , a coding unit (CU) , a virtual pipeline data unit (VPDU) , a coding tree unit (CTU) , a CTU row, a slice, a tile, or a sub-picture.
Clause 78. The method of any of clauses 1-73, wherein whether to and/or how to apply the method is dependent on coded information.
Clause 79. The method of clause 78, wherein the coded information comprises at least one of the following: a block size, a color format, a single tree partitioning, a dual tree partitioning, a color component, a slice type, or a picture type.
Clause 80. The method of any of clauses 1-79, wherein the conversion includes encoding the current block into the bitstream.
Clause 81. The method of any of clauses 1-79, wherein the conversion includes decoding the current block from the bitstream.
Clause 82. An apparatus for video processing comprising a processor and a non-transitory memory with instructions thereon, wherein the instructions upon execution by the processor, cause the processor to perform a method in accordance with any of clauses 1-81.
Clause 83. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing instructions that cause a processor to perform a method in accordance with any of clauses 1-81.
Clause 84. A non-transitory computer-readable recording medium storing a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing, wherein the method comprises: determining a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for a current block of a current picture of the video, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream; and generating the bitstream based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates.
Clause 85. A method for storing a bitstream of a video, comprising: determining a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for a current block of a current picture of the video, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream; generating the bitstream based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates; and storing the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
Clause 86. A non-transitory computer-readable recording medium storing a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing, wherein the method comprises: obtaining an AMVP motion vector candidate for a current block of the video; refining the AMVP motion vector candidate based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate; and generating the bitstream based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate.
Clause 87. A method for storing a bitstream of a video, comprising: obtaining an AMVP motion vector candidate for a current block of the video; refining the AMVP motion vector candidate based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate; generating the bitstream based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate; and storing the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
Clause 88. A non-transitory computer-readable recording medium storing a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing, wherein the method comprises: obtaining a set of candidates for a current block of the video; applying a reordering process or a pruning process on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates, a distance metric for a candidate indicating a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined; and generating the bitstream based on the applying.
Clause 89. A method for storing a bitstream of a video, comprising: obtaining a set of candidates for a current block of the video; applying a reordering process or a pruning process on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates, a distance metric for a candidate indicating a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined; generating the bitstream based on the applying; and storing the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
Example Device
Example Device
Fig. 63 illustrates a block diagram of a computing device 6300 in which various embodiments of the present disclosure can be implemented. The computing device 6300 may be implemented as or included in the source device 110 (or the video encoder 114 or 200) or the destination device 120 (or the video decoder 124 or 300) .
It would be appreciated that the computing device 6300 shown in Fig. 63 is merely for purpose of illustration, without suggesting any limitation to the functions and scopes of the embodiments of the present disclosure in any manner.
As shown in Fig. 63, the computing device 6300 includes a general-purpose computing device 6300. The computing device 6300 may at least comprise one or more processors or processing units 6310, a memory 6320, a storage unit 6330, one or more communication units 6340, one or more input devices 6350, and one or more output devices 6360.
In some embodiments, the computing device 6300 may be implemented as any user terminal or server terminal having the computing capability. The server terminal may be a server, a large-scale computing device or the like that is provided by a service provider. The user terminal may for example be any type of mobile terminal, fixed terminal, or portable terminal, including a mobile phone, station, unit, device, multimedia computer, multimedia tablet, Internet node, communicator, desktop computer, laptop computer, notebook computer, netbook computer, tablet computer, personal communication system (PCS) device, personal navigation device, personal digital assistant (PDA) , audio/video player, digital camera/video camera, positioning device, television receiver, radio broadcast receiver, E-book device, gaming device, or any combination thereof, including the accessories and peripherals of these devices, or any combination thereof. It would be contemplated that the computing device 6300 can support any type of interface to a user (such as “wearable” circuitry and the like) .
The processing unit 6310 may be a physical or virtual processor and can implement various processes based on programs stored in the memory 6320. In a multi-processor system, multiple processing units execute computer executable instructions in parallel so as to improve the parallel processing capability of the computing device 6300. The processing unit 6310 may also be referred to as a central processing unit (CPU) , a microprocessor, a controller or a microcontroller.
The computing device 6300 typically includes various computer storage medium. Such medium can be any medium accessible by the computing device 6300, including, but not limited to, volatile and non-volatile medium, or detachable and non-detachable medium. The memory 6320 can be a volatile memory (for example, a register, cache, Random Access Memory (RAM) ) , a non-volatile memory (such as a Read-Only Memory (ROM) , Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM) , or a flash memory) , or any combination thereof. The storage unit 6330 may be any detachable or non-detachable medium and may include a machine-readable medium such as a memory, flash memory drive, magnetic disk or another other media, which can be used for storing information and/or data and can be accessed in the computing device 6300.
The computing device 6300 may further include additional detachable/non-detachable, volatile/non-volatile memory medium. Although not shown in Fig. 63, it is possible to provide a magnetic disk drive for reading from and/or writing into a detachable and non-volatile magnetic disk and an optical disk drive for reading from and/or writing into a detachable non-volatile optical disk. In such cases, each drive may be connected to a bus (not shown) via one or more data medium interfaces.
The communication unit 6340 communicates with a further computing device via the communication medium. In addition, the functions of the components in the computing device 6300 can be implemented by a single computing cluster or multiple computing machines that can communicate via communication connections. Therefore, the computing device 6300 can operate in a networked environment using a logical connection with one or more other servers, networked personal computers (PCs) or further general network nodes.
The input device 6350 may be one or more of a variety of input devices, such as a mouse, keyboard, tracking ball, voice-input device, and the like. The output device 6360 may be one or more of a variety of output devices, such as a display, loudspeaker, printer, and the like. By means of the communication unit 6340, the computing device 6300 can further communicate with one or more external devices (not shown) such as the storage devices and display device, with one or more devices enabling the user to interact with the computing device 6300, or any devices (such as a network card, a modem and the like) enabling the computing device 6300 to communicate with one or more other computing devices, if required. Such communication can be performed via input/output (I/O) interfaces (not shown) .
In some embodiments, instead of being integrated in a single device, some or all components of the computing device 6300 may also be arranged in cloud computing architecture. In the cloud computing architecture, the components may be provided remotely and work together to implement the functionalities described in the present disclosure. In some embodiments, cloud computing provides computing, software, data access and storage service, which will not require end users to be aware of the physical locations or configurations of the systems or hardware providing these services. In various embodiments, the cloud computing provides the services via a wide area network (such as Internet) using suitable protocols. For example, a cloud computing provider provides applications over the wide area network, which can be accessed through a web browser or any other computing components. The software or components of the cloud computing architecture and corresponding data may be stored on a server at a remote position. The computing resources in the cloud computing environment may be merged or distributed at locations in a remote data center. Cloud computing infrastructures may provide the services through a shared data center, though they behave as a single access point for the users. Therefore, the cloud computing architectures may be used to provide the components and functionalities described herein from a service provider at a remote location. Alternatively, they may be provided from a conventional server or installed directly or otherwise on a client device.
The computing device 6300 may be used to implement video encoding/decoding in embodiments of the present disclosure. The memory 6320 may include one or more video coding modules 6325 having one or more program instructions. These modules are accessible and executable by the processing unit 6310 to perform the functionalities of the various embodiments described herein.
In the example embodiments of performing video encoding, the input device 6350 may receive video data as an input 6370 to be encoded. The video data may be processed, for example, by the video coding module 6325, to generate an encoded bitstream. The encoded bitstream may be provided via the output device 6360 as an output 6380.
In the example embodiments of performing video decoding, the input device 6350 may receive an encoded bitstream as the input 6370. The encoded bitstream may be processed, for example, by the video coding module 6325, to generate decoded video data. The decoded video data may be provided via the output device 6360 as the output 6380.
While this disclosure has been particularly shown and described with references to example embodiments thereof, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that various changes in form and details may be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope of the present application as defined by the appended claims. Such variations are intended to be covered by the scope of this present application. As such, the foregoing description of embodiments of the present application is not intended to be limiting.
Claims (89)
- A method for video processing, comprising:determining, for a conversion between a current block of a current picture of a video and a bitstream of the video, a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for the current block, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream; andperforming the conversion based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates.
- The method of claim 1, wherein a first MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates is determined based on a first reference picture list (RPL) for the current block, and a second MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates is determined based on a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL.
- The method of claim any of claims 1-2, wherein the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates is determined based on a decoder derived scheme.
- The method of claim 3, wherein the decoder derived scheme comprises a template cost based scheme or a bilateral cost based scheme.
- The method of any of claims 2-4, wherein the first MVP candidate and the second MVP candidate are determined based on a cost metric.
- The method of claim 5, wherein the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates is one of all possible combinations of MVP candidates based on the first RPL and MVP candidates based on the second RPL that has a minimum value of the cost metric.
- The method of any of claims 5-6, wherein indexes of the first and second MVP candidates among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates are not indicated in the bitstream.
- The method of any of claims 1-7, wherein the method is used for a bi-directional advanced motion vector prediction (AMVP) coding mode.
- The method of any of claims 1-8, wherein an MVP index is indicated in the bitstream for a uni-directional AMVP coded block.
- The method of any of claims 1-9, wherein a first reference picture used for a first RPL for the current block and a second reference picture used for a second RPL for the current block are determined based on a cost metric.
- The method of claim 10, wherein a pair of the first reference picture and the second reference picture is one of all possible combinations of reference pictures from the first RPL and reference pictures from the second RPL that has a minimum value of the cost metric.
- The method of any of claims 10-11, wherein an index of the first reference picture and an index of the second reference picture are not indicated in the bitstream.
- The method of any of claims 5-12, wherein the cost metric comprises a bilateral cost or a template cost.
- The method of any of claims 1-14, wherein at least one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates are refined based on a decoder derived scheme.
- The method of claim 14, wherein the at least one MVP candidate only comprises a first MVP candidate based on a first RPL for the current block, orthe at least one MVP candidate only comprises a second MVP candidate based on a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL, orthe at least one MVP candidate comprises both the first MVP candidate and the second MVP candidate.
- The method of any of claims 14-15, wherein the decoder derived scheme comprises a bilateral matching based scheme or a template matching based scheme.
- The method of claim 16, wherein the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates comprises a first MVP candidate based on a first reference picture from a first RPL for the current block and a second MVP candidate based on a second reference picture from a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL, and whether to apply the bilateral matching based scheme or the template matching based scheme to refine the at least one MVP candidate is determined based on at least one of the following: a first picture order count (POC) distance between the current picture and the first reference picture or a second POC distance between the current picture and the second reference picture.
- The method of claim 17, wherein in accordance with a determination that the first POC distance is not equal to the second POC distance, the template matching based scheme is applied to refine the at least one MVP candidate, orin accordance with a determination that the first POC distance is equal to the second POC distance, the bilateral matching based scheme is applied to refine the at least one MVP candidate.
- The method of any of claims 1-14, wherein the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates comprises a first MVP candidate based on a first reference picture from a first RPL for the current block and a second MVP candidate based on a second reference picture from a second RPL for the current block different from the first RPL, and in accordance with a determination that a POC distance between the current picture and the first reference picture is not equal to a POC distance between the current picture and the second reference picture, a bilateral matching is applied to the current block.
- The method of any of claims 1-19, wherein in accordance with a determination that an AMVP-merge mode is applied to the current block, bilateral matching is applied to refine a pair of bi-directional motion vector (MV) candidates for the current block.
- The method of any of claims 1-20, wherein whether to refine both of the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates or only one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates is determined based on at least one of the following:bi-prediction with CU-level weight (BCW) weights associated with the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates,POC distances associated with the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates, ortemplate costs associated with the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates.
- The method of claim 21, wherein one MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a larger BCW weight is refined, orone MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a smaller BCW weight is refined, orone MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a shorter POC distance is refined, orone MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a longer POC distance is refined, orone MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a smaller template cost is refined, orone MVP candidate among the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates that is associated with a larger template cost is refined.
- The method of any of claims 1-22, wherein motion vector refinement is applied before motion vector reordering.
- The method of claim 23, wherein at least one MV candidate for the current block is refined, and the motion vector reordering is applied based on the refined at least one MV candidate.
- The method of any of claims 1-22, wherein motion vector refinement is applied after motion vector reordering.
- The method of claim 25, wherein a set of MV candidates for the current block is reordered, and at least one MV candidate is selected from the reordered set of MV candidates, and the selected at least one MV candidate is refined.
- The method of any of claims 1-26, wherein the method is applied for an AMVP-based mode.
- The method of claim 27, wherein the AMVP-based mode comprises at least one of the following: a coding unit (CU) based AMVP mode, an affine-based AMVP mode, or a symmetric motion vector difference (SMVD) mode.
- The method of any of claims 1-26, wherein the method is only applied for an SMVD mode.
- The method of any of claims 1-29, wherein information regarding whether the method is applied is signaled at a block level.
- The method of any of claims 1-29, wherein the method is applied by default without explicit signaling.
- The method of any of claims 1-31, wherein in accordance with a determination that a reference picture from a first RPL for the current block precedes the current picture in a display order and a reference picture from a second RPL for the current block follows the current picture in the display order, the method is allowed to be applied.
- The method of any of claims 1-32, wherein in accordance with a determination that a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a first RPL for the current block is equal to a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a second RPL for the current block, the method is allowed to be applied.
- The method of any of claims 1-33, wherein in accordance with a determination that a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a first RPL for the current block is not equal to a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a second RPL for the current block, the method is allowed to be applied.
- The method of any of claims 1-34, wherein in accordance with a determination that a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a first RPL for the current block is not equal to a POC distance between the current picture and a reference picture from a second RPL for the current block, an SMVD mode is allowed to be applied.
- The method of any of claims 1-35, wherein in accordance with a determination that a BCW mode is applied to the current block, the method is allowed to be applied to the current block.
- The method of any of claims 1-36, wherein in accordance with a determination that a BCW mode is applied to the current block, an SMVD mode is allowed to be applied to the current block.
- The method of any of claims 1-37, wherein in accordance with a determination that a local illumination compensation (LIC) mode is applied to the current block, the method is allowed to be applied to the current block.
- A method for video processing, comprising:obtaining, for a conversion between a current block of a video and a bitstream of the video, an AMVP motion vector candidate for the current block;refining the AMVP motion vector candidate based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate; andperforming the conversion based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate.
- The method of claim 39, wherein the target cost metric comprises at least one of the following: a sum of absolute difference (SAD) , a sum of absolute transformed difference (SATD) , or a weighted SAD.
- The method of any of claims 39-40, wherein the first set of samples associated with the current block corresponds to a template of the current block, and the second set of samples associated with the reference block corresponds to a template of the reference block.
- The method of any of claims 39-41, wherein the target cost metric is dependent on at least one of the following: an index of the AMVP motion vector candidate or a prediction scheme for the current block.
- The method of any of claims 39-41, wherein the AMVP motion vector candidate is an affine AMVP motion vector candidate, and whether the target cost metric is SAD or SATD is dependent on an index of the affine AMVP motion vector candidate in an AMVP list for the current block.
- The method of any of claims 39-41, wherein the AMVP motion vector candidate is an affine AMVP motion vector candidate, and whether the target cost metric is SAD or weighted SAD is dependent on an index of the affine AMVP motion vector candidate in an AMVP list for the current block.
- The method of any of claims 39-41, wherein the AMVP motion vector candidate is an inter AMVP motion vector candidate, and whether the target cost metric is SAD or SATD is dependent on an index of the inter AMVP motion vector candidate in an AMVP list for the current block.
- The method of any of claims 39-41, wherein the AMVP motion vector candidate is an inter AMVP motion vector candidate, and whether the target cost metric is SAD or weighted SAD is dependent on an index of the inter AMVP motion vector candidate in an AMVP list for the current block.
- The method of any of claims 39-46, wherein the target cost metric is determined based on a parity of an index of the AMVP motion vector candidate.
- The method of claim 47, wherein in accordance with a determination that the index is an even number, a first candidate cost metric is selected as the target cost metric, and in accordance with a determination that the index is an odd number, a second candidate cost metric is selected as the target cost metric, orwherein in accordance with a determination that the index is an even number, the second candidate cost metric is selected as the target cost metric, and in accordance with a determination that the index is an odd number, the first candidate cost metric is selected as the target cost metric.
- A method for video processing, comprising:obtaining, for a conversion between a current block of a video and a bitstream of the video, a set of candidates for the current block;applying a reordering process or a pruning process on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates, a distance metric for a candidate indicating a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined; andperforming the conversion based on the applying.
- The method of claim 49, wherein a candidate comprises at least one of the following: a motion candidate, a mode candidate, a cross-component prediction (CCP) model candidate, or a filter model candidate.
- The method of any of claims 49-50, wherein a penalty factor is applied to a value of a cost metric for a candidate among the set of candidates.
- The method of claim 51, wherein the cost metric comprises a template cost or a bilateral cost.
- The method of any of claims 51-52, wherein the penalty factor is determined based on a value of the distance metric for the candidate.
- The method of claim 53, wherein the penalty factor is positively correlated with the value of the distance metric for the candidate.
- The method of any of claims 51-54, wherein the value of the cost metric for the candidate is multiplied by the penalty factor.
- The method of any of claims 51-55, wherein the penalty factor is determined based on a type of the candidate.
- The method of claim 56, wherein a penalty factor for a candidate of one of at least one predetermined type is larger than a penalty factor for a candidate of a type different from the at least one predetermined type.
- The method of claim 57, wherein the at least one predetermined type comprise at least one of the following: a temporal candidate or a chained motion vector based candidate.
- The method of any of claims 49-48, wherein in the reordering process, a candidate with a larger value of the distance metric is put after a candidate with a smaller value of the distance metric.
- The method of any of claims 49-59, wherein the distance indicated by the distance metric is a displacement between the current block and the first block.
- The method of any of claims 49-60, wherein a pruning criterion of the pruning process is based on the value of the distance metric.
- The method of claim 61, wherein a plurality of candidates with similar values of the distance metric are determined to be redundant candidates, and the plurality of candidates are pruned.
- The method of any of claims 49-60, wherein a pruning criterion of the pruning process is based on diversity check related to at least one of the following: a motion vector difference, a reference picture index, a POC distance, a quantization parameter, or a parameter for determining a rate-distortion cost.
- The method of any of claims 61-63, wherein a plurality of candidates among the set of candidates close to each other are clustered to obtain a set of sparse candidates.
- The method of claim 64, wherein the clustering is performed based on discarding one or more subsequent candidate close to the first candidate among a set of adjacent candidates, orthe clustering is performed based on an intermediate block that locates in-between blocks corresponding to the plurality of candidates.
- The method of any of claims 64-65, wherein one or more chained motion vector candidates are generated by using one of the set of sparse candidates as a guiding motion vector.
- The method of claim 66, wherein the method is used for an inter prediction mode.
- The method of any of claims 49-67, wherein the distance indicated by the distance metric is determined based on at least one of the following: a horizontal displacement between the current block and the first block, or a vertical displacement between the current block and the first block.
- The method of any of claims 49-68, wherein in accordance with a determination that the first block and the current block are located in a same picture, the distance indicated by the distance metric measures a distance between the current block and the first block, orin accordance with a determination that the first block and the current block are located in different pictures, the distance indicated by the distance metric measures a distance between the first block and a collocated block of the current block in a picture comprising the first block.
- The method of any of claims 1-69, wherein the method is allowed to be applied to a block coded with at least one of the following: an intra mode, a cross-component based mode, an inter mode, an intra block copy (IBC) based mode, a palette mode, or a blending-based mode.
- The method of claim 70, wherein the intra mode comprises at least one of the following: an extrapolation filter-based intra prediction (EIP) mode, an EIP merge mode, an intra template matching prediction (IntraTMP) mode, a direct block vector (DBV) mode, a decoder side intra mode derivation (DIMD) mode, a DIMD merge mode, an occurrence based intra coding (OBIC) mode, a template-based intra mode derivation (TIMD) mode, a matrix-based position dependent intra prediction (PDP) mode, an intra merge mode, a multiple reference line (MRL) mode, a template-based multiple reference line (TMRL) mode, an extended multiple reference line (EMRL) mode, an intra luma fusion mode, an intra chroma fusion mode, a spatial geometric partitioning mode (SGPM) , an intra block copy (IBC) , a fractional block vector (BV) , a bidirectional IBC (bi-IBC) mode, or a position dependent intra prediction combination (PDPC) mode, orwherein the cross-component based mode comprises at least one of the following: a linear model (LM) mode, a cross-component prediction (CCP) mode, a cross-component linear model (CCLM) mode, a multi-model linear model (MMLM) mode, a convolutional cross-component model (CCCM) mode, a gradient linear model (GLM) mode, a non-downsampled convolutional cross-component model (NS-CCCM) , a multiple downsample filter based convolutional cross-component model (MDF-CCCM) mode, a gradient and location based convolutional cross-component model (GL-CCCM) , a block-vector guided convolutional cross-component model (BVG-CCCM) , a convolutional cross-component model for inter block (inter CCCM) mode, a cross-component residual model (CCRM) mode, a local boosting cross-component prediction (LBCCP) mode, an inter CCP merge mode, an intra CCP merge mode, or a CCP fusion mode, orwherein the inter mode comprises at least one of the following: an inter merge mode, an inter advanced motion vector prediction (AMVP) mode, an AMVP-merge mode, an affine mode, a subblock-based temporal motion vector prediction (SbTMVP) mode, a subblock merge mode, a pixel affine mode, a decoder side motion vector refinement (DMVR) , a bi-directional optical flow (BDOF) mode, a geometric partitioning mode (GPM) mode, a GPM with merge mode with motion vector difference (GPM-MMVD) mode, a GPM with template matching (GPM-TM) mode, a GPM inter-intra mode, a combined inter and intra prediction (CIIP) mode, a CIIP-PDPC mode, a CIIP-TM mode, a CIIP-TIMD mode, a CIIP with subblock based motion compensation mode, a MMVD mode, an affine MMVD mode, a multi-hypothesis prediction (MHP) , an overlap subblock based motion compensation (OBMC) , a TM-OBMC, a local illumination compensation (LIC) , or a bidirectional LIC (bi-LIC mode) , orwherein the IBC-based mode comprises at least one of the following: an IBC merge mode, an IBC AMVP mode, a reconstruction-reordered IBC (RR-IBC) mode, an IBC merge mode with block vector differences (IBC-MBVD) mode, a combined intra block copy and intra prediction (IBC-CIIP) mode, an IBC with geometric partitioning mode (IBC-GPM) mode, an IBC with local illumination compensation (IBC-LIC) mode, a filter IBC mode, or an IBC with template matching (IBC-TM) mode, orwherein the blending-based mode comprises at least one of the following: an intra and inter blending mode, an intra and intra blending mode, an inter and inter blending mode, a CCP and intra blending mode, a CCP and inter blending mode, a CCP and IBC blending mode, a CCP and CCP blending mode, an intra and IBC blending mode, an inter and IBC blending mode, or an IBC and IBC blending mode.
- The method of claim 71, wherein the intra and inter blending mode comprises at least one of the following: a CIIP-intra-inter mode, a CIIP-PDPC-InterMerge mode, a CIIP-TIMD-TMmerge mode, a CIIP-intra-affine mode, a CIIP-intra-SbTMVP mode, or a GPM-intra-inter mode, orwherein the intra and intra blending mode comprises at least one of the following: an intraTMP fusion mode, a DIMD fusion mode, a TIMD fusion mode, an intra luma fusion mode, an intra chroma fusion mode, or an SGPM intra-intra mode, orwherein the inter and inter blending mode comprises at least one of the following: a bi-predictive inter mode, a BCW mode, a GPM-inter-inter mode, or an MHP mode, orwherein the CCP and intra blending mode comprises at least one of the following: an intra CCCM fusion mode blending an intra prediction and a CCP prediction, or an intra chroma fusion blending an intra prediction and a CCP prediction, orwherein the CCP and inter blending mode comprises at least one of the following: an inter CCCM blending an inter prediction and a CCP prediction, or an inter CCCM merge blending an inter prediction and a CCP prediction, orwherein the CCP and CCP blending mode comprises an intra CCCM fusion blending more than one CCP prediction, orwherein the intra and IBC blending mode comprises at least one of the following: a CIIP-intra-IBC mode, a GPM-intra-IBC mode, an SGPM intra-IBC mode, orwherein the inter and IBC blending mode comprises at least one of the following: a CIIP-IBC-inter mode or a GPM-IBC-inter mode, orwherein the IBC and IBC blending mode comprises at least one of the following: a bi-IBC mode, or a GPM-IBC-IBC mode.
- The method of any of claims 1-72, wherein the method is applied for at least one of the following: a single tree coding, a dual tree coding, a chroma coding, a luma coding, an inter block coding, an intra block coding, an IBC coding, an intraTMP coding, or a DBV block coding, an intra slice, or an inter slice.
- The method of any of claims 1-73, wherein whether to and/or how to apply the method is indicated at one of the following:a sequence level,a group of pictures level,a picture level,a slice level, ora tile group level.
- The method of any of claims 1-74, wherein whether to and/or how to apply the method is indicated in one of the following:a sequence header,a picture header,a sequence parameter set (SPS) ,a video parameter set (VPS) ,a decoding parameter set (DPS) ,a decoding capability information (DCI) ,a picture parameter set (PPS) ,an adaptation parameter sets (APS) ,a slice header, ora tile group header.
- The method of any of claims 1-73, wherein whether to and/or how to apply the method is indicated at a region containing more than one sample or pixel.
- The method of claim 76, wherein the region comprises at least one of the following:a prediction block (PB) ,a transform block (TB) ,a coding block (CB) ,a prediction unit (PU) ,a transform unit (TU) ,a coding unit (CU) ,a virtual pipeline data unit (VPDU) ,a coding tree unit (CTU) ,a CTU row,a slice,a tile, ora sub-picture.
- The method of any of claims 1-73, wherein whether to and/or how to apply the method is dependent on coded information.
- The method of claim 78, wherein the coded information comprises at least one of the following:a block size,a color format,a single tree partitioning,a dual tree partitioning,a color component,a slice type, ora picture type.
- The method of any of claims 1-79, wherein the conversion includes encoding the current block into the bitstream.
- The method of any of claims 1-79, wherein the conversion includes decoding the current block from the bitstream.
- An apparatus for video processing comprising a processor and a non-transitory memory with instructions thereon, wherein the instructions upon execution by the processor, cause the processor to perform a method in accordance with any of claims 1-81.
- A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing instructions that cause a processor to perform a method in accordance with any of claims 1-81.
- A non-transitory computer-readable recording medium storing a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing, wherein the method comprises:determining a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for a current block of a current picture of the video, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream; andgenerating the bitstream based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates.
- A method for storing a bitstream of a video, comprising:determining a pair of bi-directional motion vector prediction (MVP) candidates for a current block of a current picture of the video, the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates being not indicated in the bitstream;generating the bitstream based on the pair of bi-directional MVP candidates; andstoring the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
- A non-transitory computer-readable recording medium storing a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing, wherein the method comprises:obtaining an AMVP motion vector candidate for a current block of the video;refining the AMVP motion vector candidate based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate; andgenerating the bitstream based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate.
- A method for storing a bitstream of a video, comprising:obtaining an AMVP motion vector candidate for a current block of the video;refining the AMVP motion vector candidate based on a target cost metric indicating a difference between a first set of samples associated with the current block and a second set of samples associated with a reference block corresponding to the AMVP motion vector candidate;generating the bitstream based on the refined AMVP motion vector candidate; andstoring the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
- A non-transitory computer-readable recording medium storing a bitstream of a video which is generated by a method performed by an apparatus for video processing, wherein the method comprises:obtaining a set of candidates for a current block of the video;applying a reordering process or a pruning process on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates, a distance metric for a candidate indicating a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined; andgenerating the bitstream based on the applying.
- A method for storing a bitstream of a video, comprising:obtaining a set of candidates for a current block of the video;applying a reordering process or a pruning process on the set of candidates for the current block based on values of distance metrics for candidates among the set of candidates, a distance metric for a candidate indicating a distance between the current block and a first block from which the candidate is determined;generating the bitstream based on the applying; andstoring the bitstream in a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium.
Applications Claiming Priority (8)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CNPCT/CN2024/093487 | 2024-05-15 | ||
| CN2024093487 | 2024-05-15 | ||
| CN2024100808 | 2024-06-21 | ||
| CNPCT/CN2024/100808 | 2024-06-21 | ||
| CNPCT/CN2024/105055 | 2024-07-11 | ||
| CN2024105055 | 2024-07-11 | ||
| CN2024108007 | 2024-07-26 | ||
| CNPCT/CN2024/108007 | 2024-07-26 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025237348A1 true WO2025237348A1 (en) | 2025-11-20 |
Family
ID=97719421
Family Applications (4)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2025/094975 Pending WO2025237346A1 (en) | 2024-05-15 | 2025-05-14 | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing |
| PCT/CN2025/094969 Pending WO2025237345A1 (en) | 2024-05-15 | 2025-05-14 | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing |
| PCT/CN2025/094977 Pending WO2025237347A1 (en) | 2024-05-15 | 2025-05-14 | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing |
| PCT/CN2025/094979 Pending WO2025237348A1 (en) | 2024-05-15 | 2025-05-14 | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing |
Family Applications Before (3)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2025/094975 Pending WO2025237346A1 (en) | 2024-05-15 | 2025-05-14 | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing |
| PCT/CN2025/094969 Pending WO2025237345A1 (en) | 2024-05-15 | 2025-05-14 | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing |
| PCT/CN2025/094977 Pending WO2025237347A1 (en) | 2024-05-15 | 2025-05-14 | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (4) | WO2025237346A1 (en) |
Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN103430540A (en) * | 2011-03-08 | 2013-12-04 | 高通股份有限公司 | Motion vector predictors (MVPs) for bi-predictive inter mode in video coding |
| CN112930684A (en) * | 2018-08-17 | 2021-06-08 | 联发科技股份有限公司 | Method and apparatus for processing video using bi-directional prediction in video coding and decoding system |
| US20220360768A1 (en) * | 2019-06-28 | 2022-11-10 | Sk Telecom Co., Ltd. | Method for deriving bidirectional prediction weight index and video decoding apparatus |
| US20240031600A1 (en) * | 2022-07-19 | 2024-01-25 | Tencent America LLC | Inter prediction direction and bcw index coding in merge mode |
| CN117768651A (en) * | 2018-09-24 | 2024-03-26 | 北京字节跳动网络技术有限公司 | Method, device, medium, and bit stream storage method for processing video data |
Family Cites Families (12)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US11503333B2 (en) * | 2017-11-14 | 2022-11-15 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Unified merge candidate list usage |
| WO2019216714A1 (en) * | 2018-05-10 | 2019-11-14 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for processing image on basis of inter-prediction mode and apparatus therefor |
| ES2984932T3 (en) * | 2018-09-13 | 2024-10-31 | Huawei Tech Co Ltd | Apparatus and method for decoder-side conditional motion vector refinement in video coding |
| WO2020175913A1 (en) * | 2019-02-26 | 2020-09-03 | 주식회사 엑스리스 | Method for encoding/decoding video signal, and apparatus therefor |
| WO2021244656A1 (en) * | 2020-06-05 | 2021-12-09 | Beijing Bytedance Network Technology Co., Ltd. | Intra block copy using non-adjacent neighboring blocks |
| CN118285100A (en) * | 2021-09-15 | 2024-07-02 | 抖音视界有限公司 | Method, device and medium for video processing |
| WO2023049219A1 (en) * | 2021-09-24 | 2023-03-30 | Beijing Dajia Internet Information Technology Co., Ltd. | Candidate derivation for affine merge mode in video coding |
| WO2023104083A1 (en) * | 2021-12-07 | 2023-06-15 | Beijing Bytedance Network Technology Co., Ltd. | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing |
| WO2023109966A1 (en) * | 2021-12-16 | 2023-06-22 | Beijing Bytedance Network Technology Co., Ltd. | Method, apparatus and medium for video processing |
| US12477118B2 (en) * | 2022-01-14 | 2025-11-18 | Mediatek Inc. | Method and apparatus using affine non-adjacent candidates for video coding |
| KR20250002161A (en) * | 2022-04-11 | 2025-01-07 | 퀄컴 인코포레이티드 | Derivation of affine merge candidates with linear regression for video coding |
| EP4510582A4 (en) * | 2022-04-12 | 2026-04-22 | Lg Electronics Inc | METHOD, DEVICE AND RECORDING MEDIUM FOR IMAGE CODING/DECODING BASED ON ADVANCED MOTION VECTOR PREDICTION (AMVP) MERGE MODE FOR STORING A BIT STREAM |
-
2025
- 2025-05-14 WO PCT/CN2025/094975 patent/WO2025237346A1/en active Pending
- 2025-05-14 WO PCT/CN2025/094969 patent/WO2025237345A1/en active Pending
- 2025-05-14 WO PCT/CN2025/094977 patent/WO2025237347A1/en active Pending
- 2025-05-14 WO PCT/CN2025/094979 patent/WO2025237348A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN103430540A (en) * | 2011-03-08 | 2013-12-04 | 高通股份有限公司 | Motion vector predictors (MVPs) for bi-predictive inter mode in video coding |
| CN112930684A (en) * | 2018-08-17 | 2021-06-08 | 联发科技股份有限公司 | Method and apparatus for processing video using bi-directional prediction in video coding and decoding system |
| CN117768651A (en) * | 2018-09-24 | 2024-03-26 | 北京字节跳动网络技术有限公司 | Method, device, medium, and bit stream storage method for processing video data |
| US20220360768A1 (en) * | 2019-06-28 | 2022-11-10 | Sk Telecom Co., Ltd. | Method for deriving bidirectional prediction weight index and video decoding apparatus |
| US20240031600A1 (en) * | 2022-07-19 | 2024-01-25 | Tencent America LLC | Inter prediction direction and bcw index coding in merge mode |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| WO2025237345A1 (en) | 2025-11-20 |
| WO2025237347A1 (en) | 2025-11-20 |
| WO2025237346A1 (en) | 2025-11-20 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| WO2024012460A9 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2024002185A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2025237348A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2026046362A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2026046361A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2025237290A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2025237277A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2026012433A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2026016986A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2026016986A9 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2025237377A9 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2025237377A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2026026926A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2026012422A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2025252078A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2025214451A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2025148892A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2025152989A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2025185720A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2025148884A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2025002293A9 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2025214423A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2026056827A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| US20260129217A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing | |
| WO2025214255A1 (en) | Method, apparatus, and medium for video processing |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 25803025 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |